Home

USER'S GUIDE - QNX Software Systems

1. 0 cee eee eee 000102 c510D4 Current Physical Node ID 000102 c510D4 Current Operation Rate 000 100 00 Mb s full duplex Active Interface Type 06 MII Active PHY Address 20eeeeeee 3 Power Management State Active Maximum Transmittable data Unit 1514 Maximum Receivable data Unit 1514 Receive Checksumming Enabled TCPv6 Transmit Checksumming Enabled TCPv6 Hardware Interrupt 0 0 e eee eee 0x5 DMA Channed Sitt CETERE E ROEE E EGS A 0 T O APEPEULE arians ENA S E N E 0xd400 0xd47f ROM Aperture rouser serant aN E 0 Memory Aperture ooro t tusser oo 6 Mba Sere lenses 0xe6000000 Oxe6000FFF Promiscuous Mode 02 eee eee eee off Multicast Support tin E eee eee Enabled Packets Transmitted OK 2000 104 Bytes Transmitted OK 0200008 10067 Broadcast Packets Transmitted OK 6 Multicast Packets Transmitted OK 1 Memory Allocation Failures on Transmit 0 Packets Received OK 0 ee ee eens 1443 Bytes Received OK 0 e eee eee eee 168393 Broadcast Packets Received OK 427970 Multicast Packets Received OK 37596 Memory Allocation Failures on Receive 0 Single Collisions on Transmit 0 Multiple Collisions on Transm
2. called my_archive tar The wf options tell pax to write a file e Multiple files to archive more than one file pass more files on the end of the command line For example pax wf my_archive tar code c header h readme txt Pax archives them all together resulting in the archive my archive tar e Directories just specify a directory name on the command line pax wf my_archive tar workspace This command archives all the contents of workspace into my_ archive tar e Partitions specify the directory name of the partition pax wf my_ archive tar fs hd0 t79 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Archiving your data This command archives all the contents of the t 79 partition into one very large archive my_archive tar You can keep the archive on your local system but we recommend that you keep a copy of it on a remote system if the local system gets physically damaged or the hard disk is corrupted you ll lose a local archive Extracting from an archive To extract from the archive you can use pax with the r option pax rf my_archive tar or tar with the x extract v verbose and filename options tar xvf my_archive tar To view the contents of the archive without extracting them use tar with the t option instead of x Compressing an archive An archive can be quite large especially if you arc
3. 0xA800 gt OxA87F Hardware Interrupt 0x7 Promiscuous iec teea ae ea a Disabled Multicast secsec ee mn a eee Enabled Total Packets Txd OK 1283237 Total Packets Txd Bad 9 Total Packets Rxd OK 7923747 Total Rx Errors 6 0 Total Bytes Txd 82284687 Total Bytes Rxd 1612645356 Tx Collision Errors 34380 Tx Collisions Errors aborted 0 Carrier Sense Lost on Tx 0 FIFO Underruns During Tx 0 Tx deferred srs seed stealer s sa 8 505 83301 Out of Window Collisions 0 FIFO Overruns During Rx 0 Alignment errors 0 GRE GrrOrs lt i 5 6 eo 5 dies eS be Stee Sie eS 0 You should take special note of the Total Packets Txd OK and Total Packets Rxd OK counters If they re zero the driver might not be working or the network might not be connected Verify that the Media Rate has been auto detected correctly by the driver How do get diagnostic information You can find diagnostic information in proc qnetstats If this file doesn t exist Qnet isn t running The qnet stats file contains a lot of diagnostic information that s meaningful to a Qnet developer but not to you However you can use grep to extract certain fields February 1 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 247 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Softw
4. 100 MPEGVIDEOBUFFERSTARTPERCENT The percent of the input buffer that needs to be filled before playing begins see mpegvideo in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGVIDEOPLUGINPRIORITY The starting priority for the decoder process see Voyager Plugin Variants in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGVIDEOREFILLONUNDERFLOW Refill the video input buffer to percent on underflow see mpegvideo in the Multimedia Developer s Guide PHEXIT DISABLE Set this environment variable to turn off the Photon Login dialog s Exit button so that users won t be able to exit to text mode For more information see phlogin2 and phlogin in the Utilities Reference PHFONT The registered name of the font server e g dev phfont For more information see ph in the Utilities Reference PHFONT_USE_EXTERNAL If this environment variable exists io graphics runs the font manager as a separate process see phfont instead of using phfont so You should set this environment variable for systems that have remote clients accessing font services on the host machine e g phindows phditto PHFONTMEM The size of an area in shared memory to set up between the task and the Photon font server for returning text bitmaps normally required only by Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Photon environment variables February 1 2005 graphics drivers For more information
5. Efficiency In general a script isn t as efficient as a custom written C or C program because it e is interpreted not compiled e does most of its work by running other programs However developing a script can take less time than writing a program especially if you use pipes and existing utilities as building blocks in your script Caveat scriptor Here are some things to keep in mind when writing scripts e In order to run a script as if it were a utility you must make it executable by using the chmod command For example if you want anyone to be able to run your script type chmod atx script_name Your script doesn t have to be executable if you plan to invoke it by passing it as a shell argument ksh script_name or if you use it as a dot file like this script name e Just as for any executable if your script isn t in one of the directories in your PATH you have to specify the path to the script in order to run it For example bin my_script February 1 2005 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts 207 Caveat scriptor 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd e When you run a script it inherits its environment from the parent process If your script executes a command that might not be in the PATH you should either specify the path to the command or add the path to the script s PATH variable e A script can t change its parent shell s environment or current directory unless you ru
6. e set environment variables see Environment variables below e run any commands that you need e set your file permission mask see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files If you want to create an alias you should do it in your shell s profile see ksh s startup file below not in profile because the shell doesn t export aliases If you do set an alias in profile the alias is set only in shells that you start as login shells using the 1 option Don t start Photon applications in profile because Photon isn t running when this script is executed use the HOME ph phapps file instead For an example of profile see the Examples appendix ksh s startup file As described above the login shell runs certain profiles In addition you can have a profile that ksh runs whenever you start a shell whether or not it s a login shell This profile doesn t have a specific name when you start ksh it checks the ENV environment variable If this variable exists ksh gets the name of the profile from it To set up ENV add a line like this to your HOME profile file export ENV SHOME kshre People frequently call the profile kshre but you can give it whatever name you want This file doesn t need to be executable Use ksh s profile to set up your favorite aliases and so on For example if you want 1s to always display characters that tell you if a file
7. Hidden files i e files whose names start with a dot e g profile aren t matched unless you specify the dot For example doesn t match profile but does The following examples show you how you can use wildcards with the cp utility to copy groups of files to a directory named tmp If you enter The cp utility copies cp tmp cp fred tmp cp fred 123 tmp cp ch tmp cp o tmp cp html tex Redirecting input and output Most commands All files starting with e g frd c flint All files beginning with fred and ending with one other character e g freda fred3 All files beginning with fred and ending with 1 2 or 3 i e fred1 fred2 and fred3 All files ending with c or h e g f rd c barn h All files that don t end with o All files that end with htm1 or tex e read their input from the standard input stream stdin or file descriptor 0 which is normally assigned to your keyboard e write their output to the standard output file stdout or fd 1 which is normally assigned to your display screen e write any error messages to the standard error stream stderr or fd 2 which is also normally assigned to the screen February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 49 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Pipes Sometimes you want to override this behavior If you want a process to Use this symbol Read from a f
8. The password for the group Neutrino doesn t support group passwords The numeric group ID username username The user names of the accounts that belong to this group separated by commas Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Account database Here s a sample entry techies x 123 michel ali sue jake etc shadow Each line in etc shadow is in this format username password 0 0 The fields are separated by colons and include username The user s login name password The user s encrypted password etc pwlock The passwd utility creates etc pwlock to indicate to other instances of passwd that the password file is currently being modified When passwd finishes it removes the lock file If you re the system administrator and you need to edit the account files you should 1 Lock the password database if the etc pwlock file doesn t exist lock the account files by creating it if it does exist wait until it s gone 2 Open the appropriate file or files using the text editor of your choice and make the necessary changes 3 Unlock the password database by removing etc pwlock February 1 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 23 Managing your own account 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Managing your own account As a regular non root user you can change your own password You can also customize your envi
9. The simplest way to do this mapping is to use a table in the etc hosts file This works well for small to medium networks if you have something a bit more complicated than a small internal network with a few hosts you need a nameserver e g for an ISP connection to the Internet When you use a name to connect to a TCP IP host the nameserver is asked for the corresponding IP address and the connection is then made to that IP address You can use either e anameserver entry in the configuration string CS RESOLVE obtained from a configuration file default etc net cfg or e a nameserver entry in the etc resolv conf file For example nameserver 10 0 0 2 nameserver 10 0 0 3 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Overview of TCP IP Routing February 1 2005 You can use phlip the Photon TCP IP and dialup configuration tool to configure the network and specify nameservers phlip sets configuration string CS_RESOLVE You can also set CS RESOLVE manually This string if it exists is always searched instead of etc resolv conf For more information on finding TCP IP hostnames and nameservers see etc hosts and etc resolv conf in the Utilities Reference Routing determines how to get a packet to its intended destination The general categories of routing are Minimal routing Static routing Dynamic routing You will only be communicating with hosts on your
10. You can specify one or more instances of the previous element For example in the more utility syntax the ellipsis after the operand file indicates that you can specify more than one file on the command line more myfilel myfile2 The enclosed item is optional You can use only one of the items e g a You don t actually type these symbols when you invoke the command For instance the syntax description for more is given as follows more ceisu n number p pattern pattern t tag x tabstop file You can combine multiple options that don t take an argument The ceisu notation is shorthand for c e i s u If an argument to a command starts with a hyphen you can signal the end of the options by using a double hyphen ls 1 my_file For more information see Utility Conventions in the Utilities Reference Displaying online usage messages If you want a detailed description of a utility see the Utilities Reference But if you just want a quick reminder of the syntax and options you can display the utility s online usage message by invoking the use command it s similar to man in UNIX and Linux For example to display the message for more type 56 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Utilities use more If you request usage for a command and the command either doesn t have an executable in the current path or d
11. procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 2 usr lib ldqnx so 2 display_msg Welcome to QNX Neutrino 6 x on the Malta evaluation board FEAE FE E HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE E FE a FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE SERIAL driver FEAE FEE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE E HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE a FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HHHH HE devc ser8250 e c1843200 b38400 0x180003f8 0x80020004 0x180002f8 0x80020003 amp waitfor dev serl reopen dev serl slogger amp pipe amp AEAEE HE AE FE AE EHE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE E HE HE FE FE AE HE HE FE AE E HE FE FE E HE FE FE AE E HE FE FE E HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE EAE PCI server FEAE AE HE AE AE EHE HE AEA AE HE AE AEA AE HE AE AE AE HE EE AE HE EA EE Aa E HE EAE AE EE E HE a EE AE AE A HEHE display_msg Starting PCI server pcei malta amp waitfor dev pci 4 Ha E HE AEE AR HE A HE a aE EE a HE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE EA FE FE EE FE HE HE HE a a RR HE HEHH HE FLASH driver Ha E HE AEE AE HE HE A aE aE AE EE a HE HE Ea FE HE FE E a FE HE EA HE EE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE a a EE display_msg Starting flash driver devf malta amp HEA E HE AEE AR HE AE HE a AEA EA HE FE EE EE FE Ha Ea EA FE FE HE FE FE FE
12. 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd find name ch exec grep i less which loads and runs the grep program for every file found The command that we actually used find name ch xargs grep 1 less runs grep only when xargs has accumulated enough files to fill a command line generally resulting in far fewer invocations of grep and a more efficient script The final piece less is an output pager The entire command may generate a lot of output that might scroll off the terminal so less presents this to you a page at a time with the ability to move backwards and forwards through the data The case statement also includes the following after the find command exit 0 good status This returns a value of 0 from this script In shell programming zero means true or success and anything nonzero means false or failure This is the opposite of the meanings in the C language The final block echo Use tfind stuff_to_find i echo where stuff_to_find search string m echo n echo e g tfind console_state looks through all files in a echo the current directory and below and displays all echo instances of console_state exit 1 bad status is just a bit of help if you pass incorrect arguments to the script it prints a description of how to use it and then returns a failure code 206 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Efficiency
13. A character string that the Qnet network manager tacks onto the nodename to form an FONN A unique name consisting of a character string that identifies a node on a network A directory tree of files laid out in a structure that matches where they would be if they were transported to the root of some filesystem package filesystem A virtual filesystem manager that presents a customized view of a set of files and directories to a client The real files are present on some media the package filesystem presents a virtual view of selected files to the client Neutrino doesn t start the package filesystem by default pathname prefix February 1 2005 See mountpoint Glossary 509 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd pathname space mapping The process whereby the Process Manager maintains an association between resource managers and entries in the pathname space persistent When applied to storage media the ability for the media to retain information across a power cycle For example a hard disk is a persistent storage media whereas a ramdisk is not because the data is lost when power is lost Photon microGUI The proprietary graphical user interface built by QNX Software Systems PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller a hardware component that handles IRQs PID Process ID Also often pid e g as an argument in a function call See also Process ID POSIX An IEEE ISO standard The term
14. Components of TCP IP in Neutrino npm ttcpip so Shared object that implements the tiny TCP IP stacks 256 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Choosing the right stack configuration npm tcpip so A symbolic link to the shared object thats implement the full TCP IP stacks It points to either npm tcpip v4 so or npm tcpip v6 so depending on what you ve installed io net Manager that provides support for dynamically loaded networking modules Network drivers devn Managers that form an interface with the hardware Choosing the right stack configuration Neutrino supports TCP IP with two different stacks e atiny stack npm ttcpip so e a fully featured BSD TCP IP stack npm tcpip so The tiny stack is meant for resource constrained client applications where it isn t necessary to have all TCP IP services present for a list of the services not covered in the tiny stack see the limitations listed in the Utilities Reference The way that you set configuration parameters depends on which stack you use e If you re using the tiny stack use command line options e If you re using the full stack use the ifconfig and route utilities These methods are described below For either stack if you re using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP you can use dhcp client to set the configuration parameters for you as provided by the DHCP server Februar
15. cvs commit You re prompted for only one log message The same message is applied to all of the commits made as a result of this single command 386 Chapter 17 e Using CVS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Concurrent development branching and merging Concurrent development branching and merging Sometimes you need to work on more than one version of a file For example you might need to fix bugs in a released version of a program while you re working on new features for a future release CVS makes this easier by letting you branch your files Branching When you create a branch CVS effectively creates another copy of a file or files and lets you edit either version CVS keeps track of which changes apply to which version The main development stream in CVS is called the head You could decide to develop new features on the head branch and create separate branches for released software O gt senn Branching a file in CVS For example let s suppose you re releasing version 1 0 of your new product Stella and that this product includes a file called foo c You can create a branch for this release like this cvs tag b Stella_1 0 foo c The tag Stella_1 0 is a sticky tag any changes that you make in your sandbox are associated with the Stella_1 0 branch not the head If you want to work on the head you can update your sandbox specifying the A option which c
16. shells An optional directory where you can put configuration files for phlogin2 or phlogin Chapter 6 e Working with Files 125 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd wm Configuration files for the window manager pwm For more information see Using the Photon microGUI etc printers etc profile A directory that contains printertype cfg files and a fontmap file used by the phs to ps utility For more information see Printing with spooler in the Printing chapter The startup profile script executed by the shell when you log in it s executed before SHOME profile See Configuring Your Environment etc profile d etc re d A directory where the default etc profile script looks for scripts to run when any user logs in The etc profile script runs each script in this directory that matches SHELL For example if the value of the SHELL environment variable is bin sh the script runs the scripts that match sh A directory where you usually keep local system initialization files For more information see the description of etc system sysinit in Controlling How Neutrino Starts etc resolv conft etc skel Resolver configuration file see also etc hosts above See etc resolv conf in the Utilities Reference A directory that holds the default version of profile When you add a new user to the system this file is copied to the user s ho
17. Also check to make sure that there are no bent pins on the cable If you re using an adapter to convert between SCSI 2 and SCSI 3 for example make sure you re using an adapter that s recommended for your hardware Not all adapters convert the connections correctly Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 317 Hard disks 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd SCSI RAID LS 120 ORB Under QNX 4 the SCSI drivers didn t support any device that had an ID greater than 6 This isn t a problem under Neutrino The maximum rate given for a SCSI device is the maximum theoretical burst interface throughput Sustained throughput depends on many factors Currently Neutrino supports only hardware RAID Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks devices There are many third party solutions for SCSI RAID available for Neutrino search for them on the Internet LS 120 is a SuperDisk drive that uses new technology to greatly improve head alignment enabling a much greater storage capacity 120 MB than conventional 3 5 inch disks Neutrino treats an LS 120 drive like an EIDE drive An ORB drive is a fast large capacity removable storage disk drive that uses 3 5 storage media and attaches to the EIDE ATA chain Ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly An ORB drive is simple to set up and appears in the dev directory as a hard disk For example e The hard disk as a primary ma
18. FIFO Underruns During Tx 0 Tx deferred 0 0000s 99673 Out of Window Collisions 0 FIFO Overruns During Rx 0 Alignment errors 0 CRO GPrOre nose bs cs oe ss esas oe ee oe 0 272 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 Chapter 14 Printing In this chapter Overview of printing 275 Printing with lpr 276 Printing with spooler 295 Troubleshooting 300 February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 273 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Overview of printing Overview of printing February 1 2005 The simplest way to print a text file is to send it directly to a printer For example if your printer is attached to your computer s parallel port you could simply type cat file gt dev par but there are a few problems with this e You don t get another command prompt until the file has been printed unless you add an ampersand amp to the end of the command e Ifthe printer is already printing something or it can t handle the type of file you ve sent the output might be garbled and you end up just wasting paper It s better to use spooling When you spool a print job it s placed in a queue until its turn comes up to be printed Neutrino provides two separate mechanisms for print spooling e the standard UNIX like lpr utility see Printing with lpr e the spooler utility see Printing with spooler You can use either
19. ifconfig ping syslogd touch modem_ans_ppp sh Services telnetd etc config inetd usr sbin telnetd telnetd usr sbin tftpd tftpd usr sbin pppd pppd bin login login bin ksh ksh etc ppp chap secrets Client Server Secret Addrs SEE AE AE HEHE A AE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE AE E HE FE FE AEE A password etc syslog conf x tmp syslog Inetd config Files etc services etc services etc protocols etc protocols etc termcap etc termcap etc passwd etc passwd etc default login etc default login etc resolv conf etc resolv conf etc shadow etc shadow etc inetd conf telnet stream tcp nowait root usr sbin telnetd tftp dgram udp wait root usr sbin tftpd etc hosts 127 1 localhost localdomain localhost Appendix A e Examples in telnetd in tftpd February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Configuration files for setting up a firewall 10 99 99 1 server server 10 99 99 2 client client To build the image using this buildfile you ll need to be root because it takes a copy of etc passwd and etc shadow which make passwords easy to remember but you can also put your own version of them into the buildfile as inline files Using two computers with modems you can have one automatically answer establish PPP services and authenticate You can then telnet and tftp to the server from a client
20. see fs cifs in the Utilities Reference If you want to start a CIFS filesystem when you boot your system put the appropriate command in etc host_cfg SHOSTNAME re d re local or etc re d re local For more information see the description of etc re d re sysinit in Controlling How Neutrino Starts NFS filesystem The Network File System NFS protocol is a TCP IP application that supports networked filesystems It provides transparent access to shared filesystems across networks NFS lets a client workstation operate on files that reside on a server across a variety of NFS compliant operating systems File access calls from a client are converted to NFS protocol see RFC 1094 and 224 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd NFS filesystem RFC 1813 requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual filesystem operation and sends a response back to the client In essence NFS lets you graft remote filesystems or portions of them onto your local namespace Directories on the remote systems appear as part of your local filesystem and all the utilities you use for listing and managing files e g 1s ep mv operate on the remote files exactly as they do on your local files This filesystem allows the same characters in a filename as the QNX 4 filesystem see Filenames earlier in this chapter Setting up
21. that you can direct data to The data is discarded Parallel ports e g for parallel printers see stty for configuration and devc par for driver details in the Utilities Reference Adopted by the PCI server on the machine this device lets programs communicate with the PCI server See pci in the Utilities Reference 120 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Where everything is stored February 1 2005 dev phfont dev photon dev pipe Adopted by the Photon font server either io graphics using the phfont so library or phfont running as a separate process This file lets programs communicate with the font server See io graphics and phfont in the Utilities Reference A special file that programs use to attach to a Photon server running on this machine For more information see Photon in the Utilities Reference Adopted by the pipe manager The presence of this file tells other programs such as a startup script built into an OS image that the Pipe manager is successfully running dev ptypx dev ptyqx dev ptyrx dev random dev sem dev sern dev shmem The control side of a pseudo terminal device pair Pseudo ttys are numbered with a hexadecimal digit When more than 16 pseudo ttys are present devc pty uses the additional prefixes dev ptygq dev ptyr and so on as necessary to accommodate the additional ttys See deve pty in the Utilit
22. 64K entries There are no such limits on FAT32 it has a practical limit of 2G 1 which is about 33 million entries on the directory size e For long non 8 3 names a single filename may need multiple entries thus reducing the possible size of a directory Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 465 Filesystem limits 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystem size Depends on the FAT format e for FAT12 it s 4084 clusters largest cluster is 32K hence 128M e for FAT16 it s 65524 clusters thus 2G e for FAT32 you get access to 268435444 clusters which is 8T Disk size Limited by the disk driver and io blk These filesystems don t really support permissions but they can emulate them CD ROM ISO9660 filesystem The limits for CD ROM ISO9660 filesystems include Filename length 32 bytes for basic IS09660 128 for Joliet 255 for Rockridge Pathname length 1024 bytes Disk size This filesystem also uses a 32 bit 2G 1 format We don t allow the creation of anything via s cd so it s read only Any limits would be imposed by the tools used to make the image which hopefully would be a subset of ISO9660 Disk size is also limited by the disk driver and io b1k NFS2 and NFS3 filesystem The limits for NFS2 and NFS3 filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes 466 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystem limi
23. Inside a program you can set the TZ environment variable by calling setenv or putenv setenv TZ PST8PDT 1 putenv TZ PST8PDT To obtain the value of the variable use the getenv function char tzvalue tzvalue getenv TZ You can get the value of CS_TIMEZONE by calling confstr like this confstr _CS_TIMEZONE buff BUFF_SIZE or set it like this confstr CS_SET CS_TIMEZONE JST 9 0O The tzset function gets the current value of TZ or CS_TIMEZONE if TZ isn t set and sets the following global variables daylight Indicates if daylight saving time is supported in the locale timezone The number of seconds of time difference between the local time zone and Coordinated Universal Time UTC tzname A vector of two pointers to character strings containing the standard and daylight time zone names Whenever you call ctime ctime_r localtime or mktime the library sets tzname as if you had called tzset The same is true if you use the Z directive when you call strftime For more information about these functions and variables see the Neutrino Library Reference 192 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Customizing Photon Customizing Photon Starting applications automatically If you want to run a Photon application whenever Photon starts put it in your HOME ph phapps file Put each comma
24. Network drivers devn Managers that form an interface with the hardware npm qnet so Native network manager to implement Qnet protocols Neutrino currently includes these versions e npm qnet compat so the original stack e npm qnet 14_lite so the new lightweight version which provides faster speed and enhanced reliability This version of the Qnet stack isn t compatible with the earlier version with regard to packet and protocol format By default npm qnet so is a symbolic link to the latest version of the Qnet protocol stack To determine which version you re using type ls 1 1ib d11 npm qnet so If any conflict arises see Troubleshooting later in this chapter yf you need to customize Qnet ask your sales representative about the Transparent Distributed Processing Software Kit TDP SK Starting Qnet You can start Qnet by e creating a useqnet file then rebooting or e explicitly starting the network manager protocols and drivers as described below February 1 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 241 Starting Qnet 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd If you run Qnet anyone else on your network who s running Qnet can examine your files and processes if the permissions on them allow it For more information see e File ownership and permissions in the Working with Files chapter in this guide e Qnet in
25. O o file extension 135 oem directory 169 OHCI Open Host Controller Interface 327 on 57 244 opasswd 32 125 open 448 451 options command line 55 endof 56 ORB drives 318 os DOS variable 63 OS images 119 212 409 buildfiles 135 477 481 483 creating 160 213 OS loader 160 oshadow 32 125 O SYNC 453 output displaying one screenful at a time 58 206 redirecting 49 stopping and resuming 39 overrides 170 ownership 132 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index P package filesystem 227 packager 232 packages creating 232 information about getting 230 managing 228 manifest 135 patches 232 packages file 232 packets broadcast 342 dropped 347 multicast 342 oversized 347 received 342 transmitted 341 342 pal file extension 135 palette file pterm 102 palette video 353 parallel ports 120 334 parameter substitution 47 parent directory 112 218 413 partitions archiving 400 blocks 409 417 checking directory structure 418 creating 214 key components on disk 408 loader 160 mounting 164 root directory 410 scanning for consistency 420 party conf 125 passwd command 3 24 27 February 1 2005 configuring 27 users removing 29 passwd file 20 entries 21 users removing 29 passwords etc pwlock 23 29 etc group 22 users removing 29 etc passwd 21 users removing 29 etc shadow 23 users removing 29 access permissions 20 backup files 32 125 b
26. Searching for a topic or keyword You can search for words in the help files by using the Find feature The Find panel is located under the Topics list If it isn t visible select View Topics or press Ctrl T Enter the word s in the Find box and click Go If you enter multiple terms helpviewer finds topics that contain all the terms 80 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Getting help with the Helpviewer You might need to generate a full text search index on a set of help files if one doesn t exist To do so select File Generate Index For large help sets such as the Neutrino help set this operation can take several minutes You can refine the search by selecting one or more of these find options Match Whole Words Check this box to match whole words If unchecked partial word matches are found For example grep also matches egrep Case Sensitive Check this box to match the case in the search terms Search Topic Text Check this box to search all the text in a topic If unchecked only topic headings are searched Search All Topics Check this box to search all the topics in the help set The pterm terminal window lets you select highlight a portion of text and then invoke the Helpviewer by either e Pressing the right mouse button to bring up the pterm menu and selecting Search help Or e Pressing Ctrl Alt H Th
27. This profile does the following e Uses an alias to turn on interactive mode for the rm command In interactive mode rm asks you for confirmation before it deletes the file The cp and mv commands also support this mode e Creates an alias 11 that runs 1s with the 1 set This gives a long listing that includes the size of the files the permissions and so on e Changes the primary prompt to include the current working directory the default if you aren t root is You can also change the secondary prompt by setting PS2 Note that you should use single quotes instead of double quotes around the string If you specify export PS1 pwd the pwd command is evaluated right away because double quotes permit command substitution when you change directories the prompt doesn t change Configuration files for spooler This section includes the configuration files to use for remote printing using lpr SAMBA and NCFTP You can find SAMBA and NCFTP in the third party repository February 1 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 485 Configuration files for spooler 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Using lpr PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT ee E The following macros are expanded for each filter command line Sd Device m PnP manufacture model id n Printer name s Spooldir name A real y AINERE sao ee eon ee en ne en eee ee es FileVersion 2 printer_name is the name that you specifi
28. Use these client pppd parameters in addition to the same chap secrets file pppd connect chat v f tmp dial_modem auth chap dev ser3 but use the appropriate serial port for the client side modem instead of dev ser3 Make sure you use the full path to your modem script The chat script dial modem is fairly simple ABORT NO CARRIER ABORT ERROR ABORT BUSY ATDTxxxxxxx CONNECT Configuration files for setting up a firewall If you ve installed the Extended Networking TDK you ll find various configuration files for IP Filtering in etce ipf conft Here s a sample configuration file for IP Filtering which you ll find in etc ipf conf Copyright 2001 QNX Software Systems Ltd All Rights Reserved February 1 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 493 Configuration files for setting up a firewall 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd This source code has been published by QNX Software Systems Ltd QSSL However any use reproduction modification distribution or transfer of this software or any software which includes or is based upon any of this code is only permitted under the terms of the ONX Open Community License version 1 0 see licensing qnx com for details or as otherwise expressly authorized by a written license agreement from QSSL For more information please email licensing qnx com Se Se Se Se OSE OE HHHH Sample of filter rules block in on enl all head 100 blo
29. and in yet others you click a button or select an item from a menu One important distinction between the editors is whether they re text based or graphical Text based editors are more flexible because you can use them in text mode in a console window in Photon remotely via telnet or qtalk and so on graphical editors tend to be friendlier and easier to use but can run only in a graphical window If you start a graphical editor from the command line you ll probably want to start it as a background process by adding an ampersand amp to the command line so that you can continue to use the current window while the editor is still open If you re using a text based editor start it as a foreground process by omitting the ampersand Neutrino includes these editors vi A powerful but somewhat cryptic text based editor that you ll find in most if not all UNIX style operating systems ped The Photon editor an easy to use graphical editor Chapter 7 e Using Editors 143 Supported editors 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd qed The QNX editor a fullscreen text based editor that has been around since the time of QNX 2 and still has many devotees We don t recommend that you use it but you can find out more about it in the QED Fullscreen Editor guide in your online documentation The QNX Momentics Professional Edition features an Integrated Development Environment IDE that incorporates v
30. but temporarily It doesn t run the user s profiles or significantly modify the environment For more information see the Utilities Reference To determine your current user name use the id command Logging out Photon mode To log out of Photon 1 Select Log Out from the Launch or Desktop menu or enter phshutdown on the command line The shutdown dialog appears 2 Select Logout End Photon session and click Ok If your system is configured to start Photon the phlogin2 or phlogin dialog reappears If you started Photon manually from text mode the system returns to text mode Even if your system started Photon automatically you can exit your Photon session and run in text mode To switch from Photon to text mode 1 In the login dialog click Shutdown The shutdown dialog appears 2 Enable Exit to text mode and click Ok If you start a terminal session from within Photon for example by clicking Terminal on the shelf the pterm utility starts a shell that runs as the current Photon user You can log in and out as a different user just as in text mode but when you log out the pterm window closes February 1 2005 Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 13 Shutting down and rebooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Text mode To log out of text mode enter logout at the command prompt You can also log out by terminating your login shell just enter the exit shell command or pres
31. by pressing Ctrl C How do I display information about an interface controller Use the nicinfo command usr sbin nicinfo device If you aren t logged in as root you have to specify the full path to nicinfo This utility displays information about the given network interface connection or dev io net enO if you don t specify one The information includes the number of packets transmitted and received collisions and other errors as follows 3COM 90xC 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet Controller Physical Node ID 000103 E8433F Current Physical Node ID 000103 E8433F Media Rate oc Goias a eee eee Sis 10 00 Mb s half duplex UTP MTU hae days toy diaree Segoe Hey vce Sareta Shes cers 1514 February 1 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 271 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Lanei OE ee as eae ae SS ee OOA 0 I O Port Range 0xA800 gt OxA87F Hardware Interrupt 0x7 Promiscuous 2 e ee00ee Disabled M lticas t 2245454545 554546945454568 Enabled Total Packets Txd OK 1585370 Total Packets Txd Bad 9 Total Packets Rxd OK 11492102 Total Bx Errors os exes eae hee sete 0 Total Bytes Txd 102023380 Total Bytes Rxd 2252658488 Tx Collision Errors 39598 Tx Collisions Errors aborted 0 Carrier Sense Lost on Tx 0
32. comment homedir shell The fields are separated by colons and include username The user s login name This can contain any characters except a colon but you should probably avoid any of the shell s special characters For more information see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line has_pw This field must be empty or x If empty the user has no password if x the user s encrypted password is in etc shadow userid The numeric user ID group The numeric group ID Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 21 Account database 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd comment homedir shell A free form comment field that usually contains at least the user s real name this field must not contain a colon The user s home directory The initial command to start after login The default is bin sh You can t specify any arguments to the login program Here s an sample entry from etc passwd fred x 290 120 Fred L Jones home fred bin sh etc group 22 Each line in etc group is in this format groupname x group ID username username The fields are separated by colons and include groupname group ID The name of the group Like a user s name this can contain any characters except a colon but you should probably avoid any of the shell s special characters For more information see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line
33. drwxrwxr x 11 barney techies 2048 Sep 08 09 08 ph rw r r 1 barney techies 254 Nov 11 2002 profile drwxrwxr x 2 barney techies 4096 Jul 04 09 06 ws rw rw r 1 barney techies 3585 Dec 05 2002 123 html The first column is the set of permissions A leading d indicates that the item is a directory see Types of files earlier in this chapter You can also use octal numbers to indicate the modes see chmod in the Utilities Reference Setuid and setgid Some programs such as passwd need to run as a specific user in order to work properly which 1 passwd rwsrwxr x 1 root root 21544 Mar 30 23 34 usr bin passwd Notice that the third character in the owner s permissions is s This indicates a setuid set user ID command when you run passwd the program runs as the owner of the file i e root An S means that the setuid bit is set for the file but the execute bit isn t set You might also find some setgid set group ID commands which run with the same group ID as the owner of the file but not with the owner s user ID If setgid is set on a directory files created in the directory have the directory s group ID not that of the file s creator February 1 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 133 File ownership and permissions 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Sticky bit This scheme is commonly used for spool areas such as usr spool mail which is setgid and owned by the mail group
34. host e Next spooler stores the printer properties file in the spooling directory Chapter 14 Printing 295 Printing with spooler 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 296 The etc printers directory includes general configuration files for the most popular types of printers currently in use including Printer s Configuration file Photon filter Canon bjc cfg phs to bjc Epson epson cfg phs to escp2 Epson IJC epijc cfg phs to ijs Hewlett Packard pcl cfg phs to pel PostScript ps cfg phs to ps There s also a special filter phs to bmp that converts a Photon draw stream file into a BMP The configuration files specify the possible and default settings for the printer as well as which filter is appropriate for it When you print from a Photon application the application sends the file to be printed to the dev printers printer_name spool directory The Photon application may construct another configuration file for the printer that you selected depending on optional information that you provide If you have a file that s already in a form that the printer understands or for which there s a filter you can print it by copying it into the raw spooling directory cp my_file dev printers printer_name raw When the spooler sees the print job in dev printers printer_name raw it copies the job file to the spooling directory var spool printers printer_name host and invokes the appropriate filter which prepares t
35. leaving the link local IP address active If a DHCP server becomes available later dhcp client can be restarted and a DHCP IP address applied without interfering with any TCP IP connections currently using the link local IP address Having both a DHCP assigned address and a link local address active at the same time lets you communicate with hosts that have link local IP addresses and those that have regular IP addresses For more information see nfm autoip so and dhep client in the Utilities Reference Using the SRI SNMP suite for Neutrino The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that uses the TCP IP protocol suite and facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth The SRI SNMP Suite for Neutrino consists primarily of ports of the EMANATE and EMANATE Lite technologies developed by SNMP Research International SRI EMANATE Lite is a statically extensible agent the EMANATE agent can be extended dynamically Both agents support SNMP V1 V2 and V3 and include development kits for developers to extend the agents February 1 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 267 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting If you re having trouble with your TCP IP network i e you can t send packets over the network y
36. read as quickly as possible from the disk hardware but also serves to minimize the fragmentation of data on disk For more information about performance see Fine Tuning Your System The original QNX 4 filesystem supported filenames no more than 48 characters long This limit has now increased to 505 characters via a backwards compatible extension that s enabled by default The same on disk format is retained new systems see the longer name but old ones see a truncated 48 character name Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 215 QNX 4 filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Long filenames are supported by default when you create a QNX 4 filesystem to disable them specify the N option to dinit To add long filename support to an existing QNX 4 filesystem login as root and create an empty read only file named longfilenames owned by root in the root directory of the filesystem ed root_dir touch longfilenames chmod a r longfilenames chown root root longfilenames After creating the longfilenames file you must restart the filesystem for it to enable long filenames You can determine the maximum filename length that a filesystem supports by using the getconf utility getconf _PC_NAME_MAX root_dir where root_dir is the root directory of the filesystem You can t use the characters 0x00 0x1F 0x7F and OxFF in filenames In addition 0x2F is the pathname separator and can t be in a filen
37. s spooling queue e rearrange the order of jobs in a spooling queue e find the status of printers and their associated spooling queues and printer daemons The lpre program gives the root user local control over printer activity Here are the program s major commands and their intended February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 279 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 280 uses see the Utilities Reference entry for the command format and full list of commands start abort Enable printing and ask 1pd to start printing jobs Terminate an active spooling daemon on the local host immediately and then disable printing preventing new daemons from being started by lpr You typically use the abort command to forcibly restart a hung printer daemon e g when lprq reports that a daemon is present but nothing is happening The abort command doesn t remove any jobs from the spool queue for this use lprrm enable and disable restart stop topq Chapter 14 e Printing Turn spooling in the local queue on or off in order to allow or prevent lpr from putting new jobs in the spool queue For example you may want to use the disable command when testing new printer filters because this lets root print but prevents anyone else from doing so The other main use of this option is to prevent users from putting jobs in the queue when the printer is expected to be unavailable for a long time Allow
38. t create hard links to directories each directory has two hard coded links already built in dot dot dot The filename dot refers to the current directory dot dot refers to the previous or parent directory in the hierarchy Note that if there s no predecessor dot dot also refers to the current directory For example the dot dot entry of is simply you can t go further up the path There s no POSIX requirement for a filesystem to include or entries some filesystems including flash filesystems and dev shmem don t Symbolic links 218 A symbolic link is a special file that usually has a pathname as its data When the symbolic link is named in an I O request by open for example the link portion of the pathname is replaced by the link s data and the path is reevaluated Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX 4 filesystem Symbolic links are a flexible means of pathname indirection and are often used to provide multiple paths to a single file Unlike hard links symbolic links can cross filesystems and can also link to directories In the following example the directories net node1 usr fred and net node2 usr barney are linked even though they reside on different filesystems they re even on different nodes see the following diagram You can t do this using hard links
39. the name of the application s executable to the HOME ph phapps configuration file For example ped amp pterm amp helpviewer amp If the file doesn t exist you need to create it and make it executable by changing its properties with the File Manager or by typing chmod x ph phapps Configuration tools Photon provides various configuration tools that let you change your Photon settings You can run them all from the command line and some you can start from the shelf or Launch menu Appearance pwmopts Appearance in the shelf or Launch gt Configure Appearance Select the background colors pattern and image settings as well as title alignment and window behavior including e whether you drag a full window or just its outline e whether to assign keyboard focus by clicking in a window or have focus follow your pointer e whether or not clicking in a window brings it to the front Select the Background tab to set the desktop color and pattern or to select an image for the desktop backdrop Fonts fontadmin Map font substitutions set options such as anti aliasing and to configure Asian identification For more information see The right fonts in Configuring Your Environment 76 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Settings and preferences Graphics phgrafx Graphics in the shelf or Launch gt Configure Graphics Select graphic
40. 112 Every directory in a QNX 4 filesystem contains these special links dot The current directory dot dot The directory that this directory appears in So for example you could list the contents of the directory above your current working directory by typing is If your current directory is home fred ph helpviewer you could list the contents of the root directory by typing Ls oif rakes but the absolute path is much shorter and you don t have to figure out how many dot dots you need Flash filesystems don t support and entries but the shell might resolve them before passing the path to the filesystem You can also set up hard links with these names on a flash filesystem Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filenames and pathnames A note about cd In some traditional UNIX systems the ed change directory command modifies the pathname given to it if that pathname contains symbolic links As a result the pathname of the new current working directory which you can display with pwd may differ from the one given to cd In Neutrino however ed doesn t modify the pathname aside from collapsing references For example cd home dan test doc would result in a current working directory of home dan doc even if some of the elements in the pathname were symbolic links No drive letters Unlik
41. 1514 Receive Checksumming Enabled Transmit Checksumming Enabled Not all cards support these options If your adapter supports them they tell your card which check summing method to use IPv4 TCPv4 UDPv4 TCPv6 or UDPv6 Hardware Interrupt The hardware interrupt is the network card s interrupt request line IRQ How an IRQ is assigned depends on whether the card is a PCI or an ISA card In the case of a PCI card pei bios assigns the IRQ for an ISA card the IRQ is hard wired Two ISA devices can t share the same IRQ but two PCI devices can DMA Channel This is the DMA channel used for the card This varies depending on the card and on the channels it has available I O Aperture The I O aperture is a hexadecimal value that shows the address in I O space where the card resides The I O aperture uses the I O address between the given values to locate and map the I O ports The range depends on the platform Memory Aperture 340 The memory aperture is a hexadecimal value that shows the address in memory where the card s memory is located The memory aperture uses the memory address between the given values to locate and map memory The range depends on the platform Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Network adapters ROM Aperture The ROM aperture is a hexadecimal range that shows the address of the card s ROM The ROM aperture uses the mem
42. 2 48 i_num_xtnts 3 50 i_mode 52 i uid 4 i 54 i gid 5 56 i _nlink 58 i_zero 4 6 62 i_type 7 63 i_status A directory entry The bits in the i_status field indicate the type of the directory entry QNX4FS FILE LINK QNX4FS FILE USED Entry type 0 0 Unused directory entry 0 1 Normal used directory entry 1 0 Link to an entry in inodes which should be used continued 412 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX 4 disk structure QNX4FS_FILE_LINK QNX4FS FILE USED Entry type 1 Links February 1 2005 1 Invalid The first directory entry is always for the dot link and includes a directory signature Iv QNX The hexadecimal equivalent of the character is 0x03 This entry refers to the directory itself by pointing to the entry within the parent directory that describes this directory The second entry is always for the dot dot link This entry refers to the parent directory by pointing to the first block of the parent directory Every directory entry either defines a file or points to an entry within the inodes file Inode entries are used when the filename exceeds 16 characters or when two or more names are linked to a single file If you ve enabled support for long filenames the root directory of the filesystem also includes the longfilenames file which stores information about files whose names a
43. 419 recovering 419 data server 370 data sharing 370 date 187 DOS version 59 DATE DOS variable 63 date setting 74 77 187 daylight 192 daylight saving time 192 days leap 188 dcheck 418 demd_blk h 453 DCMD_FSYS_PREGROW FILE 453 dd 404 dead keys 59 debugging drivers 6 printing 281 300 re local 175 security 435 Slinger 372 startup code 122 def file extension 135 default 123 deferred transmissions 343 deflate 233 del DOS command 59 February 1 2005 Del key 39 Denial Of Service DOS attacks 433 desktop 70 background 76 menu 70 devb 221 devb eide 309 312 starting 163 troubleshooting 313 devb fde 310 devb umass 330 deve con 12 41 334 starting 162 164 deve par 334 deve ser8250 331 348 349 deve tcon 12 41 devetl 453 458 devf 223 devg matroxg so 354 devg radeon so 354 devg vesabios so 361 devh ps2ser so 329 devh usb so 329 330 devi dyna 321 devi hid 329 devi hirun 320 devi microtouch 330 devices block special mounting 212 enumerating 127 129 168 275 307 333 pathnames 119 Photon 101 121 terminals 122 unmounting 212 Index 527 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd devn klsi so 330 devp pecard 323 devu ehci so 328 devu ohci so 328 devu prn 329 devu uhci so 328 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 124 257 263 266 dhep client 257 dhcpd 261 dhcpd conf 124 diacritical marks 59 147 152 dietician 458 diff CVS command 385 Digital Subscriber
44. 53 201 554 Index return codes 206 substitutions 46 test 64 variables 204 wildcard characters 48 205 shells directory 125 shmem 213 shortcuts keyboard 93 shtml file extension 369 shutdown 14 DOS version 59 shutting down 14 unexpectedly 117 SIFNAME 213 SIFREG 213 signals SIGINT 287 SIGTERM 14 sin 3 445 skel 127 Slinger 262 365 slogger 120 122 163 166 sloginfo 122 163 Small Computer Systems Interface See SCSI SMB Server Message Block protocol 223 snapshot 102 SNMP 267 agent daemon 262 context definitions 123 party configuration 125 variable names 124 snmpd 262 so file extension 135 SOCK 263 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index socket so NFS 226 sockets TCP IP 122 limits 469 soft links See symbolic links soft modems 351 software flow control 332 free 473 patches 232 third party editors 148 man 135 perl 202 troff 135 Software Kits SKs 8 241 sort 50 DOS version 59 sound card volume controlling 75 spatch 419 examining blocks within a file 422 special characters quoting 51 205 spell UNIX command 3 spill directory 131 230 spoofing 338 341 spooler 275 295 configuration files 485 spooling 275 directories 281 295 spreadsheets 5 sre 131 SRI SNMP suite 267 SSI 368 stack smashing attack 432 February 1 2005 standard I O performance 451 456 redirecting 49 standards 3 startup code 119 158 debugging 122 Photon application
45. 63 security 54 PATH_INFO 368 PHEXIT DISABLE 100 February 1 2005 PHFONT 100 PHFONTMEM 101 PHFONTOPTS 101 PHFONT_USE_EXTERNAL 100 PHGFX 101 PHINPUT 101 PHINSTANCE 101 PHOTON 101 355 PHOTONOPTS 101 PHOTON_PATH 101 PHSHELF_DISABLE 105 PHWM 101 PHWMEXIT 101 PHWMOPTS 102 preserving across logins 184 PRINTER 289 PROCESSOR 181 PS1 PS2 63 485 PTERMPAL 102 PTERMRC 102 PWD 63 PWMOPTS 102 PWM_PRINTSCRN_APP 102 RANDOM 63 DOS version 63 setting 183 SHELL 20 63 SOCK 263 SYSNAME 181 TERM 38 66 196 TMPDIR 63 181 183 TZ 167 186 value displaying 47 VISUAL 153 epije cfg 296 Epson printers 296 epson cfg 296 Index 531 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd erase DOS command 59 error messages discarding 50 lpr 300 redirecting 49 system logging 120 122 163 166 ERRORLEVEL DOS variable 63 EscB 43 EscD 43 EscEsc 44 EscF 43 esh 43 202 ESP Encapsulated Security Payload 437 Ethernet headers 347 hubs USB 328 Ethernet adapters USB 330 events Photon 69 ex 144 executables finding 54 keeping loaded in memory 134 running as a specific user or group 133 execute permission 132 203 execution remote 57 exit 14 42 exploits 431 export 182 183 187 exports 226 exports hostname 226 expressions arithmetical 48 exrc file 145 532 Index Ext2 filesystem 222 465 mounting 164 Extended Networking TDK 253 438 493 Extensible Markup Language XML files 135 extensions file
46. 71 74 profiling 11 ar 135 archives 398 compressing 401 creating 399 decompressing 402 extracting from 401 library 135 arithmetical expressions 48 ARM directories 118 limits 470 arrow keys 39 53 as 135 ASC_MEDIA_NOT_PRESENT 313 ASCII text files 135 Asian fonts 76 194 assembly language source 135 associations file 103 at UNIX command 3 AT style keyboards 320 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index ATI RADEON chipsets 354 attacks buffer overrun 432 denial of service DOS 433 stack smashing 432 takeover 433 attic CVS 389 attrib DOS command 59 audio cards 322 wave files 135 Authentication Header See AH autoconnect 97 123 AUTOCONNECT 97 AutoIP 263 266 awk 135 202 b file extension 135 backdrops 76 131 backquotes 47 Backspace 39 backups 395 bad blks 418 bad blocks bad blks 418 determining severity 396 removing 418 bat file extension 135 batch files 59 135 be bench calculator 135 bin 118 130 binary output files 135 bind ksh builtin 44 February 1 2005 bind DNS resolver security 432 BIOS 157 extensions 159 PCI 163 PnP reading 163 UDMA mode 315 bit bucket 50 120 bitmap blocks 409 creating 417 bitmap disk allocation file 117 410 bitmap graphical images 135 bitmapped font files 135 bits QNX4FS_FILE_LINK 413 Bitstream TrueDoc Portable Font Resource files 135 194 bje cfg 296 block special files 110 blocks bad in middle of file 422 bitmap
47. 91 printing over 276 282 293 294 298 routing 255 servers 253 sockets 122 software components 256 stacks running multiple 262 tiny stack 257 258 network status 270 troubleshooting 268 technical support 473 Technology Development Kits TDKs defined 7 Extended Networking 253 438 493 Flash Filesystem amp Embedding 223 233 telnet 39 telnetd 261 TEMP DOS variable 63 temporary files 130 TERM 38 66 196 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index termcap 196 terminals canonical input buffer 463 clearing 39 devices 122 drivers 334 initializing 41 174 Photon 37 93 pseudo 121 raw input buffer 463 remote session daemon 261 type setting 38 66 196 terminfo 38 66 196 test shell command 64 texinfo documentation files 135 text files 135 text mode booting into 127 172 disabling 100 textto 4 208 tftpd 261 tgz file extension 402 third party repository editors 148 man 135 perl 202 troff 135 threads 3 data sharing 370 idle 446 limits 468 priority 57 446 468 state 447 throughput filesystem 451 tic 38 196 tilde expansion 46 time February 1 2005 daylight saving time 192 displaying 74 setting 74 77 197 zone abbreviations 192 Central Europe 191 default 189 Eastern 189 Japanese 191 Newfoundland 191 offset from UTC 192 Pacific 190 setting 167 186 197 world wide 127 189 zone setting 77 time DOS command 59 TIME DOS variable 63 timers limits 468 timezone
48. Authentication Protocol authentication After PPP services have terminated or an error on modem answer occurs it restarts and waits for the next call bin sh SERIAL_PORT 1 DEFAULT_SERIAL_PORT dev ser1 PPPD usr sbin pppd DO_CHAT chat v ABORT BUSY ABORT CARRIER ABORT ERROR TIMEOUT 32000000 RING ATA TIMEOUT 60 CONNECT d d d STTY bin stty ECHO bin echo LOCAL_IP 10 99 99 1 REMOTE_IP 10 99 99 2 if SSERIAL_PORT then SERIAL_PORT DEFAULT_SERIAL_PORT fi do some initialization SSTTY sane raw lt SERIAL_PORT while true do SECHO Waiting on modem SERIAL_PORT SECHO Starting PPP services PPPD connect SDO_CHAT debug nodetach auth chap SLOCAL_IP REMOTE_IP SERIAL_PORT done 490 Appendix A e Examples February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes The TIMEOUT is 32000000 because it s a long period of time before the timeout takes effect chat doesn t allow an infinite wait The etc ppp chap secrets is as follows Client Server Secret Addresses allowed HEHE HE HE AE HE HE HE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE E HE FE FE FE E E FE FE FE ERR FE FE FE E E FE FE FE E E HE FE FE EE HE FE FE FE FE FE HH FE E HE HH HE password You can also extend the chat script that answers the modem to be a little more robust with specific events that should restart the answering service other than the event
49. CS_SYSNAME_ 186 CS TIMEZONE 167 186 Index 525 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CS_VERSION 186 ctime ctime_r 192 Ctrl A 43 Ctrl Alt 41 Ctrl Alt 41 Ctrl Alt Enter 41 Ctrl Alt H 81 Ctrl Alt n 42 disabling 104 Ctrl Alt Shift Backspace 96 104 disabling 96 Ctrl Break 39 Ctrl C 39 Ctrl D 14 39 42 43 Ctrl E 43 Ctrl H 43 Ctrl K 43 Ctrl L 39 Ctrl Q 39 Ctrl S 39 Ctrl U 39 Ctrll Y 43 current directory 112 218 413 changing 58 determining 45 58 PATH 54 cursor hardware 353 moving 39 cutting command line 43 CVS 377 406 attic 389 branching 387 commands add 381 390 checkout 380 388 389 526 Index commit 382 diff 385 get 380 390 import 382 init 379 391 log 385 389 remove orrm 389 status 383 tag 387 update 390 update or up 387 conflicts 388 head branch 387 merging 388 removing and restoring files 389 server 390 sticky tags 387 390 CVSROOT 379 cyberattacks 431 Cyclic Redundancy Check See CRC D D character while booting 161 daemons file transfer 261 remote 261 trivial 261 Internet 260 Internet boot protocol 261 Internet domain names 262 line printer 261 login remote 261 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index network routing tables 262 NFS server 262 printer 278 shell remote 261 SNMP agent 262 system status tables 262 terminal session remote 261 tiny HTTP web server 262 data ensuring integrity of 395
50. Ctrl Alt 2 When you terminate the session by typing logout or exit or by pressing Ctrl D the console is once again idle It doesn t appear when you use any of the cyclical console switching keychords The exception is console 1 where the system usually restarts Login For more information about the console see devc con in the Utilities Reference and Console devices in the Character I O chapter of the System Architecture guide After the character device driver processes what you type the command line is passed to a command interpreter or shell The default shell is sh which under Neutrino is a link to the Korn shell ksh There are other shells available including small ones that are suitable for embedded systems see Shells command interpreters in the Utilities Summary in the Utilities Reference In general terms the shell breaks the command line into tokens parses them and invokes the program or programs that you asked for The specific details depend on the shell that you re using this section describes what ksh does As you type the Korn shell immediately processes the keys that you use to edit the command line including completing commands and 42 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Shell filenames When you press Enter the shell processes the command line 1 The shell breaks the command line into tokens that are delimi
51. Dynapro touchscreens 321 E Eclipse documentation 135 edited input mode 38 EDITOR 153 editors 143 AbiWord 148 default 153 emacs 43 149 ex 144 jed 151 ped 146 ged 144 vi 144 530 Index vim 151 Workspace ws 151 EHCI Enhanced Host Controller Interface 327 EIDE 309 312 ellipsis in command syntax 56 elm 5 emacs 149 command line editing 43 email 5 EMANATE 267 embedded filesystems creating 223 shell 202 systems flash filesystems 223 467 OS images 119 212 temporary storagein 213 user accounts 17 web server 262 365 security 370 Encapsulated Security Payload See ESP encryption passwords 21 random numbers for 172 End key 39 end of input 39 end of options 56 66 end of line characters converting 4 208 Enhanced Host Controller Interface See EHCI Enter 39 enum 127 168 enum devices 127 129 168 307 333 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index enumerators 127 129 168 275 307 333 env 187 ENV 182 environment customizing 179 troubleshooting 196 environment variables ABLANG 97 105 ABLPATH 97 AB_RESOVRD 97 AUTOCONNECT 97 CMD INT 368 COLUMNS 183 configuration strings compared to 184 DISPLAY 97 EDITOR 153 ENV 182 FLASHQUALITY 97 HOME 20 63 180 HOSTNAME 63 167 181 185 230 HTTPD_ROOT_DIR 366 HTTPD _SCRIPTALIAS 367 HTTP_ROOT DOC 366 IVE HOME 98 JOPLUGIN ARGS 98 LD_LIBRARY_PATH 183 LOGNAME 20 63 MPEG 98 PATH 54 63 65 181 183 368 DOS version
52. E FE FE FE FE HE HE HE FE E FE EH a FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE NETWORK driver substitute your IP address for 1 2 3 4 FEAE HE E HE HE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE a FE FE FE HE FE HE HHHH HE display_msg Starting on board ethernet with large TCP IP stack io net dpcnet ptcpip waitfor dev io net en0 4 ifconfig en0 1 2 3 4 478 Appendix A e Examples February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Buildfile for an NFS mounting target February 1 2005 FEAE AE AE HE AE A EE HE AEA E HE A AEA E HE EA E E EA E E EA aE EE EAA aE aE E HE FE aE HE A EE HEHE HHH REMOTE_DEBUG gdb or Momentics refer to the help documentation for the gdb qconn and the IDE for more information on remote debugging the commands shown require that NETWORK is enabled too Ha HE AE HE ARE AE HE A HE a AEA EE FE HE EE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE a FE FE EE FE FE FE FE FE a FE HE Ea HE Ea FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HHHH HE devc pty amp waitfor dev ptyp0 4 qconn port 8000 FEAE HE HEHE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE USB driver Ha HE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE AE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E
53. FE FE AE A FE E FE FE FEAE HE FE HHH general commands 480 Appendix A e Examples February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd qnxbasedma build FEAE AE HEHE AEE AE AE AEE EAE HE AE AEE HE AEA AE HE EA EA FE FE AE AE FE HE EE a EA FE FE A EE EA EE EE EB EA 1s ksh pipe pidin uname slogger sloginfo slay HEE aE AE A AE AE AE AEA AEA AE EA AE A A AE A EAE EE EA EE EA EA EA EA EE EE EE EA END OF BUILD SCRIPT HEE AE AE AEE AE AEA aE AE A AEA AE A EA A A EA EE EA A aE EAE EA EEA EE EEE EE A qnxbasedma build February 1 2005 Here s the buildfile for boot on an x86 platform qnxbasedma build In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read The buildfile for QNX Neutrino booting on a PC virtual x86 bios compress boot Reserve 64k of video memory to handle multiple video cards startup bios s64k PATH is the safe path for executables confstr _CS_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH is the safe path for libraries confstr _CS_LIBPATH i e This is the path searched for libs in setuid setgid executables PATH proc boot bin usr bin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot lib usr 1lib 1ib dll procnto script startup script To save memory make everyone use the libc in the boot image For speed fewer symbolic lookups point to libc so 2 instead
54. FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HHHH HE display msg Starting USB driver io usb duhci amp waitfor dev io usb io usb 4 Ha HE E HE AE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE These env variables are inherited by all the programs which follow FEAE HE E HE HE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HEHH HE SYSNAME nto TERM qansi PATH proc boot bin sbin usr bin usr sbin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot 1lib usr lib lib d1l HE AE AE HE AE AE EAE A EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE NFS_REMOTE_FILESYSTEM This section is dependent on the NETWORK driver Don t forget to properly configure and run the nfsd daemon on the remote fileserver substitute the hostname or IP address of your NFS server for nfs_server The server must be exporting asr qnx630 target qnx6 mipsle HEAR AE AEA EHE HE AEA AEE AE AEA AE HE ERA AE HE AE EA EE EA EE EA EE EE EEE E HE a FE E EE EA EB EE display_msg Mounting NFS filesystem waitfor dev socket 4 fs nfs3 nfs_server usr qnx630 target qnx6 mipsle mnt session
55. If you have the Integrated Development Environment on your system you ll find that it s the best tool for determining how you can improve your system s performance For more information see the IDE User s Guide Improving performance February 1 2005 If you run hogs you ll discover which processes are using the most CPU time For example hogs n 5 PID NAME MSEC PIDS SYSTEM 1 1315 53 43 6 devb eide 593 24 19 54358061 make 206 8 6 1 2026 83 67 6 devb eide 294 12 9 1 2391 75 79 6 devb eide 335 10 11 54624301 htmlindex 249 T 8 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 445 Improving performance 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 446 1 1004 24 33 54624301 htmlindex 2959 71 98 54624301 htmlindex 4156 96 138 54624301 htmlindex 4225 96 140 54624301 htmlindex 4162 96 138 1 71 35 2 6 devb eide 75 37 2 1 3002 97 100 Let s look at this output The first iteration indicates that process 1 is using 53 of the CPU Process 1 is always the process manager procnto In this case it s the idle thread that s using most of the CPU The entry for devb eide reflects disk I O The make utility is also using the CPU In the second iteration procnto and devb eide use most of the CPU but the next few iterations show that htmlindex a program that creates the keyword index for our online documentation gets up to 96 of the CPU When htmlindex finishes running procento and devb
56. Ltd administrator alias atomic See superuser A shell feature that lets you create new commands or specify your favorite options For example alias my_ls 1ls F creates an alias called my_1s that the shell replaces with 1s F Of or relating to atoms In operating systems this refers to the requirement that an operation or sequence of operations be considered indivisible For example a thread may need to move a file position to a given location and read data These operations must be performed in an atomic manner otherwise another thread could preempt the original thread and move the file position to a different location thus causing the original thread to read data from the second thread s position BIOS ROM Monitor extension signature budget February 1 2005 A certain sequence of bytes indicating to the BIOS or ROM Monitor that the device is to be considered an extension to the BIOS or ROM Monitor control is to be transferred to the device by the BIOS or ROM Monitor with the expectation that the device will perform additional initializations On the x86 architecture the two bytes 0x55 and 0xAA must be present in that order as the first two bytes in the device with control being transferred to offset 0x0003 In sporadic scheduling the amount of time a thread is permitted to execute at its normal priority before being dropped to its low priority Glossary 499 2005 QNX Soft
57. SUPPORTED HARDWARE Ht section below the build script section or refer to the BSP docs Tip Each sub section which relates to a particular device is marked with its tag ex SERIAL You can use the search features of Ht your editor to quickly find and add or remove support for these devices February 1 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 477 Buildfile for an NFS mounting target 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd HEE aE AE A EAE EAE AEA AE EA AE A EA A EAE AE EAA EE EA A aE EA EAE EA EE EE A NOTES HEE aE AE A EEEE EEEE E EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE LARARE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE START OF BUILD SCRIPT HEE HE AE A AEE AE AEA EA E EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE image 0x800a0000 virtual mipsle srec bootstrap FEAE AE HEHE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE AE FE E HE FE FE AE EHE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE FEAE HE FE FE FE E FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE E FE FE HEHE HE FE EB a A A default frequency for 4kc is 80Mhz adjust f parameter for different frequencies FEAE AE HEHE AE AE FEAE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE AE FE E HE FE FE AE E HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE FEAE HE FE FE FE E FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE E FE AEAEE TE EE aE RA startup malta f 80000000 v PATH proc boot procnto 32 v script script
58. System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd General OS security Effects of attacks Another way of classifying exploits is by their effect Takeover attacks These let the user take the machine over or at least cause it to do something unpredictable to the owner but predictable to the attacker Denial Of Service DOS attacks These are just disruptions An example of this is flood pinging a machine to slow down its networking to the point that it s unusable DOS attacks are notoriously difficult to deal with and often must be handled in a reactive rather than proactive fashion As an example there are very few systems that can t be brought to their knees by a malicious local user although with such tools as the ksh s ulimit builtin command you can often minimize these attacks Using these divisions you can look at a system and see which classes of attacks it could potentially be vulnerable to and take steps to prevent them Viruses A virus is generally considered to be an infection that runs code on the host e g a Trojan horse Viruses need an entry point and a host The entry points for a virus include e an open interface e g ActiveX Neutrino has none e a security hole such as buffer overflows these are specific to flaws in specific services based on a common industry standard code base These are limited since we ship only a limited set of standard BSD services
59. The io graphics configuration file in the documentation for io graphics in the Utilities Reference e You can use the phgrafx utility or io graphics command line to configure only single displays not multiple displays e We don t guarantee support for arbitrary combinations of video cards Here s a step by step example of creating a configuration file for a Radeon 9700 Pro video card for dual headed display 1 Create the GLOBAL section This has a single entry devices that lists all the video cards supported In this example there s one device 354 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Video cards February 1 2005 GLOBAL devices radeon For each device create a DEVICE name section This section configures the hardware specific settings In this example we set the e graphics driver DLL which is typically in the form devg device name so or in this case devg radeon so e hardware vendor and device ID and the PCI index see PCI AGP devices earlier in this chapter e number of displays supported by the device 2 in this case e plugins which in this case is the Photon plugin e Photon server which we leave blank to use the default Photon server specified by the PHOTON environment variable dev photon by default DEVICE radeon dllpath devg radeon so pci_vendor_id 0x1002 pci_device_id 0x4e44 pci_index 0 displays 2
60. The number of open connections and sockets is limited only by memory and by the maximum number of file descriptors per process see File descriptors above Shared memory The number of shared memory areas is limited by the allowed virtual address space for a process which depends on the target architecture See the RLIMIT_AS and RLIMIT_DATA resources for setrlimit in the Library Reference February 1 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 469 Other system limits 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Message queues The number of message queues is limited by the number of available file descriptors see File descriptors above The default maximum number of entries in a queue is 1024 and the default maximum size of a queue entry is 4096 bytes See mg _open in the Library Reference Platform specific limits Limit x86 PPC MIPS SH 4 ARM System 64G 36 bit 64G 36 bit 1T 40 bit 512M 4G 32 bit RAM addressing addressing addressing 29 bit addressing addressing CPUs 8 8 8 1 1 Virtual 3 5G 3G 2G 2G 32M address space The hardware might further limit the number of CPUs t These are the absolute maximum limits for the virtual address space you can reduce them by setting the RLIMIT_AS resource with setrlimit 470 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits February 1 2005 Chapter 22 Technical Support February 1 2005 Chapter 22 e Technical Support 471 2005 QNX Software Syst
61. This shared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting a DOS FAT filesystem If you want to read and write to a DOS floppy disk mount it by typing something like this mount t dos dev fd0 fd For information about valid characters for filenames in a DOS filesystem see the Microsoft Developer Network at http msdn microsoft com FAT 8 3 names are the most limited they re uppercase letters digits and _ VFAT names relax it a bit and add the lowercase letters and Neutrino s DOS filesystem silently converts FAT 8 3 filenames to uppercase to give the illusion that lowercase is allowed but it doesn t preserve the case For more information on the DOS filesystem manager see fs dos so in the Utilities Reference and Filesystems in the System Architecture guide CD ROM filesystem Neutrino s CD ROM filesystem provides transparent access to CD ROM media so you can treat CD ROM filesystems as though they were POSIX filesystems This transparency lets processes operate on CD ROM files without any special knowledge or work on their part The fs cd so shared object provides filesystem support for the ISO 9660 standard as well as a number of extensions including Rock Ridge RRIP Joliet Microsoft and multisession Kodak Photo CD enhanced audio This shared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting an ISO 9660 filesystem The CD ROM filesystem acce
62. This should create a volume called dev hd0t79 Depending on the state of the QNX 4 partition the mount may or may not fail If the partition information is correct there shouldn t be any problem Since the root already exists on a CD or on a remote disk on the network we ve mounted the local hard disk partition as a filesystem with the name hd Your goal now would be to run the chkfsys utility on the disk to examine and possibly fix the filesystem If you booted from CD and you don t suspect there s any damage to the filesystem on your hard disk e g the system was unable to boot because of a simple error introduced in the boot file or system initialization file you can see up a symbolic link to your hard disk partition in the process manager s in memory prefix tree ln sP hd If you run this command you can skip the rest of this section If the mount fails If the mount fails the first portion of the QNX 4 partition is probably damaged since the driver will refuse to mount what it considers to be a corrupted filesystem In this case you can use the dinit utility to overlay enough good information onto the disk to satisfy the driver dinit hr dev hd0t79 The r option tells dinit to rewrite e the root block e the bitmap with all blocks allocated e the constant portions of the root directory February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 425 What to do if your
63. USB UNIX compared to Neutrino 3 unlink 220 unnamed semaphores limits 469 Unshielded Twisted Pair See UTP up arrow 39 53 update CVS command 390 usage messages 56 135 usb 326 USB Universal Serial Bus 326 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index mass storage devices 330 use command 3 56 use file extension 135 usegnet 127 168 242 USERNAME DOS variable 63 users accounts managing 25 reading etc passwd 21 troubleshooting 32 adding 27 embedded systems 17 IDs 17 18 assigning 27 name login 17 18 27 name real 22 28 removing 29 root 18 running programs as a specific 133 trusted 261 usr 130 UTC Coordinated Universal Time 167 187 hardware clock 167 197 UTF 8 filenames 116 typing 147 152 utilities basic 58 documentation 130 DOS equivalents for 59 location of 118 129 131 logging information about users 21 names completing 44 remote execution 57 February 1 2005 syntax conventions 55 usage messages 56 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair 339 V var 131 variables See also environment variables DOS equivalents for 63 shell 204 vector reset 157 ver DOS command 59 version control 377 Vesa driver 361 vi 144 video cards 352 drivers 77 modes 352 vim 151 virtual address space limits 470 virtual consoles 41 70 74 75 virtual filesystems 233 viruses 433 VISUAL 153 volume controlling 75 volume so 75 Voyager web browser 84 135 Cache tab 86 Connect
64. Utilities Reference You can change the permissions and ownership for a file or directory only if you re its owner or you re logged in as root If you want to change both the permissions and the ownership change the permissions first Once you ve assigned the ownership to another user you can t change the permissions Permissions are divided into these categories u Permissions for the user i e the owner g Permissions for the group o Permissions for others i e everyone who isn t in the group Each set of permissions includes r Read permission w Write permission x Execute permission For a directory this is permission to list or search the directory 132 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd File ownership and permissions sors Setuid or setgid see below tort Sticky bit see below For example if you list your home directory using 1s al you might get output like this total 94286 drwxr xr x 18 barney techies 6144 Sep 26 06 37 drwxrwxr x 3 root root 2048 Jul 15 07 09 drwx 2 barney techies 4096 Jul 04 11 17 AbiSuite rw rw r 1 barney techies 185 Oct 27 2000 Sig rw 1 barney techies 34 Jul 05 2002 cvspass drwxr xr x 2 barney techies 2048 Feb 26 2003 ica rw rw r 1 barney techies 320 Nov 11 2002 kshre rw rw r 1 barney techies 0 Oct 02 11 17 lastlogin drwxrwxr x 3 barney techies 2048 Oct 17 2002 mozilla
65. What to do if your system will no longer boot 422 If the mount fails 425 If the disk is unrecoverable 426 If the filesystem is intact 427 Securing Your System 429 General OS security 431 Remote and local attacks 431 Effects of attacks 433 Viruses 433 Neutrino security in general 434 Neutrino specific security issues 435 Message passing 435 pdebug 435 qconn 436 422 Contents XV 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Xvi 20 21 Contents Qnet 436 IPSec 436 Setting up a firewall 437 Starting IP Filter and NAT 438 Configuring IP Filtering 438 Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Fine Tuning Your System 443 Getting the system s status 445 Improving performance 445 Faster boot times 447 Filesystems 447 Performance and robustness 449 Metadata updates 449 Throughput 451 Configuration 453 How small can you get 458 Understanding System Limits 459 The limits on describing limits 461 Configurable limits 461 Filesystem limits 462 Querying filesystem limits 463 QNX 4 filesystem 464 Ext2 filesystem 465 DOS FAT12 16 32 filesystem 465 CD ROM ISO9660 filesystem 466 NFS2 and NFS3 filesystem 466 CIFS filesystem 467 Embedded flash filesystem 467 Other system limits 468 File descriptors 469 Synchronization primitives 469 441 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 22 February 1 2005 TCP IP limits 469 Shared memory 469 Message queues 470 Platform specific limits 4
66. Where everything is stored root sbin February 1 2005 proc boot The image filesystem that comprises the boot image For more information see Making an OS Image in Building Embedded Systems proc dumper A special entry that receives notification when a process terminates abnormally proc self The address space for yourself i e for the process that s making the query proc mount Pathname space mountpoints If you list the contents of the proc directory proc mount doesn t show up but you can list the contents of proc mount The root directory is the home directory for the root user This directory contains essential system binaries including e drivers e g devb devc dev devp devu e enumerators e g enum devices e initialization programs e g diskboot seedres e configuration utilities e g dinit and repair utilities e g chkfsys chkdosfs e managers e g io net mqueue pipe Many of these files are used when you boot the system for more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts Chapter 6 e Working with Files 129 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd tmp usr This directory contains temporary files Programs are supposed to remove their temporary files after using them but sometimes they don t either due to poor coding or abnormal termination You can periodically clean out extraneous temporary files when y
67. _CS_ARCHITECTURE The name of the instruction set architecture _CS_DOMAIN The domain of this node in the network CS HOSTNAME The name of this node in the network A hostname can consist only of letters numbers and hyphens and must not start or end with a hyphen For more information see RFC 952 If you change this configuration string be sure you also change the HOSTNAME environment variable The hostname utility always gives the value of the CS HOSTNAME configuration string CS_ HW_PROVIDER The name of the hardware s manufacturer CS HW SERIAL The serial number associated with the hardware _CS_LIBPATH The default path for locating shared objects For more information see Setting PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH below February 1 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 185 Setting the time zone 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CS LOCALE CS_MACHINE CS_PATH _ CS_RELEASE CS RESOLVE The locale string The type of hardware the OS is running on The default path for finding system utilities For more information see Setting PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH below The current release level of the OS An in memory version of the etc resolv conf file excluding the domain name CS_SRPC_DOMAIN CS _SYSNAME CS_TIMEZONE CS_VERSION The secure RPC Remote Procedure Call domain The name of the OS An alternate source to the TZ for time zone information For mo
68. a etc printcap file on node2 that looks like this lpt1 rm nodel1 rp lpt1 sd usr spool output 1lpt1 lp lpt2 rm node1 rp lpt2 sd usr spool output 1lpt2 lp This specifies the two printers we just located on node1 with the names to be used on node2 Make sure there s an entry for node1 in etc hosts Local and remote printers What if we now want to move one of the two printers say 1pt2 from node1 to node2 290 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr February 1 2005 ih h E dev par1 dev parl TCP IP nodel node2 We have to change the etc printcap file on both nodes Likewise we need to change etc printcap on any other network nodes we wished to print from e On nodel lpt1 lp dev par1 sd usr spool output lpt1 lpt2 rm node2 rp lpt2 sd usr spool output 1pt2 e On node2 lpt1 rm node1 rp 1pt1 sd usr spool output lpt1 lpt2 lp dev par1 sd usr spool output lpt2 e On other nodes lpt1 rm node1 rp lpt1 sd usr spool output 1pt1 lpt2 rm node2 rp lpt2 sd usr spool output 1pt2 Make sure you have entries for node1 and nodez2 in the etc hosts file on each node You also need entries in the Chapter 14 e Printing 291 Printing with lpr 200
69. a Windows based filesystem If you create an archive see Archiving your data above the permissions are preserved Other remote backups There are other remote version systems similar to CVS that are available to Neutrino via third party solutions Many of them are free search the Internet for the tools that are right for your company and project QNX 4 disk structure If you ever have a problem with a QNX 4 filesystem you ll need to understand how it stores data on a disk This knowledge will help you recognize and possibly correct damage if you ever have to rebuild a filesystem The lt sys f s_qnx4 h gt header file contains the definitions for the structures that this section describes For an overall description of the QNX 4 filesystem see the Working with Filesystems chapter February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 407 QNX 4 disk structure 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Partition components A QNX 4 filesystem may be an entire disk in the case of floppies or it may be one of many partitions on a hard disk Within a disk partition a QNX 4 filesystem contains the following components e loader block e root block e bitmap blocks e root directory e other directories files free blocks etc Loader block Root block Bitmap blocks Root directory Other data Components of a QNX 4 filesystem in a disk partition These structures are create
70. add myproj It s time to create our test file Make sure you re in the project directory cd myproj Now use your favorite editor to create a file called foo c with the following contents include lt stdio h gt int main int argc char argv printf Hello world n Adding the file is very similar to adding the directory cvs add foo c Notice that we left out the d option to evs This is intentional When you check out a directory CVS creates a directory of its own February 1 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 381 CVS basics 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd for status and administrative files so that it knows which repository this directory was checked out from All future operations apply to this repository This command tells CVS that you want to add the file It isn t really added yet CVS needs you to explicitly tell it when you ve finished making changes to your local copy of the repository This lets you change or add several files or directories in your own time and then tell CVS to take the changes all at once when they re ready You use the commit command to do this Putting changes back into the repository The commit or ci check in command tells CVS to make the repository look like your local copy If multiple people are using the same repository it s a little different but for now we assume that you re the only person using the repository cvs commit foo c or
71. and ps mv cp x continued Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 61 Neutrino for MS DOS users 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd DOS command Neutrino command s runas schtasks shutdown sort taskkill tasklist time tracerpt tracert type ver xcopy diskcomp su crontab shutdown sort kill or slay sin pidin and ps date and rte traceprinter traceroute cat uname a cp Or pax These steps are the Neutrino equivalent to the DOS diskcomp command 1 Copy the master disk to a file cp dev fd0 referencecopy Compare other disks with the copy of the master file cmp referencecopy dev fd0 Copy the master file to a new floppy cp referencecopy dev fd0 62 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Neutrino for MS DOS users MS DOS local command interpreter variables The following table lists some builtin MS DOS local command interpreter variables and their equivalent Neutrino environment variables or commands DOS Local Neutrino equivalent CD PWD pwd COMPUTERNAME HOSTNAME SCOMSPEC SHELL SDATES Run the date utility date ERRORLEVELS see Parameters in the documentation for ksh SHOMEDRIVES Neutrino doesn t use drive letters see SHOMEPATH SHOMEPATHS HOME OS Run the uname utility uname SPATHS PATH SPATHEXTS Neutrino treats file extensions as part of the SPROCESSOR_ARCHITECTURE Fe
72. and vice versa You can usually tell a router from a regular system because a router generally has more than one February 1 2005 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 439 Setting up a firewall 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 440 interface Every packet comes in on an interface and every packet goes out on an interface Use these keywords to identify the interfaces lon Loopback enn Ethernet ppp PPP connection where n is the interface number For example if you want to block all packets on pppO use these rules block in quick on pppO all pass in all You can also intermix IP addresses and interfaces The more criteria the firewall needs to match against the tighter the firewall becomes For example if you want to receive packets on pppO but not from IP address 10 7 0 0 16 you could specify a rule like this block in quick on pppO from 10 7 0 0 16 to any pass in all These rules mean that the packets from 10 7 0 0 are blocked only if they come in on interface pppO they pass through if they come in on another interface All of the above examples show you how to filter incoming packets but you can also filter outgoing packets by using the keyword out For example pass out quick on pppO from 20 20 20 0 24 to any block out quick on ppp0 from any to any In this example if a packet comes from 20 20 20 1 32 it s sent out by the first rule If a packet comes from 1 2 3 4 32 the second rule blocks it
73. are called hidden files Other than the special treatment by 1s and some other programs such as the Photon file manager pfm nothing else is special about hidden files Use 1s a to list all files including any hidden ones Extensions Filename extensions something at the end of a filename tell programs and users what type of data a file contains In the QNX 4 filesystem the Neutrino native hard disk filesystem extensions are just an ordinary part of the filename and can be any length as long as the total filename size stays within the 505 byte filename length limit Most of the time file extensions are simply naming conventions but some utilities base their behavior on the extension See Filename extensions later in this chapter for a list of some of the common extensions used in a Neutrino system Pathname space mapping 114 You may have noticed that we ve talked about files and directories appearing in their parent directories rather than just saying that the parent directories contain these files This is because in Neutrino the pathname space is virtual dictated not just by the filesystem that Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filenames and pathnames resides on media mounted at root but rather by the paths and pathname aliases registered by the process manager For example let s take a small portion of the pathname space A dev s
74. available At the top of the File Manager are two text boxes that you can use to navigate and filter directory listings You can type a path name directly into the Path box to jump to that directory To view only files of a certain type or that start with a specific character use the Filter box For example enter p to view only files that start with the letter p or enter ps to view only files that have the ps suffix 78 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Getting help with the Helpviewer You can use the Photon File Manager menus to perform many file management tasks The toolbar at the top of the File Manager provides shortcuts for some commonly used commands For more information see pfm in the Utilities Reference You can view a listing of the most common keyboard shortcuts in File Manager by selecting Help Quick Reference You can also view all currently defined bookmarks in a panel by clicking the Bookmarks toolbar shortcut Some of these commands are also available from the right click menu in File Manager Getting help with the Helpviewer You can view help for Photon and Neutrino as well as other utilities applications and libraries shipped with Neutrino using the Photon Helpviewer The documentation is organized under the usr help product directory To open the Helpviewer click the Help button in the Applications group on the shelf or select Help from
75. bits at the end of the last bitmap block for which there are no corresponding disk blocks are turned on Bit assignments start with the least significant bit of byte 0 of the first bitmap block which corresponds to QNX 4 block 1 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 409 QNX 4 disk structure 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Root directory The root directory follows the bitmap blocks The root directory is a normal directory see the Directories section with two exceptions e Both dot and dot dot are links to the same inode information namely the root directory inode in the root block e The root directory always has entries for the bitmap inodes boot and altboot files These entries are provided so programs that report information on filesystem usage see the entries as normal files The dinit utility creates this directory with initially enough room for 32 directory entries 4 blocks The root directory contains directory entries for several special files that always exist in a QNX 4 filesystem The dinit utility creates these files when the filesystem is first initialized 2 bitmap inodes gt boot gt altboot gt longfilenames Contents of the root directory 410 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX 4 disk structure File Descr
76. but you can with a symbolic link as follows ln s net node2 usr barney net nodel usr fred Note how the symbolic link and the target directory need not share the same name In most cases you use a symbolic link for linking one directory to another directory However you can also use symbolic links for files as in this example ln s net nodel usr src game c net nodel usr eric src sample c Node 1 Node 2 E E usr Se eels a eric src fred barney sam hello c my file eT Ao Symbolic links February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 219 DOS filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Removing a symbolic link deletes only the link not the target Several functions operate directly on the symbolic link For these functions the replacement of the symbolic element of the pathname with its target is not performed These functions include unlink which removes the symbolic link stat and readlink Since symbolic links can point to directories incorrect configurations can result in problems such as circular directory links To recover from circular references the system imposes a limit on the number of hops this limit is defined as SYMLOOP_MAX in the lt limits h gt include file Filesystem robustness The QNX 4 filesystem achieves high throughput without sacrificing reliability This has been accomplished in several ways While m
77. by phlocale this is used by applications such as the software installer qnxinstal11 to tailor behavior for the country that you re running the system in etc default A directory that contains default configuration files primarily for TCP IP facilities February 1 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 123 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd etc dhcpd conf Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol configuration see etc dhcpd conf in the Utilities Reference etc ftpd conft etc ftpusers etc group etc hosts Specifies configuration options for ftpd that apply once you ve authenticated your connection See etc ftpd conf in the Utilities Reference Defines users who may access the machine via the File Transfer Protocol See etc ftpusers in the Utilities Reference User account group definitions see Managing User Accounts Network hostname lookup database see also etc resolv conf below See etc hosts in the Utilities Reference etc inetd conf etc mib txt etc motd Internet super server configuration file that defines Internet services that inetd starts and stops dynamically as needed See etc inetd conf in the Utilities Reference Defines the format for specifying variable names for SNMP utilities see etc mib txt in the Utilities Reference Contains an ASCII message of the day that may be displayed when users log in as long as etc profile is confi
78. can also switch your console by pressing Ctrl Alt 1 9 where the number is the console number e Control the CD Player Right click anywhere on the taskbar or shelf to configure or exit the shelf application To run or restart shelf type shelf amp ata command line Drag the taskbar or shelf border to make it smaller or larger If you drag the border to the bottom or right of the screen the taskbar or shelf is put in autoshow mode which means it appears only when you move the mouse over the edge of the screen Settings and preferences You can change many of the configuration settings in Photon to suit your needs Some of the ways you can alter the default Photon configuration include e Modifying the shelf e Modifying the Desktop menu e Starting applications automatically Photon provides some configuration tools to help you easily change your system s settings Modifying the shelf You can configure the shelf by right clicking on the shelf or taskbar and selecting Setup or by running shelf c from the command line The shelf s configuration dialog looks like this 72 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Settings and preferences February 1 2005 v All Shelves v GBWorkspace v Shef Launch Menu J amp Taskbar Separator Clock Shelf v amp Applications E p Installer File Manager Voyager Editor Selected Comp
79. characters with Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Where everything is stored various language codepage in effect The DOS filesystem in Neutrino can translate these filenames to UTF 8 representations but you need to tell the filesystem which codepage to use via a command line option For more information see s dos so in the Utilities Reference Where everything is stored February 1 2005 The default Neutrino filesystem generally follows the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard but we don t claim to be compliant or compatible with it This standard describes where files and directories should or must be placed in UNIX style operating systems For more information see http www pathname com fhs The Neutrino pathname space is extremely flexible Your system may be configured differently This section describes the contents of these directories f Ma M a el el el a a a s home lib proc root sbin tmp usr var BA mA Mi bin boot dev etc The directory is the root of the pathname space Usually your primary hard disk or flash filesystem is mounted here On a QNX 4 filesystem this directory includes the following files altboot Contains an alternate OS image that s loaded if you press ESC during bootup see Controlling How Neutrino Starts bitmap A system file that contains a bitmap representing the disk
80. chmod R gtrw home projects 4 Remove access for all other users chmod R o rwx home projects For more details on permissions see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files Creating a new group To create a new group open etc group in a text editor then add a line that specifies the new group s name ID and members For example techies x 101 michel jim sue For more information about the fields see etc group earlier in this chapter CAUTION Do this work at a time when the system is idle As your text editor writes the etc group file back any application or utility that s trying to simultaneously read the etc group file e g 1s 1 newgrp might not function correctly Modifying an existing group Each time you add a new user to a group e g when you use passwd to create a new user account you need to edit the etc group file and add the user to the appropriate group entry For instance if you February 1 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 31 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd have an existing group techies and want to add zeke to the group change techies x 101 michel jim sue to techies x 101 michel jim sue zeke You should do this at a time when you re certain no users or programs are trying to use the etc group file Troubleshooting 32 Here are some problems you might encounter while working with passwords and user acc
81. d Device m PnP manufacture model id n Printer name s Spooldir name A real FileVersion 2 You need to have an environment variable 2500C CLS 11000 14000 10500 17000 11692 8262 9875 16524 to access the SAMBA shared printer PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Letter Legal Exec B A4 AS B5 A3 The following macros are expanded for each filter command line DEVICE_URI set for smbspool Form for smb command used with smbspool which is set in DEVICE_URI Seo Se Se te te 488 Appendix A e Examples No Username and password required DEVICE_URI smb server printer DEVICE_URI smb workgroup server printer Username and password required DEVICE_URI smb username password server printer February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Configuration files for spooler DEVICE_URI smb username password workgroup server printer Where username SAMBA username password SAMBA password workgroup SAMBA workgroup server SAMBA server name printer SAMBA shared printer name Use of DEVICE_URI environment variable allows you to set this entry for the smbspool to automatically look for it when it isn t included in the command line Filter ps d smbspool 1 NULL none 1 1 Filter phs ps phs to ps Supported Resolution 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 Supported PaperSize 85
82. data areas A process must have at least one thread running in it process group A collection of processes that permits the signalling of related processes Each process in the system is a member of a process group identified by a process group ID A newly created process joins the process group of its creator process group ID February 1 2005 The unique identifier representing a process group during its lifetime A process group ID is a positive integer The system may reuse a process group ID after the process group dies Glossary 511 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd process group leader A process whose ID is the same as its process group ID process ID PID pty Qnet QNX QoS QSSL 512 The unique identifier representing a process A PID is a positive integer The system may reuse a process ID after the process dies provided no existing process group has the same ID Only the Process Manager can have a process ID of 1 Pseudo TTY a character based device that has two ends a master end and a slave end Data written to the master end shows up on the slave end and vice versa You typically use these devices when a program requires a terminal for standard input and output and one doesn t exist for example as with sockets The native network manager in Neutrino Name of an earlier generation RTOS created by QNX Software Systems Also short form of the company s name Quality of S
83. dev io net1 The prefix option to 262 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters npm tcpip so causes the second stack to be registered as sock2 dev socket instead of the default dev socket TCP IP applications that wish to use the second stack must specify the environment variable SOCK For example SOCK sock2 telnet 10 59 or SOCK sock2 netstat in or SOCK sock2 ifconfig en0 192 168 2 10 If you don t specify SOCK the command uses the first TCP IP stack Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters When you add a host to the network or connect your host to the Internet you need to assign an IP address to your host and set some other configuration parameters There are a few common mechanisms for doing this e Dial up providers use the Point to Point Protocol PPP e Broadband providers such as Digital Subscriber Line DSL or Cable use Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE or DHCP e A typical corporate network deploys DHCP Along with your IP address the servers implementing these protocols can supply your gateway netmask nameservers and even your printer in the case of a corporate network Users don t need to manually configure their host to use the network Neutrino also implements another autoconfiguration protocol called AutolIP zeroconf IETF draft This autoconfiguration protocol is used to assign link
84. e Securing Your System 441 Setting up a firewall 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You can find a more detailed example of a configuration file in etc ipnat conf We ve included this file in Configuration files for setting up a firewall in the Examples appendix For the above example when a packet goes out on the pppo interface with an IP address of 192 168 1 0 and a netmask of 24 the packet is rewritten within the IP stack such that its source address is 20 20 20 1 with a netmask of 32 The packet is then sent to the original destination The system also keeps track of the translated connection in progress so it can send the response to the correct system 442 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System February 1 2005 Chapter 20 Fine Tuning Your System In this chapter Getting the system s status 445 Improving performance 445 Faster boot times 447 Filesystems 447 How small can you get 458 February 1 2005 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 443 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Getting the system s status Getting the system s status Neutrino includes the following utilities that you can use to fine tune your system hogs List the processes that are hogging the CPU pidin Process ID INfo Display system statistics ps Report process status psin Display system information in a Photon window sin Display system information For details about these utilities see the Utilities Reference
85. either Plug and Play or not You typically have to manually set up non PnP ISA devices In order to identify your device you need to have the manual for your device or have a way to contact your device s manufacturer e g via their website There isn t currently a Neutrino utility that lists the ISA devices that are installed on a system Non PnP based With non PnP cards you can manually start the driver and specify the T O port IRQ and DMA channel For example this command starts the Sound Blaster driver io audio dsb ioport port irq req dma ch dmal ch amp To find out what to set the I O port and IRQ to manually open the system and look at the card Then start the driver using the configuration settings that the card is set to Ensure that the I O port and IRQ are reserved in the BIOS for non PCI devices If you re using a Sound Blaster card check the following 322 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd PCCARD and PCMCIA cards PnP based PCI Cards e If the driver rejects the card make sure that the I O port doesn t conflict with another piece of hardware Try changing the I O port to see if that helps e If you hear a bit of sound and then nothing make sure that the IRQ isn t conflicting with another device and is reserved in the BIOS You can also try changing the IRQ as well e Ifthe driver starts correctly but there s no sound check the DMA se
86. filesystem you have to balance performance and robustness e Robustness involves synchronizing the user operations to the implementation of that operation to the successful response to the user For example the creation of a new file via creat may perform all the physical disk writes that are necessary to add that new filename into a directory on the disk filesystem and only then reply back to the client e Performance may decouple the actual implementation of the operation from the reply For example writing data into a file via write might immediately reply to the client but leave the data in a write behind in memory cache in an attempt to merge with later writes and construct a large contiguous run for a single sequential disk access but until that occurs the data is vulnerable to loss if the power fails You must decide on the balance between robustness and performance that s appropriate for your installation expectations and requirements Metadata updates Metadata is data about data or all the overhead and attributes involved in storing the user data itself such as the name of a file the physical blocks it uses modification and access timestamps and so on February 1 2005 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 449 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The most expensive operation of a filesystem is in updating the metadata This is because e The metadata is typically l
87. filter isn t suitable for accounting purposes because it s started only once all text files are filtered through it it doesn t pass owners login names and it doesn t identify the beginnings and ends of jobs Started for each file printed and do accounting if there s an af field in the printer s printcap entry If there are fields for both input and output filters the output filter is used only to print the banner page it s then stopped to allow input filters to access the printer Used to convert files from one form to another For example va varian Benson Varian lp dev va0 sd usr spool vad of usr 1lib vpf tf usr 1lib rvcat mx 2000 p1 58 px 2112 py 1700 tr f The t entry specifies usr lib rvcat as the filter to use when printing troff output This filter is needed to set the device into print mode for text and into plot mode for printing troff files and February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr February 1 2005 raster images Note that the page length is set to 58 lines by the p1 entry for 8 5 by 11 fanfold paper To enable accounting add an af filter to the varian entry like this va varian Benson Varian lp dev va0 sd usr spool vad of usr lib vpf if usr lib vpf tf usr lib rvcat af usr adm vaacct mx 2000 p1 58 px 2112 py 1700 tr f Neutrino doesn t provide print filters you have to either port them from another U
88. for you via the ph script located in usr bin Changing video modes in Photon To change the video modes of your graphics adapter in Photon use the Display Configuration tool You can start it by typing phgrafx on the command line by selecting Graphics from the shelf or by choosing Launch Configure Graphics 352 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Video cards To change the video modes 1 Select the configuration that you want to use 2 Click Apply The screen turns black and then should go into the new mode If the mode you selected didn t work properly you can wait for 15 seconds at which point the display automatically reverts to the previous settings or you can press Esc or Enter 3 When the mode has changed and seems to be working properly click Accept This utility also lets you change the driver resolution refresh rate and palette 8 bit color mode only and disable the hardware cursor If you want to edit the command line that s used to start the adapter click the Advanced button This is the same as editing the top line in the graphics modes file Manually setting up your video card 1 Identify your video adapter The documentation for the hardware should describe the chipset used on your adapter 2 Identify which driver you should be using Use the list of supported hardware to determine which driver is appropriate for your adapter see the intr
89. formatted floppy disk type mount tdos dev fd0 fs dos_floppy Use mkdosfs to format DOS floppy disks and DOS hard drives This utility supports FAT 12 16 32 e To mount a QNX 4 formatted floppy disk type mount tqnx4 dev fd0 fs qnx_floppy You don t need to remount the drive when you change floppy disks Don t remove a floppy while the driver is still reading or writing data floppies are quite a bit slower than hard disks so it can take a while Make sure the drive light is off Hard disks A self hosted system by default detects the disk controller that s installed on the system and then starts the appropriate driver for it February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 311 Hard disks 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd EIDE On a self hosted system the diskboot utility in the OS image starts the block I O drivers If you want to change the way that the driver is started you ll need to change the startup image and the options to diskboot For example diskboot o devb eide blk cache 30m For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts and diskboot in the Utilities Reference EIDE interfaces use the devb eide driver which by default automatically detects the interface and devices attached to it This driver includes support for UDMA Ultra Direct Memory Access modes along with the generic PIO Programmed Input Output modes The supported hardware list includes adapters and t
90. has a vulnerability whereby an attacker can send a badly formed query that causes bind to open up a shell that runs as root on a different port of the machine An attacker can use this weakness to connect to and effectively own the computer This type of exploit is often called a buffer overrun or stack smashing attack and is described in the article Smashing the Stack for Fun and Profit by Aleph One see http www insecure org stf smashstack txt The simple solution to these problems is to make sure that you know which servers are listening on which ports and that you re running the latest versions of the software If a machine is publicly connected don t run any more services than necessary on it Local exploits 432 Local exploits are much more common and difficult to prevent Having a local account implies a certain amount of trust and it isn t always easy to imagine just how that trust could be violated Most local exploits involve some sort of elevation of privilege such as turning a normal user into the superuser root Many local attacks take advantage of a misconfigured system e g file permissions that are set incorrectly or a buffer overrun on a binary that s set to run as root known as a setuid binary In the embedded world where Neutrino is typically used local users aren t as much of an issue and in fact many systems don t even have a shell shipped with them Chapter 19 e Securing Your
91. information required by many drivers to set the standard resolutions and refresh rates Many older drivers as well as the generic drivers don t use this file because they use the video BIOS to set the graphics mode If this file isn t present the timings are calculated using a generic timing formula GTF The GTF isn t completely accurate you can manually edit the crtc settings file to set the exact timing for the resolution and refresh rate At least the following drivers use this file 358 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Video cards e devg ati_rage128 so e devg banshee so e devg chips so e devg flat so e devg i810 so e devg i830 so e devg igs5000 so e devg matroxg so e devg mq200 so e devg radeon so e devg s3_savage so e devg sis630 so e devg tnt so e devg tvia so e devg vmware so The modes detected are incorrect In some circumstances a card s modes file doesn t list all the modes that the documentation for the card says it should Sometimes there are variants of cards that are slightly different from what we have had internally or what the documentation describes You can try manually setting up the card see Manually setting up your video card above to see if that helps If it still fails you may need to contact Technical Support The video mode changed to a mode that doesn t work If you ve changed th
92. is etc system package packages The package filesystem also supports patching When patches are issued between releases the files for the patch are placed into a package as well The patch package overrides existing files from other packages without actually deleting them 232 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Inflator filesystem Inflator filesystem Neutrino provides an inflator virtual filesystem It s a resource manager that sits in front of other filesystems and decompresses files that were previously compressed by the deflate utility You typically use inflator when the underlying filesystem is a flash filesystem Using it can almost double the effective size of the flash memory For more information see the Utilities Reference The inflator utility is available only in the Flash Filesystem amp Embedding Technology Development Kit TDK Troubleshooting Here are some problems that you might have with filesystems How can I make a specific flash partition read only Unmount and remount the partition like this flashctl p raw_mountpoint u mount t flash r raw mountpoint mountpoint where raw_mountpoint indicates the partition e g dev fsO0px How can I determine which drivers are currently running 1 Create a list of pathname mountpoints find proc mount name 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 prune print gt
93. is important you don t want someone to take control of a device and disrupt its normal functioning imagine the havoc if someone could stop air traffic control systems or hospital equipment from functioning properly The importance of security to an individual machine depends on the context e A machine behind a strong firewall is less vulnerable than one connected to a public network e One that doesn t even have a network connection is in even less danger Part of securing a machine is identifying the level of risk By classifying threats into categories we can break down the issues and see which ones we need to concern ourselves with Remote and local attacks February 1 2005 We can break the broad division of security threats also known as exploits into categories Remote exploit The attacker connects to the machine via the network and takes advantage of bugs or weaknesses in the system Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 431 General OS security 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Local attack The attacker has an account on the system in question and can use that account to attempt unauthorized tasks Remote exploits Remote exploits are generally much more serious than local ones but fortunately remote exploits are much easier to prevent and are generally less common For example suppose you re running bind a DNS resolver on port 53 of a publicly connected computer and the particular version
94. is the periodic need for synchronous update of the bitmap and inode for block allocation as the file grows see below for a case study or overwriting an already allocated file Double buffering This example illustrates the effect of double buffering in the standard TO library on an x86 PHI 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table shows the rate in megabytes February 1 2005 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 455 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd per second of writing and reading a 256M file with a record size of 8K Scenario Writing Reading File descriptor 18 31 Standard I O 13 16 setvbuf 17 30 Here you can see the effect of the default standard I O buffer size BUFSIZ or 1K When you ask it to transfer 8K the library implements the transfer as 8 separate 1K operations Note how the standard I O case does match the above benchmark see Record size above for a 1K record and the file descriptor case is the same as the 8K scenario When you use setvbuf to force the standard I O buffering up to the 8K record size then the results come closer to the optimal file descriptor case the small difference is due to the extra code complexity and the additional memcpy between the user data and the internal standard I O FILE buffer File descriptor vs standard I O 456 Here s another example that compares access using file descriptors and standard I O on an
95. ksh amp type link bin sh proc boot ksh type link dev console dev ser1 type link tmp dev shmem HE HEH HE AEE AEE AE HE a E aE aE E HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE EH FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE EE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE HE a ER a a FE HE HEHE HEHHE uncomment for NFS REMOTE FILESYSTEM FEE HE HE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE a FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE E FE FE FE HE HE HEHE HEHHE type link bin mnt bin type link sbin mnt sbin type link usr bin mnt usr bin type link usr sbin mnt usr sbin type link lib mnt lib type link usr lib mnt usr lib type link etc mnt etc Appendix A e Examples 479 Buildfile for an NFS mounting target 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd libc so libm so FEE HE HEHE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE E HE a FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE PE FE HE FE FE FE HE HE HEHE HEHHE uncomment for NETWORK driver FEE HE AE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE E HE a FE E FE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE HE HE HEHE HEHHE devn pcnet so libsocket so npm tcpip so DAREA EEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE uncom
96. like this command or with the older form using backquotes lt command For example to search all of your C files for a given string type grep string find name c The find command searches the given directory in this case and any directories under it for files whose names end in e The command substitution causes grep to search for the given string in the files that find produces Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 47 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Arithmetical expressions Braces To specify an arithmetical expression in a command line specify it as follows expression For example echo 5 7 You re restricted to integer arithmetic You can use braces to add a prefix a suffix or both to a set of strings by specifying prefix strl strN suffix where commas separate the strings For example my file c o expands tomy_file c my_file o Filename generation Instead of using a command to work on just one file or directory you can use wildcard characters to operate on many If you want to Use this wildcard Match zero or more characters Match any single character Match any characters or range of characters separated by a hyphen specified within the brackets Exclude characters specified within brackets 48 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Shell
97. locations 117 maintenance utilities for chkfsys 418 419 dcheck 418 dinit 417 fdisk 417 spatch 419 zap 418 managing 78 manifest 232 maximum open per process 462 moving 58 names 215 maximum length 463 ownership 132 216 package filesystem in 229 permissions 132 407 default setting 135 181 restricting the changing of 463 pregrowing 452 457 recovering lost 419 zapped 419 remapping bad disk blocks 418 renaming 58 Index 533 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd spilling 131 230 structure 416 temporary 130 transferdaemon 261 troubleshooting 139 233 types 109 determining 112 139 version management 377 406 Filesystem Hierarchy Standard 117 filesystems 211 CD ROM 127 221 466 CIFS 223 467 commit level 454 DOS 220 mounting 164 double buffering 455 embedded creating 223 Ext2 222 465 mounting 164 FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 221 465 features 211 fine tuning 447 flash 223 467 floppy disk 127 hard disk 128 ISO 9660 309 metadata 449 mounting 164 212 mountpoints 127 NFS 224 466 OS image using as 212 package 227 QNX 4 214 464 consistency checking for 220 mounting 164 534 Index RAM 213 record size 454 remote 407 mounting 173 restoring 419 storing data on disk 407 structure 407 throughput 451 type default 211 unmounting 212 virtual 233 filters printing 286 296 utilities 50 find 30 47 52 205 399 DOS version 59 firewalls 437 493 Flash Filesyste
98. lpr Prlpt2 What you ve done is change the destination from that given by spooler to ps so that after the phs file has been converted to a ps type by phs to ps it goes to the ps filter Then the ps filter line you added sends PostScript files to lpr forcing output to the remote printer just as you did in Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr You might be wondering what happened to the destination passed by spooler d Well that is discarded because lpr unlike phs to ps doesn t return the job to the filter but completes it itself 5 Finally start a new instance of spooler telling it the pathname of your new configuration file in this case etc printers test cfg and the name of the printer you want to use in this case rlpt2 like this spooler d dev null c etc printers test cfg n rlpt2 amp The n option specifies the name of the printer which appears in a Photon application s Print dialog 6 If you want to start spooler like this whenever you boot your machine add the above command to your etc rce d re local file For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts Now you should be able to print your PostScript file on your remote TCP IP enabled printer either from Photon or from the command line February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 299 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd e Remote printing from Photon Select the correct printer in this exam
99. modes use a 40 pin cable higher UDMA modes require an 80 pin cable Specification PIO MDMA UDMA UDMA Maximum 40 pin 80 pin rate ATA 0 0 N A N A 4 M s ATA 2 4 2 N A N A 16 M s ATA 3 4 2 N A N A 16 M s ATA 4 4 2 2 N A 33 M s ATA 5 4 2 2 4 66 M s ATA 6 4 2 2 5 100 M s ATA 7 4 2 2 6 133 M s Ee February 1 2005 The maximum rate is the maximum theoretical burst interface throughput Sustained throughput depends on many factors such as the drive cache size drive rotation speed PCI bus and filesystem Don t expect a UDMA 6 drive to have a sustained throughput of 100M s e Check to make sure that the device you re attempting to connect can operate at the expected UDMA modes e Correct the assignment of primary secondary and master slave interfaces For example putting two hard drives as primary secondary rather than master slave on the primary may allow driver parallelism Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 315 Hard disks 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd SCSI devices A SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface bus is simply another bus that you can attach multiple peripherals to Neutrino supports many brands and varieties of SCSI adapters see Block oriented drivers devb in the Summary chapter of the Utilities Reference When the SCSI driver starts up it scans the bus for attached devices When the driver finds a supported device it creates an entry in the dev directory e g a hard drive is hdx wh
100. multiple platforms including x86 ARM MIPS PPC and SH 4 and it supports symmetric multiprocessing SMP Neutrino also features the Qnet protocol which provides transparent distributed processing you can access the files or processes on any machine on your network as if they were on your own machine Some of the functionality that this guide describes is available in Technology Development Kits TDKs kits that augment the base Neutrino OS platform with specialized value added technologies The TDKs currently include e Flash Filesystem amp Embedding e Extended Networking Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS 7 How Neutrino is unique 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd e Symmetric Multiprocessing SMP e Multimedia e 3D Graphics e Critical Process Monitoring CPM We also supply Software Kits such as the Transparent Distributed Processing TDP SK Resource managers 8 A resource manager is a server program that accepts messages from other programs and optionally communicates with hardware All of the Neutrino device drivers and filesystems are implemented as resource managers Neutrino resource managers are responsible for presenting an interface to various types of devices This may involve managing actual hardware devices such as serial ports parallel ports network cards and disk drives or virtual devices such as dev nu11 the network filesystem and pseudo ttys The binding between the reso
101. of libc so procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 2 usr lib ldqnx so 2 Default user programs to priority 10 other scheduler pri 100 Appendix Ae Examples 481 qnxbasedma build 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Tell diskboot this is a hard disk boot b1 Tell diskboot to use DMA on IDE drives D1 Start 4 text consoles buy passing n4 to devc con o By adding e Linux ext2 filesystem will be mounted as well pri 100 PATH proc boot diskboot b1 D1 odevc con n4 Include the current libc so It will be created as a real file using its internal SONAME with libc so being a symlink to it The symlink will point to the last libc so so if an earlier libc is needed e g libc so 1 add it before the this line libc so Include all tie files for the default filesystems libcam so io blk so cam disk so fs qnx4 so fs dos so fs ext2 so cam cdrom so fs cd so These programs only need to be run once from the boot image data uip will waste less memory as the ram from the boot image will be used directly without making a copy of the data i e as the default data cpy does When they have been run once they will be unlinked from proc boot data uip seedres pci bios devb eide devb amd devb aha2 devb aha4 devb aha7 devb aha8 devb ncr8 diskboot slogger fesh JE E te te For more information about buildfiles including some other samples
102. ordinary users to restart printer daemons when lprq reports that no daemon is present Halt a spooling daemon after the current job completes this also disables printing This is a clean way to shut a printer down for maintenance Note that users can still enter jobs in a spool queue while a printer is stopped Place selected jobs at the top of a printer queue You can use this command to promote high priority jobs lpr places jobs in the queue in the order they were received February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr Spooling directories Each node you wish to print from must have a spooling directory to hold the files to be printed By default the pathname for this directory is usr spool output 1pd you can change the pathname of the spooling directory in the etc printcap file If this directory doesn t exist you must create it on all nodes The 1pd daemon doesn t work without a spooling directory and it doesn t tell you why That s why it s a good idea to run the system logger see syslogd in the Utilities Reference when you re trying to debug printing problems then you can check for error messages in var log syslog Access control February 1 2005 The printer system maintains protected spooling areas so that users can t circumvent printer accounting or remove files other than their own e Only the print manager daemon can spool print jobs The spooling area is wr
103. other Rtos wnn es3 comiqnx Interest Systems IntraLase cuts the risk of laser eye surgery with QNX based SYSTEM ne Description Canadian firm that develops maintains and markets QNX RTOS and related products Photon microGUI Category gt o Meeres oooO The Voyager browser The Voyager window contains a menu at the top of the window beneath which are a toolbar and site bar either of which you can turn on or off At the bottom of the window is a status bar which displays the current document security status which items are being loaded and the current encoding setting If you make the mouse hover over a link the link destination appears in the status bar You can turn the status bar on or off as well Voyager supports several common image and multimedia file types including for images jpg gif and png and for audio and video mpg wav au aif mp3 mp1 mp2 mpa mpv and m2p You can view a Quick Reference Guide in Voyager at any time by clicking Help Quick Reference For more information about using Voyager see voyager in the Utilities Reference February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 85 Surfing the web with Voyager 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Setting preferences To set your preferences for Voyager select Edit Preferences The configuration dialog includes these tabs Cache Appearance Connection Information Print
104. passwd been core 2 1 etc spilled etc passwd F passwd Working with the spill directory If you want to restore a spilled file to its original version in the package use the pkgct1 command For more information see the Utilities Reference February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 231 Package filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Underlying filesystem There must be a filesystem underneath the redirection layer of the package filesystem If you want to copy a file to one of the virtual directories e g bin then the package filesystem creates the appropriate structure on the underlying filesystem and then lets the original access request simply fall through to the next server If there s no underlying filesystem then new files can t be added to the virtual filesystem without first generating a package for them Control files Patches The package filesystem uses these control files Manifest files XML files that you use to put together a package for distribution The purpose of these files which live at the root of every installed package is to describe which files are exported the services the package provides the dependencies of the package etc The packager utility builds these files Package configuration file An XML control file that s used to configure the package filesystem itself The installer utility qnxinstall manipulates this file Its default location
105. plugin You can choose additional plugins by selecting the Browse button including cdplayer so clock so launcher so You can play a CD stop skip forward and skip back The plugin displays the track information in its text box You can choose the clock s font and its size whether or not to show the date and the seconds and the format of the date AM PM If you select this plugin from the shelf it opens a User Configuration utility that lets you set and manage the time and date A plugin that lets you create an item on the shelf that runs an arbitrary command launchmenu so The Launch button You can have only one of these in your shelf at any given time If you try to add a second one into your shelf it s ignored If you want to change the location of the Launch menu you must first remove the original and then add the new one in the new location Note that this plugin doesn t work in a drawer it must be at the top level in a shelf Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Settings and preferences led so pload so ptrcam so taskbar so volume so worldview so Modifying the Desktop menu A set of three LEDs that show which of the Num Lock Caps Lock and Scroll Lock keys are on The light is on when the key is active A CPU Load Monitor that displays bar graphs that indicate the levels of CPU usage memory usage and net
106. pregrowing a data file on an x86 PIL 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table shows the times in milliseconds required to create and write a 256M file in 8K records February 1 2005 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 457 How small can you get 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Scenario Creation Write Total write 0 15073 15073 15 seconds ftruncate 13908 8510 22418 22 seconds devctl 55 8479 8534 8 5 seconds Note how extending the file incrementally as a result of each write call is slower than growing it with a single ftruncate call as the filesystem can allocate larger contiguous data extents and needs to update the inode metadata attributes only once Note also how the time to overwrite already allocated data blocks is much less than that for allocating the blocks dynamically the sequential writes aren t interrupted by the periodic need to synchronously update the bitmap Although the total time to pregrow and overwrite is worse than growing the pregrowth could be performed during an initialization phase where speed isn t critical allowing for better write performance later The optimal case is to pregrow the file without zero filling it using a devctl and then overwrite with the real data contents How small can you get The best way to reduce the size of your system is to use our IDE to create an OS image The System Builder perspective includes a tool c
107. presented with a single unified pathname space and interface regardless of the configuration and number of underlying filesystems A desktop Neutrino system starts the appropriate block filesystems on booting you start other filesystems as standalone managers The default block filesystem is the QNX 4 filesystem Setting up starting and stopping a block filesystem When you boot your machine the system detects partitions on the block I O devices and automatically starts the appropriate filesystem for each partition see Controlling How Neutrino Starts You aren t likely ever to need to stop or restart a block filesystem if you change any of the filesystem s options you can use the e or u option to the mount command to update the filesystem If you need to change any of the options associated with the block I O device you can slay the appropriate devb driver being careful February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 211 Mounting and unmounting filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd not to pull the carpet from under your feet and restart it but you Il need to explicitly mount any of the filesystems on it Mounting and unmounting filesystems The following utilities work with filesystems mount Mount a block special device or remote filesystem umount Unmount a device or filesystem For example if s cifs is already running you can mount filesystems on it like this mount t ci
108. regions in use by the filesystem Each block is represented by one bit if the bit is set the filesystem is using the block Chapter 6 e Working with Files 117 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd bin boot diskroot inodes You must preserve the integrity of this file to prevent disk corruption After an unexpected shutdown run chkfsys to walk through the entire filesystem and validate this file s contents correcting them if necessary For more information see QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems and chkfsys in the Utilities Reference On a bootable filesystem this file contains the primary OS image that s loaded by the secondary boot loader on bootup For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts as well as QNX Neutrino and QNX 4 bootloader partitions in the Neutrino Technical Notes A file that indicates which QNX 4 filesystem to mount as For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts Contains additional data pointing to extra inode blocks required by files that occupy more than one extent i e more than one contiguous region on the disk device For more information see QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems The directory also contains platform specific directories e g mipsle ppcbe x86 as well as the directories described in the sections that follow The bin directory contains binaries of essential
109. revision 1 1 retrieving revision 1 2 diff r1 1 r1 2 0al 2 gt This is a file to test cvs gt The last lines starting with diff r1 1 r1 2z show the actual differences using the standard diff format see the Utilities Reference February 1 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 385 CVS and directory trees 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You may have noticed that in the diff command above we specified only one revision by using the r option CVS assumes the second revision is the same as that of foo c in your sandbox We saw from the last status command that the working revision was 1 2 so that s the second revision We could have defined the revision explicitly instead by using a second r option evs diff r1 1 r1 2 foo c Index foo c RCS file home fred cvs myproj foo c v retrieving revision 1 1 retrieving revision 1 2 diff r1 1 r1 2 0al 2 gt This is a file to test cvs gt The results are exactly the same CVS and directory trees CVS automatically traverses directory trees starting with your current working directory if you don t specify a filename or a directory name For example cvs stat gives the status of all files in the current working directory and in any other directories below it This feature is quite handy for making changes to various portions of a tree over time To check in the whole set of changes at once you just go to the root of the tree and use
110. see Building Embedded Systems 482 Appendix A e Examples February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Buildfile that doesn t use diskboot Buildfile that doesn t use diskboot This buildfile is for an OS image that starts up without using diskboot In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read The build file for QNX Neutrino booting on a PC virtual x86 bios compress boot startup bios s64k PATH proc boot bin usr bin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot 1ib usr 1ib 1lib d1ll procnto smp script startup script display_msg display_msg Neutrino Inside QNX 6 3 0 display_msg procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 2 usr lib ldqnx so 2 display_msg gt Starting PCI Services seedres pci bios waitfor dev pci display_msg gt Starting Console Manager deve con n8 waitfor dev conl reopen dev conl1 display_msg gt Starting EIDE Driver devb eide blk cache 64M auto partition vnode 2000 ncache 2000 noatime commit low dos exe all waitfor dev hd0 waitfor dev hdl Mount one QNX 4 filesystem as and another as home Also mount a DOS partition and the CD drive mount dev hd0t79 mount dev hd1t78 home mount tdos dev hd1t12 fs hd1 dos mount tcd dev cd0 fs cd0 display_msg gt Starting etc system sysi
111. series of script files to initialize the system 162 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd diskboot n W diskboot etc system sysinit etc rc d rc devices etc re d re rtc etc re d re sysinit Initialization done by diskboot The main script for initializing the system is etc system sysinit you usually keep local system initialization files in the etc re d directory For example if you want to run extra commands at startup on a node say to mount an NFS drive you might create a script file named rc local make sure it s executable and put it in the etce re d directory For more information see the description of rc local later in this chapter Here s what diskboot does 1 February 1 2005 It starts the system logger slogger Applications use slogger to log their system messages you can use sloginfo to view this log Next diskboot runs seedres to read the PnP BIOS and fill procnto s resource database Then diskboot starts pci bios to support the PCI BIOS After that diskboot starts devb eide or other disk drivers Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 163 diskroot 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd If you want to pass any options to devb eide or other drivers pass them to diskboot in your buildfile 5 Next diskboot looks for filesystems i e partitions and CDs to moun
112. so that programs running as the mail group can update things there but the files still belong to their normal owners If you change the ownership of a setuid command the setuid bit is cleared unless you re logged in as root Similarly if you change the group of a setgid command the setgid bit is cleared unless you re root CAUTION Setuid and setgid commands can cause a security problem If you create any make sure that only the owner can write them and that a malicious user can t hijack them especially if root owns them The sticky bit is an access permission that affects the handling of executable files and directories e If it s set for an executable file the kernel keeps the executable in memory for a while after the program ends This can improve the performance if you run a program e g a compiler or linker frequently e Fora directory it affects who can delete a file in the directory You always need to have write permission on the directory but if the sticky bit is set for the directory you also need to be the owner of the file or directory or have write permission on the file If the third character in a set of permissions is t e g r t the sticky bit and execute permission are both set T indicates that only the sticky bit is set 134 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filename extensions Default file permissions Use the uma
113. store system information Neutrino also supports configuration strings which are similar to and frequently used in conjunction with environment variables For more information see the Configuring Your Environment chapter You can use the POSIX getconf utility to get the value of a configurable limit or a configuration string Since getconf is a POSIX utility scripts that use it instead of hard coded QNX specific limits can adapt to other POSIX environments Some configurable limits are associated with a path their names start with _PCc_ When you get the value of these limits you must provide the path see Filesystem limits below For example to get the maximum length of the filename type getconf _PC_NAME_MAX pathname February 1 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 461 Filesystem limits 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Other limits are associated with the entire system their names start with _sc_ You don t have to provide a path when you get their values For example to get the maximum number of files that a process can have open type getconf _SC_OPEN_MAX In general you can t change the value of the configurable limits they re called configurable because the system can set them The Neutrino libraries provide various functions that you can use in a program to work with configurable limits pathconf Get the value of a configurable limit that s associated with a p
114. suitably sized chunks large enough to minimize the overheads of Neutrino s context switching and message passing but not too large to exceed disk driver limits for blocks per operation or overheads in large message passing an optimal size is 32K You should also access the file on block boundaries for whole multiples of a disk sector since the smallest unit of access to a disk block device is a single sector partial writes will require a read modify write cycle you can get the optimal I O size by calling Statvfs although most disks are 512 bytes sector Finally for very high performance situations video streaming etc it s possible to bypass all buffering in the filesystem and perform DMA directly between the user data areas and the disk But note these caveats e The disk and disk driver must support such access e No coherency is offered between data transferred directly and any data in the filesystem buffer cache e Some POSIX semantics such as file access or modification time updates are ignored We don t currently recommend that you use DMA unless absolutely necessary not all disk drivers correctly support it so there s no facility to query a disk driver for the DMA safe requirements of its interface and naive users can get themselves into trouble In some situations where you know the total size of the final data file it can be advantageous to pregrow it to this size rather than allow it to 452 Cha
115. system will no longer boot 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You should now be able to reissue the mount command and once again try to create a mountpoint for a QNX 4 filesystem called hd After doing this you ll need to rebuild the bitmap with chkfsys even on a good partition At least a portion of your QNX 4 filesystem should now be accessible You can use chkfsys to examine the filesystem and recover as much data as possible If the hard disk is mounted as hd e g the machine boots from CD enter path_on_CD chkfsys hd If the hard disk is mounted as e g a network boot enter network_path chkfsys In either case e If possible you should run chkfsys from somewhere other than the filesystem that you re trying to recover e Make note of any problems reported and allow chkfsys to fix as much as it can What you do next depends on the result of running chkfsys If the disk is unrecoverable 426 If for any reason your disk is completely unrecoverable you might be able to use spatch see above to patch your files and directories In some cases you may need to reinstall Neutrino and restore your disk from your backup files If significant portions of the filesystem are irreparably damaged or important files are lost then restoring from backup might be your best alternative Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What to do if your s
116. that we simply can t keep up with For example e The Canadian province of Saskatchewan always stays on standard time e In 1999 some islands in the south Pacific changed their time zones by a few minutes so that they could be the first places on earth to ring in the year 2000 The phlocale utility gets its list of time zones from etc timezone uc_tz _t but we don t guarantee that this file defines all of the world s time zones or that it s up to date Examples This section examines some sample time zone settings Eastern time The default time zone is Eastern time the short specification is EST5EDT February 1 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 189 Setting the time zone 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Pacific time e Eastern Standard Time is 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale By default Eastern Daylight Time EDT is one hour ahead of standard time i e EDT4 Since it isn t specified daylight saving time starts on the first Sunday of April at 2 00 A M and ends on the last Sunday of October at 2 00 A M The full specification is EST5EDT4 M4 1 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 It explicitly states that daylight saving time starts on the first 1 Sunday 0 of April 4 at 2 00 A M and ends on the last 5 Sunday 0 of October 10 at 2 00 A M The specification for Pacific time is PST
117. the 1 option to run pterm as a login shell which causes it to run profile If you want to you can change the Terminal item on the shelf so that it executes pterm 1 To do this right click on the shelf and choose Setup Select the Terminal entry and change ptermto pterm 1 You should also change the Desktop pop up menu to match edit SHOME ph wm wm menu or run phmenu and add the 1 option to the pterm entry This change doesn t take effect until you restart the window manager I would like to bypass the login prompt when booting my computer into Photon Is this possible Yes for more information see re local in Starting Up Your System How can I change the language layout of my keyboard Choose the Localization item on the shelf You can choose from several different keyboard configurations see International keyboards in Using the Command Line How can I add files to the Helpviewer such as help files for programs that I install or new documents found on the web I noticed that the File menu doesn t let you bring up a file requester and look for a help file The Helpviewer looks for files with an extension of toc in the usr help product directory Take a look at an existing toc file as well as Context Sensitive Help in the Photon Programmer s Guide To open an arbitrary file without creating the toc files use the Voyager browser instead of the helpviewer I tried to create new file associatio
118. the IP address of your cable network operator e The default netmask 0 0 0 0 is filled in automatically e Inthe Name Servers field add any IP addresses you know there may be more than one The first entry should be the IP address of your cable operator 3 Reboot your machine DHCP will start automatically Testing modems You can use qtalk to test your modem 1 Make sure the modem is plugged into the phone line 350 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Modems 4 Use the stty command to set the modem s baud rate For example to set the speed of the modem on dev ser1 to 57600 56K modems use this speed type stty baud 57600 lt dev serl Type qtalk mdevice where device is the name of the serial port e g dev ser1 Type at The modem should reply OK Troubleshooting modems If you followed the instructions above but the modem doesn t reply OK check the following February 1 2005 Make sure your baud rate settings are correct Is the modem plugged in Is the modem a software modem Neutrino doesn t support Win modems or HSP Host Signal Processor modems otherwise known as soft modems Neutrino works with PnP modems but you must specify in the BIOS that you aren t running a PnP aware OS Does the modem conflict with another device at the same I O port and IRQ If the modem is an internal ISA modem you may need to reserve an I O port r
119. the command Here are some of the commands To Press Leave Emacs Open a file Save a file Move to the end of the current word Move to the beginning of the current word Page back Page forward Delete the current word Delete to the end of the current line Set a mark Copy text from the mark to the cursor Paste text To learn more about Emacs see e www gnu org manual Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl X Ctrl F filename or Ctrl X 4 f filename Ctrl X Ctrl S Esc F Esc B Esc V Ctrl V Ctrl D Ctrl K Ctrl i e Ctrl Shift 2 Ctrl W Ctrl Y e Cameron Deborah Bill Rosenblatt and Eric S Raymond 1996 Learning GNU Emacs Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 1 56592 152 6 Chapter 7 e Using Editors February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Third party editors JED JED is a lightweight implementation of Emacs designed to operate in a command window All of the commands and comments for Emacs apply to JED but JED is more flexible because it doesn t require a windowing environment To start JED choose Editors JED from the desktop s Launch menu or type jed filename For more information about JED see www jedsoft org Jjed Vim Vim vi Improved expands on the power and speed of vi but makes the user experience more comfortable by including e a Status line that indicates the current mode e c
120. the disk CAUTION There is some risk in running chkfsys on a live system both chkfsys and the filesystem are reading and possibly writing the same blocks on the disk If you do this and chkfsys writes something it sends a message to the filesystem to invalidate itself and that makes the filesystem remount itself and go back to the disk to reread all data This marks any open files as stale you ll get an error of EIO whenever you read or write unless you close and reopen the files This can affect things such as your system log file Static changes in place on files or directories that the filesystem doesn t currently have opened will probably not cause problems If you re running an application that can t afford downtime or you couldn t run chkfsys because files were open for updating try to run chkfsys with the f option chkfsys f dev hd0t79 This invokes a special read only mode of chkfsys that can give you an idea of the overall sanity of your filesystem February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 421 What to do if your system will no longer boot 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Recovering from a bad block in the middle of a file Hard disks occasionally develop bad blocks as they age In some cases you might be able to recover most or even all the data in a file containing a bad block Some bad blocks are the result of power failures or of weak media on the hard disk
121. the driver doesn t detect the interface or drives attached to it e Check the supported hardware part of our website to see if the interface is supported see the introduction to this chapter Even if your interface isn t listed as being supported the EIDE controller can work in a generic mode that uses programmed input output PIO modes which is slower but works in almost all cases e Ensure that the interface is correctly set up in the BIOS and that the BIOS can see the drives correctly e Check that the drives are set up correctly each slave drive must have a corresponding master as per the ATAPI specs A single chain can t have two master drives or two slave drives e Ensure that the power connection is functioning correctly e Pass the device ID and vendor ID to the driver e Pass the I O port and IRQ to devb eide Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 313 Hard disks 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Here are some other problems that you might encounter and what you should try e Ifthe driver hangs disable busmastering e g devb eide eide nobmstr e If you see sloginfo entries of eide_transfer_downgrade UDMA CRC error downgrading to MDMA reduce the transfer mode and check the cables e Ifyou see sloginfo entries of eide_timer timeout path XX device XX verify that the driver is using the correct interrupt reduce the transfer mode and check the cables e Ifa PCMCIA disk doesn t work when confi
122. the hub supports Not all hubs support full duplex Active Interface Type This is the type of interface used on the Ethernet adapter This is usually UTP unshielded twisted pair STP shielded twisted pair Fiber AUI Attachment Unit Interface MII or BNC coaxial Active PHY Address This is an identifier that tells you which of the physical PHYs were used to interface to the network The numbers range from 0 31 and change depending on whether or not you specified a specific PHY or if you let the driver select the default which varies from card to card Power Management State This value tells you the NIC s current power status Off Standby Idle or Active If you can t send or receive packets make sure the status is Active if it isn t there may be a problem with power management on your system Maximum Transmittable data Unit The Maximum Transmittable data Unit MTU is the size of the largest frame length that can be sent on a physical media This isn t commonly used for debugging however it may be useful for optimizing a network application A value of 0 is invalid and is a good indicator that the card isn t set up correctly The default value is 1514 February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 339 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Maximum Receivable data Unit This is the MTU s complement it affects the largest frame length that can be received The default value is
123. the original data e write behind of writes to allow a large amount of dirty data to be coalesced into a single contiguous multiple block write The most efficient way of accessing the disk for high performance is through the standard POSIX routines that work with file descriptors open read and write because these allow direct access to the filesystem with no interference from libe If you re concerned about performance we don t recommend that you use the standard I O lt stdio h gt routines that work with FILE variables because they introduce another layer of code and another layer of buffering In particular the default buffer size is BUFSIZ or 1K so all access to the disk is carved up into chunks of that size causing a large amount of overhead for passing messages and switching contexts There are some cases when the standard I O facilities are useful such as when processing a text file one line or character at a time in which February 1 2005 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 451 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd case the 1K buffering provided by standard I O greatly reduces the number of messages to the filesystem You can improve performance by using e setvbuf to increase the buffering size e fileno to access the underlying file descriptor directly and to bypass the buffering during performance critical sections You can also optimize performance by accessing the disk in
124. the right edge of your workspace You can run many terminals at once each capable of running multitasking processes Photon terminals emulate character devices so the information in this chapter applies to them as well as to real character devices Processing a command February 1 2005 When you type a command several different processes interpret it in turn 1 The driver for your character device interprets such keys as Backspace and Ctrl C 2 The command interpreter or shell breaks the command line into tokens interprets them and then invokes any utilities 3 The utilities parse the command line that the shell passes to them and then they perform the appropriate actions Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 37 Character device drivers 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Character device drivers When you type a command the first process that interprets it is the character device driver The driver that you use depends on your hardware for more information see Character I O drivers deve in the Utilities Summary of the Utilities Reference Some keys may behave differently from how they re described here depending on how you configure your system For more information see Character I O in the System Architecture guide Input modes Character device drivers run in either raw input mode or canonical or edited input mode In raw input mode each character is submitted to an application pro
125. this for a command that s built into the shell which can t find it which cd which no cd in bin usr bin usr photon bin opt bin The whence command displays what the command means to the shell including any aliases in effect For example if you ve created an alias for 1s the output might be whence ls ls F Understanding command syntax February 1 2005 Whenever you look up a command in the Utilities Reference you ll see a syntax statement that summarizes how you can use the command For most commands this statement consists of command_name The name of the command to be executed This may be the name of an executable program such as a utility or it may be the name of a command built into the shell options The specific behavior that you want to invoke for the command Options typically consist of an alphanumeric character preceded by a hyphen e g c Some options take an argument e g n number If you specify an option that takes an argument you must include its argument as well operands Data the command requires e g a filename Ifa command lets you enter multiple operands they re usually processed in the order you list them Unlike options operands aren t preceded by a hyphen e g more my_file Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 55 Utilities 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The entries in the Utilities Reference use some special symbols to express the command syntax
126. use the p option to specify the location of the parallel port If the driver fails to detect your parallel port ensure that the port is enabled in the BIOS If that fails try specifying the I O port when you start the driver On a standard PC and some x86 systems the deve con driver controls the physical console which consists of the display adapter the screen and the system keyboard By default the driver is configured for up to four virtual consoles dev con1 dev con4 The deve con driver is also the keyboard driver for non USB keyboards in text mode You can start the driver with this command devc con amp For more information see deve con in the Utilities Reference 1 0 attributes To set or display the I O attributes for a character device tty use the stty utility For more information about setting up your terminal see Terminal support in Using the Command Line Network adapters The main steps in setting up a network adapter are e identifying your Network Interface Card NIC 334 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Network adapters e starting the driver e making sure the driver and hardware communicate Identify your NIC The documentation for the hardware should describe the type of chipset used If you don t know what type of chipset you re using you can identify it using pci vvv Find the entry for the Network controller an
127. used EDITOR to specify a line oriented editor and VISUAL to specify a fullscreen editor Applications might use one or or both of these variables Some applications that use both use VISUAL in preference to EDITOR when a fullscreen editor is required or EDITOR in preference to VISUAL when a line oriented editor is required Few modern applications invoke line oriented editors and few users set EDITOR to one so you can t rely on applications to give preference one way or the other For most uses we recommend that you set VISUAL and EDITOR to the same value Once you ve tried various editors you can set these environment variables so that your favorite editor becomes the default At the command line prompt type export VISUAL path export EDITOR path where path is the path to the executable for the editor For example if you want to use jed as the default editor type which jed usr local bin Jjed export VISUAL usr local bin Jjed export EDITOR usr local bin Jjed To check the value of the EDITOR environment variable type February 1 2005 Chapter 7 e Using Editors 153 Specifying the default editor 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd echo SEDITOR You ll likely want to set these variables in your profile HOME profile so that they re set whenever you log in For more information see SHOME profile in Configuring Your Environment 154 Chapter 7 e Using Editors February 1 2005 Chapte
128. utilities such as chmod 1s and ksh To display basic utility syntax type use utilityname from the command line For more information see use in the Utilities Reference 118 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Where everything is stored boot dev February 1 2005 The boot directory contains files and directories related to creating bootable OS images image filesystems Image filesystems contain OS components your executables and data files that need to be present and running immediately upon bootup For general information on this topic see Making an OS Image in the Building Embedded Systems guide and mkifs in the Utilities Reference This directory includes boot build boot fs boot sys This directory contains the mkifs buildfiles used to build OS images The buildfiles for a standard x86 based Neutrino system are qnxbase build and qnxbasedma build By convention we use this directory to store image filesystems built by mkifs To boot from one of the images you ll need to copy it to boot ona bootable QNX 4 filesystem device first IPL and startup code are located here This is one of the paths searched by the mkifs utility as it tries to resolve components named in the buildfile As described earlier the dev directory belongs to the process manager This directory contains device files possibly including dev adn dev con
129. x86 PII 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table lists the rates in megabytes per seconds for writing and reading a 256M file using file descriptors and standard I O Record size FD write FD read Stdio write Stdio read 32 1 5 1 7 10 9 12 7 64 2 8 3 1 11 7 14 3 continued Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystems Record size FD write FD read Stdio write Stdio read 128 5 0 5 6 12 0 15 1 256 8 0 9 0 12 4 15 2 512 10 8 12 9 13 2 16 0 1024 14 1 16 9 13 1 16 3 2048 16 1 20 6 13 2 16 5 4096 17 1 24 0 13 9 16 5 8192 18 3 31 4 14 0 16 4 16384 18 1 37 3 14 3 16 4 Notice how the read access is very sensitive to the record size this is because each read maps to an IO READ message and is basically a context switch and message pass to the filesystem when only small amounts of data are transferred each time the OS overhead becomes significant Since standard I O access using fread uses a 1K internal buffer the number of IOLREAD messages remains constant regardless of the user record size and the throughput resembles that of the file descriptor 1K access in all cases with slight degradation at smaller record sizes due to the increased number of libe calls made Thus you should consider the anticipated file access patterns when you choose from these I O paradigms Pregrowing a file This example illustrates the effect of
130. you have two video cards in your system You can find the enumerators in etc system enum devices graphics Once you ve removed the offending device from the traplist check to see if crttrap detects the card properly 360 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Video cards February 1 2005 crttrap trap VVVVV If crttrap still hangs try setting the mode manually by editing etc system config graphics modes Create this file it if it doesn t already exist For more information see Manually setting up your video card above Also keep in mind that you can always run the Vesa generic driver devg vesabios so Your graphics card isn t detected If you have a card that you expect to work with one of our accelerated drivers but you get only the generic drivers detected by erttrap you might have a chipset that s missing from the graphics enumerator Try the following 1 Look in etc system enum devices graphics for the driver that you think you should run For example if you re using a Radeon card look for devg radeon so 2 Edit etc system enum devices overrides and add an entry for your card You need to specify the PCI Vendor and Device ID of the chipset which you can find by using the pei utility Add a line after the last known PCI ID and before the line cfg fname etc system config graphics traplist 3 Save the file and reboot the system If
131. 00 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal Supported Orientation 0 Portrait 1 Landscape Supported Intensity 0 Min 100 Max Supported InkType 1 B amp W 3 gt Color CMY 4 Color CMYK Resolution 600 600 PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter Orientation 0 Portrait Intensity 50 InkType 4 Color CMYK NonPrintable 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom ioe a a ee if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _850DDE PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 B5 11692 16524 A3 f TERINA E RA eon EENEN PAES ee ee ee ee ee ee a ee if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _25A854 PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 2500C CLS PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter February 1 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 489 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 B5 11692 16524 A3 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes The following script starts the Point to Point Protocol daemon pppd with a chat script waits for the modem to ring answers it and starts PPP services with CHAP Challenge Handshake
132. 005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Overview of Photon Overview of Photon The Photon microGUI is Neutrino s graphical user interface and you can use it as a desktop environment similar to other GUI desktop environments This means you can run applications in windows use the mouse for point and click and dragging operations view directories and files graphically in a tree hierarchy view multimedia files and so on Photon also provides the framework for graphical applications in embedded systems Many of the applications and utilities that come with Photon are documented in the Neutrino Utilities Reference For information about programming Photon applications see the Photon Programmer s Guide Why is it called Photon Whenever you use your mouse or press a key you re giving input to a Photon application And whenever the application displays data in a window it s providing output All these interactions are processed as tiny packets of data called events You can think of all these input and output events traveling between you and Photon applications as photons particles of light Why is it called a microGUI We call Photon a microGUI because of its size and architecture Photon is a very small GUI It s designed to fit in embedded systems but it s also designed to be scaled up Photon is perfectly at home in high end high performance distributed systems Like Neutrino itself Photon is built arou
133. 005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 171 etc re d re sysinit 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd etc re d re sysinit f D J v random dumper rc local TLIE Initialization done by etc re d re sysinit The rc sysinit script does the following 1 It starts a secure random number generator random to provide random numbers for use in encryption and so on If the var dumps directory exists rec sysinit starts the dumper utility to capture in var dumps dumps of processes that terminate abnormally If etc host _cfg SHOSTNAME re d re local exists and is executable re sysinit runs it Otherwise if etc re d rce local exists and is executable re sysinit runs it There isn t a default version of this file you must create it if you want to use it For more information see re 1local below Finally re sysinit runs tinit By default the system starts Photon but if you create a file called etc system config nophoton then re sysinit tells tinit to use text mode For more information see tinit below 172 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd rce local rc local February 1 2005 As described above re sysinit runs etc host_cfg SHOSTNAME re d re local or etc rce d re local if the file exists and is executable You can use the rc local file to customize your startup by e starting add
134. 096 132K 1ldqnx so 2 b0300000 312K 16K npm tcpip so b8200000 592K 144K devn e1900 so b82b8000 56K 4096 devn epic so b82c7000 44K 4096 npm qnet 14_lite so b82d3000 132K 16K If the output includes an npm qnet shared object Qnet is running Is the Qnet protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed In order to ascertain the above use the following command ls dev io net Ideally you should see the following output eno ipod ip_en ipv6_en qnet_en The enO entry represents the first and only Ethernet driver and qnet en represents the Qnet protocol stack Is the network card functional 246 To determine whether or not the network card is functional i e transmitting and receiving packets use the nicinfo command If you re logged in as root your PATH includes the directory that contains the nicinfo executable if you re logged in as another user you have to specify the full path Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting usr sbin nicinfo Now figure out the diagnostic information from the following output 3COM 90xC 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet Controller Physical Node ID 000103 E8433F Current Physical Node ID 000103 E8433F Media Rate oo ioi enda e EE 10 00 Mb s half duplex UTP MTU eroa ere as A ee ere a Ea TE SAS 1514 TATE ee as ee SEE EP PEGE 0 I O Port Range
135. 192 TIMEZONE file 167 186 tinit 41 123 172 174 titles window 76 tmp 130 TMP DOS variable 63 TMPDIR 63 181 183 toc file extension 135 touchscreens 321 calibrating 321 USB 330 tracerpt DOS command 59 tracert DOS command 59 training 473 transmissions aborted 345 underruns 345 Index 557 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Transparent Distributed Processing 237 Software Kit 241 trap file input 320 troff 135 Trojan horse programs 54 433 troubleshooting after unexpected system failure 420 boot failure 422 command line 64 devb eide 313 disks checking for corruption 396 426 patching 419 environment setting 196 files 139 233 modems 351 Photon 102 printing 300 profiles 196 Qnet 244 system starting and shutting down 174 TCP IP 268 user accounts 32 video cards 358 TrueType fonts 135 194 trusted users 261 TTF ttf file extension 135 194 ttys configuration file 41 123 174 txt file extension 135 type DOS command 59 typeover mode 39 typing reducing 44 558 Index typographical conventions xxiii TZ 167 186 tzname 192 tzset 192 U uc_tzt 189 UDMA Ultra Direct Memory Access 312 315 UHCI Universal Host Controller Interface 327 ulimit 469 Ultra Direct Memory Access See UDMA umask 135 181 umount 212 243 undeleting a zapped file 419 Unicode filenames 116 typing 147 152 unions directory 115 Universal Host Controller Interface See UHCI Universal Serial Bus See
136. 1pd on the remote machine is probably dead or hung and should be restarted sending to host The files should be in the process of being transferred to the remote host If not root should use 1pre to abort and restart the local daemon Warning printer is down The printer has been marked as being unavailable with lpre Warning no daemon present The 1pd process overseeing the spooling queue as specified in the lock file in that directory doesn t exist This normally occurs only when the daemon has unexpectedly died Check the error log file for the printer and the syslogd log to diagnose the problem To restart an 1pd type lprc restart printer no space on remote waiting for queue to drain This implies that there isn t enough disk space on the remote machine If the file is large enough there will never be enough space on the remote even after the queue on the remote is empty The solution here is to move the spooling queue or make more free space on the remote machine lprrm error messages lprrm printer cannot restart printer daemon This case is the same as when 1pr prints that the daemon can t be started 302 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting lprc error messages couldn t start printer This case is the same as when lpr reports that the daemon can t be started cannot examine spool directory Error messages beginning with cannot are usu
137. 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Getting help with the Helpviewer Task Menu command Shortcut Return to the next topic after using the File gt Forward Alt gt File gt Back command Move up a level if you ve opened a File Up Ctrl U folder Open the topics pane if it s closed View View Topics Ctrl T Open the search results panel if it s closed View where the currently displayed topic is located in the topics list View a list of previously viewed topics View View Search Results Ctrl S View Where View History List Ctrl Y The online documentation also includes some navigation buttons at the top and bottom of each file Previous Contents Index E Navigation buttons in the online docs The Contents button moves you up in the document e Ina prose book it typically takes you to About This Guide e Ina reference book it takes you to the listing of items that start with a given letter For example if you re looking at the docs for abs this button takes you to the list of the functions that start with A February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 83 Surfing the web with Voyager 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Viewing more than one topic at once You can view several topics at once by opening topics in a new topic window Each open topic window is indicated by a tab above the topic pane To open a new topic pane select F
138. 328 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd USB devices Printers For a USB printer start the USB stack and then devu prn For example io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb devu prn Mice and keyboards February 1 2005 Currently there s no support for USB keyboards in text mode but Intel machines can use BIOS emulation to support them Photon supports USB Human Interface Devices HID such as keyboards and mice To connect USB HIDs 1 Start the USB stack as described above 2 Start io hid loading the devh usb so module io hid dusb If your system also uses serial or PS 2 input devices you can load the devh ps2ser so module as well 3 After starting Photon start devi hid for the USB HID devices as follows devi hid kbd u USB_device_number mouse You can start io hid in your rc local file but not devi hid because Photon hasn t started when your system runs re local Instead add the devi hid command to the input trap file see inputtrap in the Utilities Reference In Photon once the devices are running you can use the input cfg utility to configure the mouse From the shelf click Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 329 USB devices 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Launch Configure Mouse You can use the hidview utility to get information about the human interface devices Touchscreens For USB touchscreens start the USB stack
139. 409 examining withina file 422 extent 413 414 files and file extents 416 key components on disk 408 loader 409 417 partition block 417 recovering 220 418 419 root block 409 verifying allocation 418 BMP converting Photon draw stream into 296 fileextension 135 Board Support Packages See BSPs Index 521 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd bookmarks 82 boot image 129 158 loader writing to disk 160 ROM 160 script 158 boot directory 119 boot file 118 160 409 410 bootable CDs 404 images 135 booting 157 applications starting 173 Ext2 filesystem can t boot from 222 Photon disabling 127 172 running chkfsys on servers 420 speeding up 447 troubleshooting 175 422 bootp 160 bootpd 261 bootptab 123 braces 48 branching 387 browser 84 BSPs Board Support Packages 158 buffers canonical input 463 double 455 overrun attack 432 raw input 463 standard I O 451 BUFSIZ 448 451 456 build file extension 135 buildfiles 135 160 477 481 483 522 Index boot and altboot 161 OS images creating 213 PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH 183 script files 201 builtin commands 55 bunzip2 401 burst headers suppressing on print jobs 284 buttons mouse swapping 77 navigation in documentation 83 bytes received 343 transmitted 341 bzip2 401 C C code 135 header files 135 c file extension 135 C code 135 definition files 135 cable modems 264 350 cables 314 339 cache size for floppies 311 Cache Ve
140. 410 bad_blks 418 bitmap 117 410 rewriting with chkfsys 418 boot 118 160 409 410 481 diskroot 118 164 exre 145 inodes 118 410 413 450 entries 216 413 February 1 2005 Index pregrowing 449 kshre 182 example of 485 interactive mode 197 lastlogin 124 lock 278 longfilenames 215 217 413 ph 180 profile 103 154 181 example of 484 pwlock 20 23 29 thosts 261 pathname separator 111 root directory 110 113 117 dev 115 etc directory 123 See also individual files 45 character while booting 161 wildcard character 48 204 47 47 47 Index 519 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 46 51 gt 50 gt gt 50 lt 50 lt sys h gt See individual files 48 utility syntax 56 wildcard character 48 home directory 18 46 pipe 50 205 utility syntax 56 1 file extension 135 1 3D Graphics TDK 8 A a file extension 135 AbiWord 148 ABLANG 97 105 ABLPATH 97 AB_RESOVRD 97 absolute pathnames 111 accents 59 147 152 account center myQNX 473 accounts user 11 17 adding 27 managing 25 removing 29 520 Index acl conf 123 add CVS command 381 390 address space 128 limits 468 470 adduser UNIX command 3 administrator system See root AH Authentication Header 437 aliases 46 examples 485 setting 103 182 altboot file 117 160 409 410 ansi terminal type 39 anti aliasing 76 193 applications hiding and showing 71 launching
141. 447 pin 324 ping 248 271 PIO Programmed Input Output 312 pipe 121 pipes 50 205 bytes writing atomically 463 manager starting 166 pkget1 230 231 Index 547 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd platforms directories 118 supported 7 Ppload so 75 Plug and Play modems 348 plugins arguments to 98 PnP BIOS 163 Point to Point Protocol See PPP Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet See PPPoE pointercam 75 Portable Archive Exchange See pax ports parallel 120 334 serial 110 121 multiport 333 performance 333 POSIX 3 PostScript 296 power outage recovering from 420 power turning off don t 14 PPC directories 118 limits 470 PPP Point to Point Protocol 263 265 490 pppd 265 490 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 263 264 pppoe up 265 pppoed 265 preferences default editor 153 Photon 72 Voyager web browser 86 prefix space limits 468 548 Index preview 297 primary boot loader 160 prime meridian 188 print DOS command 59 printcap 275 283 examples 288 PRINTER 289 printers 126 printers USB 329 printing access control 281 accounting information 286 burst headers suppressing 284 files converting for 286 296 filters 286 296 jobs canceling 279 starting 278 lpr 276 486 managing lpre 279 prjobs 297 NCFTP over 276 487 overview 275 Photon 295 preview 297 printer capabilities 283 Qnet over 276 298 queue managing 77 279 remotely 285 SAMBA over 276 488 serial lines 2
142. 5 QNX Software Systems Ltd etc hosts 1pd file on node1 and node2 for each node that you want to be able to use the printers If you ve set up your remote printing network according to the examples given you should be able to send a file in tmp test on node2 to the printer attached to node1 using a command like this lpr h Plpt1 tmp test Here s what happens 1 2 You enter the lpr command to print a file remotely The lpr utility requests printing service The 1pd daemon on node2 hears the request spawns a copy of itself to service the request and then creates a spooling subdirectory to hold the files to be printed The spawned 1pd daemon places the print job in the spooler as two files a data file containing the file to be printed and a header file containing information about the print job to be printed as an optional front sheet The spawned 1pd daemon processes the spooled print jobs in the order they were received it starts sending data packets containing the print job to the remote 1pd daemon The 1pd daemon on node receives the packets as a printing request and after checking that the request is from an approved node spawns a copy of itself to service the request and also creates a spooling subdirectory to hold the files to be printed If the request isn t from an approved source a refusal message is sent back to the source address The spawned 1pd collects the data packets places the print j
143. 5 QNX Software Systems Ltd console The display adapter the screen and the system keyboard are collectively referred to as the physical console A virtual console emulates a physical console and lets you run more than one terminal session at a time on a machine cooked mode See canonical mode core dump A file describing the state of a process that terminated abnormally device driver A process that allows the OS and application programs to make use of the underlying hardware in a generic way e g a disk drive a network interface Unlike OSs that require device drivers to be tightly bound into the OS itself device drivers for Neutrino are standard processes that can be started and stopped dynamically As a result adding device drivers doesn t affect any other part of the OS drivers can be developed and debugged like any other application Also device drivers are in their own protected address space so a bug in a device driver won t cause the entire OS to shut down DNS Domain Name Service an Internet protocol used to convert ASCII domain names into IP addresses In QNX native networking dns is one of Qnet s builtin resolvers edge sensitive One of two ways in which a PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller can be programmed to respond to interrupts In edge sensitive mode the interrupt is noticed upon a transition to from the rising falling edge of a pulse Contrast level sensitive 502
144. 6 metadata 449 mib txt 124 mice acceleration 77 buttons swapping 77 configuring 320 pointercam 75 PS 2 320 329 serial 320 329 542 Index speed 77 wheel enabling 77 microGUI See Photon microkernel See also kernel advantages of 6 Microsoft Windows time setting 197 minimal routing 255 MIPS directories 118 limits 470 mk file extension 135 mkdir 58 mkefs 223 mkifs 135 160 201 213 mkisofs 403 mkkbd 59 135 mktime 192 mode DOS command 59 modems 347 cable 350 example 490 external 349 Host Signal Processor HSP 351 PCI 349 settings 77 soft 351 testing 350 troubleshooting 351 Win 351 modes See permissions more 3 56 58 motd 124 181 mount 129 212 233 243 309 311 configuration 453 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index NFS 226 mountpoints 113 pathname space 129 move DOS command 59 Mozilla 5 MPEG audio configuring 98 mq mqueue directory 120 mqueue starting 166 mrouted 261 MRU Maximum Receivable data Unit 340 msgs UNIX command 3 msiexec DOS command 59 MTU Maximum Transmittable data Unit 339 multicast mode 341 Multimedia TDK 8 multimonitor display 354 mute 75 mutexes limits 469 mutt 5 mv 58 interactive mode 485 myQNxX account center 473 N name resolution 239 named 262 named semaphores limits 469 manager mqueue 166 pathname space 121 named special files 110 213 nameservers 254 February 1 2005 information about 269 NAT Netw
145. 70 Technical Support 471 Examples 475 Buildfile for an NFS mounting target 477 qnxbasedma build 481 Buildfile that doesn t use diskboot 483 profile 484 kshre 485 Configuration files for spooler 485 Using lpr 486 Using NCFTP 487 Using SAMBA 488 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes Configuration files for setting up a firewall 493 ipf conf 493 ipnat conf 495 Glossary 497 Index 519 Contents 490 xvii February 1 2005 List of Figures The QNX Neutrino architecture 6 Photon s workspace including the taskbar shelf and desktop 70 Desktop menu 71 Shelf configuration dialog 73 Photon File Manager 78 The Photon helpviewer 80 Navigation buttons in the online docs 83 The Voyager browser 85 The Photon editor ped 147 Booting a Neutrino system 158 Booting a Neutrino system with an x86 BIOS 159 Initialization done by diskboot 163 Initialization done by etc re d re sysinit 172 One file referenced by two links 217 Symbolic links 219 Actual filesystem using the package filesystem 229 Virtual filesystem using the package filesystem 229 Working with the spill directory 231 Components of Qnet 240 Components of TCP IP in Neutrino 256 Printing with the lpr utilities 277 Printing with spooler 297 Branching a file in CVS 387 Components of a QNX 4 filesystem in a disk partition 408 Contents of the root directory 410 List of Figures X X 2005 QNX Soft
146. 85 spooler 295 configuration files 485 spooling daemon 261 278 spooling directories 281 295 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index TCP IP over 276 293 294 298 troubleshooting 300 priorities privileged 468 range 468 specifying 57 446 prjobs 77 297 problems command line 64 devb eide 313 environment setting 196 files 139 233 modems 351 Photon 102 printing 300 profiles 196 Qnet 244 system starting and shutting down 174 TCP IP 268 user accounts 32 video cards 358 proc 128 process groups limits 468 process manager idle thread 446 starting 158 virtual directory 128 processes abnormal termination 131 172 address space 128 arguments 447 closing files while running chkfsys 419 CPU usage 445 environment inheriting 183 February 1 2005 files maximum open per 462 ID 3 proc directory 128 procnto 446 information about 244 killing 39 limits 468 memory usage 447 priority 57 446 468 running remotely 244 statistics 445 447 terminating at system shutdown 14 PROCESSOR 181 PROCESSOR_ARCHITECTURE DOS variable 63 PROCESSOR_IDENTIFIER DOS variable 63 procnto 468 See also kernel process manager loader 204 processID 446 resource database 163 shared memory 213 starting 158 virtual directory 128 product 130 products updates 473 profile file 180 profile d 126 profile d directory 197 profiles profile 154 181 default 127 ksh 182 197 troubleshooting 196 Index 54
147. 8PDT Pacific Standard Time is 8 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale By default Pacific Daylight Time is one hour ahead of standard time that is PDT7 Since it isn t specified daylight saving time starts on the first Sunday of April at 2 00 A M and ends on the last Sunday of October at 2 00 A M 190 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Setting the time zone Newfoundland time The specification for Newfoundland time is NST3 30NDT2 30 e Newfoundland Standard Time is 3 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale e Newfoundland Daylight Time is 2 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC Central European time The specification for Central European time is Central Europe Time 2 00 e Central European Time is 2 hours later than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale Japanese time The specification for Japanese time is JST 9 e Japanese Standard Time is 9 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale February 1 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 191 Setting the time zone 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Programming with time zones
148. 9 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd vi exre 145 Programmed Input Output See PIO promiscuous mode 341 PROMPT DOS variable 63 prompt command line default 11 setting 485 proxy override 87 ps 445 ps cfg 296 PS 2 keyboards 320 329 mice 320 329 PS1 PS2 63 485 pseudo terminals 121 psin 445 pterm 37 aliases 103 colors 104 configuration files 125 help 81 hotkeys 93 palette file 102 terminal type setting 38 66 196 PTERMPAL 102 PTERMRC 102 ptrcam so 75 putenv 192 pv 135 pwd 45 58 63 PWD 63 pwlock file 20 23 29 pwm configuration files 126 hotkeys 95 menu 75 550 Index options 76 pwmopts 76 PWMOPTS 102 PWM PRINTSCRN_APP_ 102 Q Qcc qce 135 qconn security 436 qde 131 qed 144 Qnet 237 customizing 242 diagnostic information 247 printing over 276 298 protocol stack 241 246 248 remote execution 57 security 436 software components 240 starting 127 241 troubleshooting 244 qnetstats 247 QNX Package file QPK 135 QNX Package Manifest file QPM 135 QNX Package Repository file QPR 135 QNX Repository Manifest file QRM 135 QNX4FS_FILE_LINK bit 413 qnxbase build 119 161 qnxbasedma build 119 161 481 qnxinstall 123 135 232 QNX 4 filesystems 214 464 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index consistency checking for 220 disk structure 407 filenames 215 mounting 164 qpk file extension 135 qpm file extension 135 qpr file extensi
149. AY en0 DST 127 0 0 0 NETMASK 255 0 0 0 GATEWAY 100 DST 0 0 0 0 NETMASK 0 0 0 0 GATEWAY 10 0 0 1 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Choosing the right stack configuration Here you can see that the interface has been configured to 10 0 0 100 and the default route has been set to 10 0 0 1 Full TCP IP stack npm tcpip so The full TCP IP stack npm tcpip so is based on the BSD TCP IP stack and it supports similar features If you aren t using phlip the Photon TCP IP and dialup configuration tool to configure the full stack you have to use the ifconfig and route utilities as described below you can t use command line options as you would for the tiny stack The npm tcpip so file is actually a symbolic link that points to either npm tcpip v4 so or npm tcpip v6 so depending on what you ve installed To start the full stack load the TCP IP shared object into io net For example io net dne2000 ptcpip To configure an interface with an IP address you must use the ifconfig utility To configure your network interface with an IP address of 10 0 0 100 you would use the following command ifconfig en0 10 0 0 100 If you also want to specify your gateway use the route command route add default 10 0 0 1 This configures the gateway host as 10 0 0 1 If you then want to view your network configuration use the netstat command netstat in displays
150. Applications You can configure Voyager to use different rendering engines such as vserver netfront or Mozilla Some preferences are specific to the rendering engine See voyager in the Utilities Reference for more information about specifying a rendering engine or web server using web server profiles Cache tab 86 Caching can help Voyager display files and images faster In addition to the disk cache size you can specify Image Cache Size The image cache holds all images rendered to the screen If you find web pages with images not displayed or you have a high color monitor with a high color graphics driver running and the Use 256 colors only button is disabled you may need to increase the image cache size Cache n Pages Voyager might run faster if you have a large number of web pages cached however increasing the number of cached pages might use more memory Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Surfing the web with Voyager Cache Verify Policy How often you want Voyager to compare the web page in the cache with the version on the Internet Voyager doesn t refresh its versions of files that are on your network i e URLs that start with file instead of http Ifa file has been changed click Reload to see the updated version Appearance tab In this part of the configuration dialog you can specify e the colors to use for links active links visi
151. CS_TIMEZONE configuration string or the TZ environment variable to specify your time zone The system displays and interprets local times and automatically determines when daylight saving time starts and ends This means that you can have dial up users in different time zones on the same computer and they can all see the correct current local time It also helps when transmitting data from time zone to time zone You stamp the data with the UTC time stamp and all of the computers involved should have an easy time comparing time stamps in one time zone to time stamps in another Some operating systems such as Windows set the hardware clock to local time If you install Windows and Neutrino on the same machine you should set the hardware clock to local time by executing the following command as root and putting it into etce re d re rte rtc 1 hw If you re using Photon you can just uncheck The hardware clock uses UTC GMT in phlocale if you do that the program creates a rc rtc file for you that contains the above command After setting up the clock sysinit sets the HOSTNAME environment variable to be the name of the host system It gets this name from the hostname command or from etc HOSTNAME if that doesn t succeed Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 167 Device enumeration 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd A hostname can consist only of letters numbers and hyphens and must not start or end with a hyp
152. Chapter 19 e Securing Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Setting up a firewall Another important keyword is log So far all the examples have quietly either passed or blocked without letting anyone know it was doing it If you want to make sure that the firewall is doing its job you can log what s happening although you probably don t want to log everything For example block in quick on pppO from 192 168 0 0 16 to any block in quick on pppO from 172 16 0 0 12 to any block in quick on pppO from 224 0 0 0 3 to any block in log quick on pppO from 20 20 20 0 24 to any pass in all These rules make the filter log all packets that get blocked on pppo from 20 20 20 0 24 You can also set bidirectional rules on interfaces pass out quick on 100 pass in quick on 100 Here are some other keywords that you can use in the rules proto The protocol e g tcp icmp udp port TCP or UDP port number For example block in log quick on en0 proto tcp from any to 20 20 20 0 24 port 23 These are just a few of the combinations of rules and keywords that you can use For an example of ipf conf see Configuration files for setting up a firewall in the Examples appendix in this guide Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Before starting NAT you must create a configuration file that specifies a simple rule such as Map pppO 192 168 1 0 24 gt 20 20 20 1 32 February 1 2005 Chapter 19
153. Compatible doesn t mean identical To be certain look for the device ID on our website see the introduction to this chapter Does the SCSI BIOS see all the devices correctly If it does then all the devices are set up correctly and don t have any conflicting SCSI IDs You can also check this by using another operating system if it detects the devices correctly and doesn t display any problems the setup is correct Remember that if a SCSI chain isn t terminated correctly a device may appear on the chain but will likely have problems after some use Each device on a SCSI chain needs to have a unique ID number between 1 and the maximum value supported by the adapter check the user manual for the adapter If two devices have the same ID one or both may malfunction or not be recognized by the computer Is there a PCI bridging problem Try moving the SCSI card to another PCI slot Sometimes a PCI bridging problem can prevent Neutrino from properly attaching to the card This can happen because Neutrino doesn t support bridges of type other Is the BIOS set up for a PnP aware OS Neutrino isn t a PnP aware OS Does the adapter or chain need an external power source If so even if the device has power it can t communicate with your computer if the SCSI adapter doesn t have power Check the type of SCSI cable There are several types and the type of adapter you re using determines the type of cable you need
154. Delete from the cursor to the end of the current word Esc D Delete from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl K Paste text Ctrl Y As in emacs commands that involve the Ctrl key are keychords for commands that involve Esc press and release each key in sequence For more information see emacs interactive input line editing in the documentation for ksh In order to process these commands ksh uses the character device in raw mode but emulates all of the driver s processing of the keys Other shells such as esh use the character device in canonical edited input mode Command and filename completion You can reduce the amount of typing you have to do by using command completion and filename completion To do this type enough of the command s or file s name to identify it uniquely then press Esc twice If possible the system fills in the rest of the name For example if you type appb then EscEsc the system completes the command name appbuilder If you prefer to use Tab for completing names set the shell s complete key binding by typing bind I complete 44 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Shell on the command line or in the ksh profile For more information about the bind command and the key bindings see emacs interactive input line editing in the documentation for ksh in the Utilities Reference for information about the prof
155. E HE FE FE FE E HE FE EA FE FE AE HE FE FE AE E HE FE FE AE HE FE EA FE FE FEAE HE FE HHH uncomment for NETWORK driver SEAR AE AE HEHE A AE AEE HE FE FE E HE FE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE E HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE AE HE HEHEHE io net ifconfig nicinfo netstat ping EHE EHE AE HE FE E HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE AE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE HE uncomment for USB driver EHE EHE HE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HH HE io usb usb EAE EH HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE E HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E HE FE HE FE HE HE uncomment for NFS REMOTE FILESYSTEM SARE EH HE FE E HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE E FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE HE fs nfs3 EHEHE AEE HEHE A AE AE HE HE A FE E HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE E HE FE EA FE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE
156. February 1 2005 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 433 General OS security 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The hosts for a virus are system call interfaces that are accessible from the point of entry an infected program such as sendmail or an HTTP server The hosts are platform specific so a virus for Linux would in all likelihood terminate the host under Neutrino as soon as it tried to do anything damaging The viruses that circulate via email are OS specific generally targeted at Windows and can t harm Neutrino systems since they simply aren t compatible Most UNIX style systems aren t susceptible to viruses since the ability to do much damage is limited by the host We have never heard of a true virus that could infect Neutrino In addition since deployed Neutrino systems are highly customized to their designated application they often don t contain the software that s open to such attacks e g logins web browsers email Telnet and FTP servers Neutrino security in general 434 Neutrino is a UNIX style operating system so almost all of the general UNIX security information whether generic Linux BSD etc applies to Neutrino as well A quick Internet search for UNIX or Linux security will yield plenty of papers For example http www alw nih gov Security security html is a page that provides links to a variety of online security resources You ll also find many titles at a bookstore or library
157. Glossary February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd edited mode EPROM EEPROM event extent February 1 2005 See canonical mode Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory a memory technology that allows the device to be programmed typically with higher than operating voltages e g 12V with the characteristic that any bit or bits may be individually programmed from a state to a0 state To change a bit from a 0 state into a 1 state can only be accomplished by erasing the entire device setting all of the bits to a 1 state Erasing is accomplished by shining an ultraviolet light through the erase window of the device for a fixed period of time typically 10 20 minutes The device is further characterized by having a limited number of erase cycles typically 10e5 10e6 Contrast EEPROM flash and RAM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory a memory technology that s similar to EPROM but you can erase the entire device electrically instead of via ultraviolet light Contrast flash and RAM A notification scheme used to inform a thread that a particular condition has occurred Events can be signals or pulses in the general case they can also be unblocking events or interrupt events in the case of kernel timeouts and interrupt service routines An event is delivered by a thread a timer the kernel or an interrupt service routine when appropriate to the requestor of the event A contigu
158. In these cases sometimes simply reading then rewriting a block will restore the block for a short period of time This may allow you to copy the entire file somewhere else before the block goes bad again This procedure certainly can t hurt and is often worth a try To examine the blocks within a file use the spatch utility When you get to a bad block spatch should report an error but it may have actually read a portion of good bytes from that block Writing that same block back will often succeed At the same time spatch will rewrite a correct CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check that will make the block good again but with possibly incorrect data You can then copy the entire file somewhere else and then zap the previously damaged file To complete the procedure you mark the marginal block as bad by adding it to the bad_b1ks file then run chkfsys to recover the remaining good blocks If this procedure fails you can use the spatch utility to copy as much of the file as possible to another file and then zap the bad file and run chkfsys What to do if your system will no longer 422 boot If a previously working Neutrino system suddenly stops working and will no longer boot then one of the following may have occurred e the hardware has failed or the data on the hard disk has been damaged Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What to do if your sys
159. Line See DSL dinit 214 215 408 410 417 449 dir DOS command 59 directories archiving 399 400 changing 113 checking structure 418 contents of root directory 410 creating 58 current 112 218 413 changing 58 determining 45 58 PATH 54 prompt including in 485 defined 109 411 entries 411 type 412 group ownership 132 home 18 20 22 26 28 46 180 links to 218 528 Index circular preventing 220 listing contents of 58 managing 78 moving 58 network 239 ownership 132 parent 112 218 413 permissions 132 platform specific 118 print spooling 281 295 QNX 4 signature 413 recovering lost 419 removing 58 removing without returning used blocks 418 renaming 58 spill 131 230 structure 411 substitution 46 unions 115 discovery 264 disk drivers 163 311 diskboot 161 311 316 booting without 483 diskcomp DOS command 62 diskpart DOS command 59 diskroot file 164 disks backing up 405 bitmap 117 410 block allocation verified by chkfsys 418 boot loader 160 corruption avoiding 117 determining if damaged 416 extents 215 files extending 215 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index identifying 405 initializing 408 loader blocks 409 partitions 214 408 patching 419 raw browsing 419 recovery procedures 419 regular maintenance procedure 420 restoring bad blocks in middle of file 422 root blocks 409 structure 407 DISPLAY 97 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol S
160. NFS NFS consists of e aclient that requests that a remote filesystem be grafted onto its local namespace e a server that responds to client requests enabling the clients to access filesystems as NFS mountpoints The procedures used in Neutrino for setting up clients and servers may differ from those used in other implementations To set up clients and servers on a non Neutrino system see the vendor s documentation and examine the initialization scripts to see how the various programs are started on that system It s actually the clients that do the work required to convert the generalized file access that servers provide into a file access method that s useful to applications and users If you want to start an NFS filesystem when you boot your system put the appropriate command in etc host_cfg SHOSTNAME re d re local or etc re d re local For more information see the description of etc re d re sysinit in Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 225 NFS filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd NFS server An NFS server handles requests from NFS clients that want to access filesystems as NFS mountpoints For the server to work you need to start the following programs Name Purpose rpebind Remote procedure call RPC server nfsd NFS server and mountd daemon The rpebind server maps RPC program version numbers into TCP and UDP port numbers Clie
161. NIX type OS or write your own If you don t want to do this you can use the spooling system which provides print drivers for specific families of currently popular printers See spooler in the Utilities Reference and Printing with spooler below The 1pd daemon spawns the filters their standard input is the data to be printed their standard output is the printer Standard error is attached to the 1 file for logging errors or you can use syslogd A filter must return an exit code of 0 if there were no errors 1 if the job should be reprinted or 2 if the job should be thrown away When 1prrm sends a SIGINT signal to the 1pd process that controls the printing 1pd sends a SIGINT signal to all filters and their descendants Filters that need to do cleanup operations such as deleting temporary files can trap this signal The arguments 1pd passes to a filter depend on the filter type e Output of filters are called with the following arguments filter wwidth 1length The width and length values come from the pw and p1 entries in the etc printcap database e Input if filters are called with the following arguments filter c wwidth llength iindent nlogin hhost acct_file Chapter 14 Printing 287 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The optional c flag is used only when control characters are to be passed uninterpreted to the printer when using the 1 option of lpr to print the file T
162. NTMEM 101 PHFONTOPTS 101 PHFONT_USE_EXTERNAL 100 PHGFX 101 phgrafx 77 352 Phindows 90 91 PHINPUT 101 PHINSTANCE 101 phlip 77 254 350 phlocale 59 77 123 127 186 phlogin phlogin2 12 20 32 100 configuration files 125 phmenu 75 PHOTON 101 355 Photon 69 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index applications launching on startup 76 BMP creating 296 colors 76 computers connecting to other 90 configuration files 125 disabling 127 172 draw stream 295 editor ped 146 events 69 executables location of 131 exiting 96 104 file manager 78 fonts 193 graphics settings 77 helpviewer 79 hotkeys 93 loggingin 12 20 logging out 13 multilingual applications 97 105 palette files 135 preferences 72 printing 295 rebooting 14 screensavers 77 server 121 shelf 105 shutting down 14 starting 69 174 applications starting 193 terminal 37 93 troubleshooting 102 web browser 84 window manager 75 configuration files 126 February 1 2005 menu 75 option 76 workspace 69 photon directory 125 131 PHOTONOPTS 101 PHOTON PATH 101 phplay 135 phrelay 91 phrelaycfg 77 phs to 296 font maps 126 PHSHELF_ DISABLE 105 phshutdown 13 14 phuser 24 26 PHWM 101 PHWMEXIT 101 PHWMOPTS 102 physical address space limits 468 console 40 334 memory 120 node IDs 337 physical display 97 pid process ID 3 proc directory 128 procnto 446 pidin 3 57 244 245 268 445
163. NX partition It displays the message Hit Esc for altboot If you let it time out the loader loads the operating system image file from boot if you press Escape the loader gets the image from altboot instead As the loader reads the image it prints a series of periods If an error occurs the loader prints one of the following characters and the boot process halts 160 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd diskboot s No OS signature was found D or An error occurred reading the disk The only difference between the default installed images is that boot uses DMA for accessing the EIDE controller while altboot doesn t You can find the buildfiles for these images in boot build e qnxbasedma build for boot see the Examples appendix e qnxbase build for altboot You can t rename unlink or delete boot and altboot although you can change the contents or copy another file to these files For example these commands don t work mv altboot oldaltboot mv newboot altboot but these do cp altboot oldaltboot cp newboot altboot If you modify your boot image it s a good idea to copy your working image from boot to altboot then put your new image in boot That way if you make a mistake you can press Escape when you next boot and you Il have a working image for recovery diskboot February 1 2005 The
164. ONE PST8PDT The format of the TZ environment variable or CS TIMEZONE string is as follows spaces are for clarity only std offset dst offset rule The expanded format is as follows stdoffset dst offset start time end time where std and dst Three or more letters that you specify to designate the standard or daylight saving time zone Only std is required If you omit dst then daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale Upper and lowercase letters are allowed Any characters except for a leading colon digits comma minus plus and ASCII NUL 0 are allowed Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 187 Setting the time zone 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd offset rule The value you must add to the local time to arrive at Coordinated Universal Time UTC The offset has the form hh mm ss Minutes mm and seconds ss are optional The hour hh is required it may be a single digit The offset following std is required If no offset follows dst summer time is assumed to be one hour ahead of standard time You can use one or more digits the value is always interpreted as a decimal number The hour may be between 0 and 24 the minutes and seconds if present between 0 and 59 If preceded by a the time zone is east of the prime meridian otherwise it s west which may be indicated by an optional preceding Indicates when to change to and ba
165. QNX EUTRINO RTOS V6 3 USER S GUIDE QNX SOFTWARE SYSTEMS QNX Neutrino RTOS User s Guide For release 6 3 or later 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX Software Systems Ltd 175 Terence Matthews Crescent Kanata Ontario K2M 1W8 Canada Voice 1 613 591 0931 Fax 1 613 591 3579 Email info qnx com Web http www qnx com 2004 QNX Software Systems Ltd All rights reserved Publishing history June 2004 First edition Electronic edition published February 2005 Technical support options To obtain technical support for any QNX product visit the Technical Support section in the Services area on our website www qnx com You ll find a wide range of support options including our free web based Developer Support Center QNX Momentics Neutrino and Photon microGUI are registered trademarks of QNX Software Systems Ltd in certain jurisdictions All other trademarks and trade names belong to their respective owners Printed in Canada Part Number 002503 February 1 2005 Contents About This Guide xxi Typographical conventions xxiii What you ll find in this guide xxv Note to Windows users xxvii Assumptions xxvii Getting to Know the OS 1 How QNX Neutrino compares to other OSes 3 UNIX 3 Microsoft Windows 4 Limitations 5 How Neutrino is unique 5 Resource managers 8 Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 9 root or non root 11 Logging in 12 Photon mode 12 Text
166. Schema settings See the documentation for fontadmin for information about setting or changing the default font server schema settings The Asian Font options page shows you the Asian fonts that are installed and lets you pick the font file to use to render them The font files on your system are stored in usr photon font_repository This directory contains the following phf TTF ttf pir fontdesc fontdir Photon Font files These are bitmapped font files Each file contains information for a single size and style of the font TrueType Font files Bitstream TrueDoc PFR Portable Font Resource files containing hinted scalable definitions of fonts Each file may contain multiple fonts and multiple styles This is an older technology supported for legacy reasons Font classifications for example SERIF Directory of known fonts Each entry in this file contains information such as the name and type of the font its size and style a textual description of the font family and the range of characters defined within the font To be available to an application at least one font must be defined in this configuration file Entries in this file are static they can t be loaded dynamically 194 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Customizing Photon fontdynamic A fallback file if font traplist doesn t exist This file specifies fonts that are load
167. Software Systems Ltd home 1ib proc s hdn type number Filesystems on hard disk partitions The home directories of regular users are found here The name of your home directory is often the same as your user name A directory that contains essential shared libraries that programs need in order to run filename so as well as static libraries used during development See also usr 1lib and usr local 1ib The 1ib directory includes 1ib dl11 Contains additional shared libraries that implement OS drivers and services such as drivers filesystem managers and so on For some examples of how shared libraries are used for certain types of drivers and services see Filesystems Native Networking Qnet and TCP IP Networking in the System Architecture guide For details about specific shared objects in the 1ib d11 directory see their respective entries in the Utilities Reference Owned by the process manager procnto this virtual directory can give you information about processes and pathname space configuration The proc directory contains a subdirectory for each process the process ID is used as the name of the directory These directories each contain an entry as that defines the process s address space Various utilities use this entry to get information about a process The proc directory also includes 128 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd
168. Software Systems Ltd xii Contents DVDs 310 Floppy disks 310 Hard disks 311 EIDE 312 SCSI devices 316 SCSI RAID 318 LS 120 318 ORB 318 Zip and Jaz disks 319 Input devices 320 Mice and keyboards 320 Touchscreens 321 Audio cards 322 ISA cards 322 PCI Cards 323 PCCARD and PCMCIA cards 323 USB devices 326 Printers 329 Mice and keyboards 329 Touchscreens 330 Ethernet adapters 330 Mass storage devices 330 Character devices 331 General serial adapters 331 Multiport serial adapters 333 Parallel ports 334 Terminals 334 TO attributes 334 Network adapters 334 Identify your NIC 335 Start the driver 335 Make sure the driver is communicating properly with the hardware 336 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 16 17 February 1 2005 Modems 347 Internal modems 348 PCI based modems 349 External modems 349 Cable Modems ISDN 350 Testing modems 350 Troubleshooting modems 351 Video cards 352 Automatically detecting your card 352 Changing video modes in Photon 352 Manually setting up your video card 353 Setting up multiple displays 354 Troubleshooting your video card 358 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 363 Where should you put the files 365 Running Slinger 366 Dynamic HTML 367 CGI method 367 SSI method 368 Data server method 370 Security precautions 370 Examples 371 Configuration 371 Script 372 Using CVS 375 A crash course in CVS 377 CVS basics 377 Revisions 377 Basic operation
169. Utilities Reference Don t use the re local file to to set up environment variables because there s another shell that starts after this script is run so any environment variable that you set in this file disappears by the time you get a chance to log in After you ve created re local make sure that you set the executable bit on the file with the command chmod x rce local tinit The tinit program initializes the terminal as follows 1 If the p option is specified tinit starts Photon 2 Otherwise tinit looks at etc config ttys and runs login or shells based on the contents of the file For more information including a description of etc config ttys see tinit in the Utilities Reference Troubleshooting Here are some problems you might encounter while customizing how your system starts up The applications I put in re local don t run Check the following e Make sure that the file is executable use the chmod command to correct this if necessary 174 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting chmod x etc re d re local e Make sure that the executable is in a directory that s included in the PATH environment variable as it s defined when the system executes etc re d re local I messed up my re 1local file and now I can t boot You can e Boot from CD and correct your re local file Or e Boot your sy
170. We don t market Neutrino as being either more or less secure than other operating systems in its class That is we don t attempt to gain a security certification such as is required for certain specialized applications However we do conduct internal security audits of vulnerable programs to correct potential exploits For flexibility and familiarity Neutrino uses the generic UNIX security model of user accounts and file permissions which is generally sufficient for all our customers In the embedded space it s fairly easy to lock down a system to any degree without compromising operation The ultrasecure systems that need certifications are generally servers as opposed to embedded devices Chapter 19 e Securing Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Neutrino specific security issues For more information see Managing User Accounts and File ownership and permissions in Working with Files Neutrino specific security issues As the above section notes Neutrino is potentially vulnerable to most of the same threats that other UNIX style systems face In addition there are also some issues that are unique to Neutrino Message passing pdebug February 1 2005 Our basic model of operation relies on message passing between the OS kernel process manager and other services There are potential local exploits in that area that wouldn t exist in a system where all drivers live in the same addre
171. _phoenix c cvs update A Rename the file or move it back and then add it to the repository mv save_phoenix c phoenix c cvs add phoenix c Commit your changes Setting up a CVS server Setting up a CVS server is similar to setting up a local repository see Creating a repository but you also have to the following 1 Make sure that etc services includes a line like this pserver 2401 tcp Make sure that etc inetd con has an entry like this but all on one line pserver stream tcp nowait root usr bin cvs cvs b usr local bin f allow root rcot_dir pserver 390 Chapter 17 e Using CVS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Setting up a CVS server where root_dir is the path that you want to use for your CVS root directory By convention the path should end with CVSRoot but it isn t enforced You can have more than one root directory just add multiple instances of allow root root dir 3 Run the CVS init command evs d root_dir init This creates the root_dir directory and populates it with all the things it needs in there For more information see http www cvshome org February 1 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 391 Chapter 18 Backing Up and Recovering Data In this chapter Introduction 395 Backup strategies 396 Archiving your data 398 Storage choices 403 Remote backups 406 QNX 4 disk structure 407 File maintenance utilities 416 Recovering disks and fi
172. a readily available means of handling dynamic data The downside of CGI is that it s resource heavy because it often involves an interpreted language If you re using the CGI method you need to decide where to locate your cgi bin directory which contains all your CGI scripts To tell the embedded web server that you want to use the CGI method you need to use the HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS environment variable to tell it where to find the CGI scripts and executables For example February 1 2005 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 367 Dynamic HTML 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin If you define HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS anybody can run scripts or processes that reside in that directory on your machine Therefore make sure you create a separate directory for these scripts to reside in Not defining HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS turns CGI functionality off causing all CGI requests to fail A N CAUTION Don t use bin or usr bin as your CGI directory Don t place any sensitive files in the cgi bin directory because doing so exposes them to anyone who uses the web server Make sure that the files in the cgi bin directory can be executable by anybody but modifiable only by root by running chmod 755 on the files in the directory For example suppose HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS contains usxr www cgi bin as the name of the directory If Slinger gets a request for the resource www qnx com cgi bi
173. age use the pkgcet1 utility Spill directory 230 The packages are read only and immutable The intent is to ensure that you can install packages such that there s never a collision between files in the repositories This lets multiple versions of software coexist on any one machine If you try to change a file that the package filesystem manages the file is transferred to the spill directory which contains all local modifications that have been made to used packages This operation is not surprisingly known as spilling and the files that you ve changed are called spilled files If the package filesystem s configuration file doesn t specify a location for the spill directory the package filesystem operates as a read only filesystem The default spill directory is var pkg spill Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Package filesystem As an example of spilling consider the passwd file After installing Neutrino you should choose a password for the root user it initially has no password When the passwd utility opens the passwd file for writing the package filesystem copies the file to the spill directory From this point on the package filesystem forwards all requests to the spill location rather than to the original file location in the package Virtual filesystem Actual filesystem ak pkgs var BE Ea passwd base pkg Ea C anx spill a
174. al or text mode and prompts you for your user ID and password For more details see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide Your system might have been configured so that you don t have to log in at all root or non root When you first install Neutrino the installation process automatically creates a single user account called root This user can do anything on your system it has what Windows calls administrator s privileges UNIX style operating systems call root the superuser Initially the root account doesn t have a password To protect your system you should e Set a secure password for this account as soon as you ve installed the OS e Create a non root account see Managing User Accounts to use for your day to day work to help prevent you from accidentally modifying or deleting system level software You need to log in as root to do some things such as starting drivers performing system administration tasks and profiling applications The default command line prompt indicates which user ID you re using e For root it s a number sign e For other users it s a dollar sign February 1 2005 Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 11 Logging in 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd For information about changing the prompt see kshre in the Examples appendix Logging in Photon mode If you ve configured your system to start Photo
175. al number of frames that have experienced a collision while trying to transmit on the network This can sometimes be high depending on how busy the network is A busy network experiences these types of errors more often than a quiet one Modems You can have any of the following types e Internal ISA Plug and Play or not e PCI based e External e Cable February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 347 Modems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Internal modems ISA non PnP ISA PnP Internal modems can be ISA and are either Plug and Play PnP or not You have to manually set up non PnP ISA devices In order to identify your device you need to have the documentation for the device or be able to contact the device manufacturer to have it identified Currently there is no utility within Neutrino to obtain a list of ISA devices installed on your system Configure the modem to use an I O port and IRQ that don t conflict with anything else in the system The devc ser8250 driver should autodetect the modem and it should appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer There may be more than one entry under the name Assume that the first two entries represent the comm ports of the system Any additional entry is likely the modem If in doubt try all ser entries with qtalk For more information see Testing Modems below Entries will usually appear in this fashion Comml is enabled in
176. alled the Dietician that can help slim down the libraries included in the image For more information see the IDE User s Guide as well as Building Embedded Systems 458 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System February 1 2005 Chapter 21 Understanding System Limits In this chapter The limits on describing limits 461 Configurable limits 461 Filesystem limits 462 Other system limits 468 February 1 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 459 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The limits on describing limits The limits on describing limits Neutrino is a microkernel so many things that might be a core limit in some operating systems become dependent on the particular manager that implements that service under Neutrino especially for filesystems where there are multiple possible filesystems Many resources depend on how much memory is available Other limits depend on your target system For example the virtual address space for a process can vary by processor from 32M on ARM to 3 5G on x86 Some limits are a complex interaction between many things To quote the simple obvious limit is misleading describing all of the interactions can be complicated The key thing to remember while reading this chapter is that there can be many factors behind a limit Configurable limits When your re trying to determine your system s limits you can get the values of configurable limits special read only variables that
177. ally because of incorrect ownership or protection mode of the lock file spooling directory or lpre program lpd error messages The 1pd utility can log many different messages using syslogd Most of these messages are about files that can t be opened and usually imply that the etc printcap file or the protection modes of the files are incorrect Files may also be inaccessible if people bypass the lpr program In addition to messages generated by 1pd any of the filters that lpd spawns may log messages to the syslog file or to the error log file the file specified in the 1 entry in etc printcap If you want to debug problems run syslogd Troubleshooting remote printing problems February 1 2005 If the file you send doesn t print you may get an error message from one of the 1p print utilities see Understanding lpr error messages If you don t get an error message check the following e Although the spawned 1pd program creates spooler subdirectories as required to hold print jobs you must create the main spooling directory yourself make sure this directory default usr spool output 1pd exists e Verify the contents of the etc printcap on each node e Make sure that the etc hosts 1pd on the printing node contains the name of the sending node Chapter 14 e Printing 303 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd e Make sure that io net is running with the appropriate shared objects e Ru
178. ame component You can use spaces but you have to quote them on the command line you also have to quote any wildcard characters that the shell supports For more information see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line Links and inodes 216 File data is stored distinctly from its name and can be referenced by more than one name Each filename called a link points to the actual data of the file itself There are actually two kinds of links hard links which we refer to simply as links and symbolic links which are described in the next section In order to support links for each file the filename is separated from the other information that describes a file The nonfilename Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX 4 filesystem February 1 2005 information is kept in a storage table called an inode for information node If a file has only one link i e one filename the inode information i e the nonfilename information is stored in the directory entry for the file If the file has more than one link the inode is stored as a record in a special file named inodes the file s directory entry points to the inode record home giuseppe File contents File contents l inodes One file referenced by two links Note that you can create a link to a file only if the file and the link are in the same fil
179. and scripts although Neutrino does support a powerful Integrated Development Environment IDE to help you create test and debug software and embedded systems Here are some other differences e QNX Neutrino and DOS use different end of line characters Neutrino uses a linefeed while DOS uses a carriage return and a linefeed If you need to transfer text files from one OS to the other you can use Neutrino s textto utility to convert the files For example to convert the end of line characters to Neutrino style textto 1 my_file To convert the end of line characters to DOS style 4 Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd How Neutrino is unique textto c my file e Neutrino uses a slash instead of a backslash to separate components of a pathname e You can t use DOS commands in Neutrino but many have equivalent commands For more information see Neutrino for MS DOS users in the Using the Command Line chapter of this guide Limitations Although Neutrino is powerful enough to use as a desktop OS we don t provide desktop applications such as word processing spreadsheets or email Some of these applications might be available from other sources such as the third party repository If you re using Neutrino to support self hosted QNX Momentics development you ll likely require an email solution of some sort We suggest you consider using an emai
180. ange and IRQ in the BIOS so that the PCI doesn t use it Have you disabled the comm port in the BIOS if you re using the same I O port and IRQ of a comm port This applies only to internal modems Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 351 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Video cards Our website includes a list of the video cards Neutrino supports see the introduction to this chapter Automatically detecting your card By default the operating system uses the crttrap utility to detect your video card We provide crttrap as a convenience utility in a static hardware environment embedded board you shouldn t need it Ensure you have a graphics modes file or the correct command line in your startup scripts to start your video card Don t run crttrap while you re running Photon The crttrap program queries the card to get all of its possible configurations and creates a file called etc system config graphics modes that you can edit The first line in this file is the one that io graphics uses For information about the different graphics options see ioe graphics in the Utilities Reference In an embedded system you don t need to use crttrap to get the configuration because it isn t likely to change Instead you can call io graphics directly specifying the appropriate options For example io graphics dl devg rage so options Neutrino s default setup starts the graphics driver
181. arate the hosts with commas Wildcards are supported To find out the correct settings see your Internet Service Provider ISP or system administrator Information tab You can specify the following in this part of the configuration dialog Home Page Email Address Email Server Underline links The complete URL of the web page you d like to appear each time you start Voyager Restart Voyager for the new home page to take effect Your email address The IP address of your SMTP server e g news qnx comor10 0 0 100 Enable this if you want the links on web pages to be underlined 88 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Surfing the web with Voyager Display server errors Enable this if you want error messages to be generated by the host server Use Double Buffering Enable this option to use offscreen contexts for image rendering which makes for faster processing and less flicker UserAgent net front server only The UserAgent string Use 256 colors only Enable this if you want to reduce the amount of image cache required to store images while running your monitor in a high color or true color mode Auto Load Images vserver server only Enable this if you want images to be loaded when a page loads Fit into pane net front server only Toggle the NetFront Smart Fit feature This feature renders web content so that it fits into the width of the b
182. are Systems Ltd cat proc qnetstats grep compiled k k k Qnet compiled on Jun 25 2003 at 17 14 27 running on qnet02 or cat proc qnetstats grep e ok e bad txd ok 19415966 txd bad 31 rxd ok 10254788 rxd bad dr 0 rxd bad L4 0 If you need help getting Qnet running our Technical Support department might ask you for this information Is the Qnet version correct Since Neutrino includes two versions of Qnet stacks that are incompatible in regard to packet format a conflict could arise and native networking might not work If this happens make sure that npm qnet so is a symbolic link to the same version of the Qnet protocol stack on both machines For more information see Software components for Qnet networking earlier in this chapter You can also use the ping command ping to verify if all other things such as network cards TCP protocol are working If ping works it s likely that the only problem lies with the versions of Qnet Is the hostname unique Use the hostname command to see the hostname This hostname must be unique for Qnet to work 248 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting Are the nodes in the same domain If the nodes aren t in the same domain you have to specify the domain For example ls net kenneth qnx com February 1 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Trans
183. are similar permissions on files and directories For more information see Managing User Accounts Neutrino follows various industry standards including POSIX shell and utilities and TCP IP This can make porting existing code and scripts to Neutrino easier Neutrino s command line looks just like the UNIX one Neutrino supports many familiar utilities grep find 1s awk and you can connect them with pipes redirect the input and output examine return codes and so on Many utilities are the same in UNIX and Neutrino but some have a different name or syntax in Neutrino UNIX Neutrino See also adduser passwd Managing User Accounts at cron continued Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS 3 How QNX Neutrino compares to other OSes 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd UNIX Neutrino See also fsck chkfsys chkdosfs ifconfig ethO ifconfig en0 lp lpr lpc lpre lpq lpstat lprq lprm cancel lprrm man use Pg less more Backing Up and Recovering Data TCP IP Networking Printing Printing Printing Printing Using the Command Line Using the Command Line For details on each command see the Neutrino Utilities Reference Microsoft Windows QNX Neutrino and Windows have different architectures but the main difference between them from a user s perspective is how you invoke programs Much of what you do via a GUI in Windows you do in Neutrino through command line utilities configuration files
184. arious specialized editors for creating C and C programs buildfiles and so on For more information see the IDE User s Guide You ll find other editors in the third party repository including AbiWord Emacs JED Vim and Workspace Supported editors vi 144 Yov ll find a version of vi on every UNIX style operating system It s actually the Visual Interface to an editor called ex To start vi type vi filename The vi editor has two modes Command mode The keyboard is mapped to a set of command shortcuts used to navigate and edit text vi commands consist of one or more letters but ex commands start with a colon Insert mode Lets you type normally To switch to command mode press Esc to switch to input mode press one of e Iori to insert at the beginning of the current line or before the cursor Chapter 7 e Using Editors February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Supported editors e Aora to append text at the end of the current line or after the cursor e Oor o to open a new line above or below the cursor The two modes can make vi very confusing for a new user by default vi doesn t tell you which mode you re in If you type this when you re in command mode set showmode the editor indicates the current mode in the lower right corner of the display If you always want this option set you can add this command without the colon to the profile for vi HOME
185. ash occurs you can such utilities as fdisk dinit chkfsys and spatch to detect and repair any damage that happened to files that were open for writing at the time of the crash In many cases you can completely restore the filesystem February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 395 Backup strategies 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Sometimes the damage may be more severe For example it s possible that a hard disk will develop a bad block in the middle of a file or worse in the middle of a directory or some other critical block Again the utilities we ve provided can help you determine the extent of such damage You can often rebuild the filesystem in such a way as to avoid the damaged areas In this case some data will be lost but with some effort you can recover a large portion of the affected data Backup strategies Your backup strategy will consist of making one or more backups on a periodic or triggered basis For each backup you incorporate in your strategy you have to choose e the storage media and location of the backup data e how to archive and optionally compress your data e the contents and frequency or trigger condition of the backup e automated versus manual backup e local versus remote control of the backup Often a comprehensive backup strategy incorporates some backups on the local side i e controlled and stored on the same machine that the data is located on and others th
186. at copy data to a remote machine For example you might automatically back up a developer s data to a second hard drive partition on a daily basis and have a central server automatically back up the developer s data to a central location on a weekly basis Choosing backup storage media and location 396 Early in the process of determining your backup strategy you re likely to choose the location of your data backups and the media to store the backups on because these choices are the primary factors that affect the hardware and media costs associated with the system Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Backup strategies To make the best choice first take a close look at what you need to back up and how often you need to do it This information determines the storage capacity transfer bandwidth and the degree to which multiple users can share the resource Your choices of backup media vary depending on whether you create backup copies of your data on a local machine or on a remote machine by transferring the data via a network e Local backups offer the advantage of speed and potentially greater control by the end user but are limited to backup technologies and media types that Neutrino supports directly e Remote backups often allow use of company wide backup facilities and open up additional storage options but are limited by the need to transfer data acros
187. at for creation the inode should be allocated before the name as a crash would result in an allocated inode that isn t referenced by any name an orphaned resource that a filesystem s check procedure can later reclaim If the operations were performed the other way around and a power failure occurred the result would be a name that 450 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystems refers to a stale or invalid inode which is undetectable as an error A similar argument applies in reverse for file deletion For traditional filesystems the only way of ordering these writes is to perform the first one or more generally all but the last one of a multiple block sequence synchronously i e immediately and waiting for I O to complete before continuing A synchronous write is very expensive because it involves a disk head seek interrupts any active sequential disk streaming and blocks the thread until the write has completed potentially milliseconds of dead time Throughput Another key point is the performance of sequential access to a file or raw throughput where a large amount of data is written to a file or an entire file is read The filesystem itself can detect this type of sequential access and attempt to optimize the use of the disk by doing e read ahead on reads so that the disk is being accessed for the predicted new data while the user processes
188. at this guide describes depending on what software you ve installed For example some utilities are included in the QNX Momentics development suite and others are included in a specific Board Support Package BSP The following table may help you find information quickly To find out about Go to How Neutrino compares to other Getting to Know the OS operating systems February 1 2005 continued About This Guide XXV What you ll find in this guide 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd To find out about Go to Starting and ending a session and turning off a Neutrino system Adding users to the system managing passwords etc The basics of using the keyboard command line and shell command interpreter Using Neutrino s graphical user interface Files directories and permissions How to edit files Configuring what your machine does when it boots Customizing your shell setting the time etc Creating your own commands The filesystems that Neutrino supports Accessing other machines with Neutrino s native networking Setting up TCP IP Adding printers to your system and using them Adding USB devices terminals video cards and other hardware to your system Adding embedded HTTP services and dynamic content to embedded web applications XXVi About This Guide Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down Managing User Accounts Using the Command Line Using t
189. ath sysconft Get the value of a limit for the entire system setrlimit Change the value of certain limits For example you can use this function to limit the number of files that a process can open this limit also depends on the value of the F option to procnto Filesystem limits 462 Under Neutrino filesystems aren t part of the kernel or core operating system they re provided by separately loadable processes or libraries This means that e There s no one set limit or rule for filesystems under Neutrino the limits depend on the filesystem in question and on the process that provides access to that filesystem e You can provide your own filesystem process or layer that can almost transparently override or change many of the underlying values The sections that follow give the limits for the supported filesystems Note the following Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystem limits e Lengths for filenames and pathnames are in bytes not characters e Many of the filesystems that Neutrino supports use a 32 bit format This means that files are limited to 2G 1 bytes This in turn limits the size of a directory because the file that stores the directory s information is limited to 2G 1 bytes Querying filesystem limits You can query the path specific configuration limits to determine some of the properties and limits of a specific
190. ation for the chip you re using These limits apply to each process e Number of threads 32767 e Number of channels 32767 e Number of timers 32767 e Priorities 0 through 255 Priority 0 is used for the idle thread by default priorities of 64 and greater are privileged so only processes with an effective user ID of 0 i e root can use them Non root processes can use priorities from 1 through 63 You can change the range of privileged priorities with the P option for procnto 468 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Other system limits File descriptors The total number of file descriptors has a hard limit of 32767 per process but you re more likely to be constrained by the F option to procnto or the RLIMIT_NOFILE system resource The default value is 1000 the minimum is 100 Sockets named semaphores message queues channel IDs chids and connection IDs coids all use file descriptors To determine the current limit use the ksh builtin command ulimit see the Utilities Reference or call getrlimit see the Library Reference Synchronization primitives There are no limits on the number of mutexes and condition variables condvars There s no limit on the number of unnamed semaphores but the number of named semaphores is limited by the number of available file descriptors see File descriptors above TCP IP limits
191. ation from the server ISP Starting a point to point connection over PPPoE session The pppoed daemon needs pppd to establish TCP IP point to point links When starting pppd there are a few pppd options that are specific to running pppd over a pppoe session Here s an example of etc ppp pppoe up bin sh pppd debug dev io net ppp_en ac pc detach defaultroute require ns mtu 1492 name username The required pppd options for use with pppoed are dev io net ppp_en The device that you want npm pppoe so to create ac pc Required options that disable any packet compression February 1 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 265 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd detach Prevent pppd from becoming a daemon This lets pppoed know when the pppd session is finished You can omit this option if you specify the pppoed option scriptdetach mtu 1492 Set the interface MTU to the supported size for PPPOE This is the Ethernet MTU minus the overhead of PPPOE encapsulation If pppoed has problems connecting to certain sites on the Internet see PPPOE and Path MTU Discovery in the Neutrino technotes Using DHCP A TCP IP host uses the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol to obtain its configuration parameters IP address gateway nameservers and so on from a DHCP server that contains the configuration parameters of all the hosts on the network The Neutrino DHCP
192. ble below describes how the character device drivers interpret various keys and keychords groups of keys that you press simultaneously The drivers handle these keys as soon as you type them Your keyboard might not behave as indicated if e The driver is in raw input mode instead of edited input mode e You re working with an application that has complex requirements for user interaction e g the application might take control over how the keyboard works or e You re working at a terminal that has keyboard limitations If you want to Press Move the cursor to the left lt left arrow Move the cursor to the right right arrow Move the cursor to the start of a line Home continued Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 39 Character device drivers 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd If you want to Press Move the cursor to the end of a line End Delete the character left of the cursor Backspace Delete the character at the cursor Del Delete all characters on a line Ctrl U Toggle between insert and typeover Ins modes if an application supports them Submit a line of input or start a new Enter line Recall a command see below Suspend the displaying of output Resume the displaying of output Attempt to kill a process Indicate end of input EOF Clear the terminal T or 4 up or down arrow Ctrl S Ctrl Q Ctrl C or Ctrl Break Ctrl D Ctrl L When you use the up
193. bruary 1 2005 filename Executable status is a file permission See chmod Run the uname utility uname p continued Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 63 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd DOS Local Neutrino equivalent SPROCESSOR_IDENTIFIERS SPROMPTS SRANDOMS SSYSTEMDRIVES SSYSTEMROOT STEMP STMP STIMES SUSERNAMES Troubleshooting Run the sin utility sin info PS1 PS2 see Parameters in the documentation for ksh and kshre in the Examples appendix RANDOM Neutrino doesn t use drive letters the system root is always The system root is always TMPDIR TMPDIR Run the date utility date LOGNAME Here are some common problems you might encounter while working on the command line Why can t I run my program called test The shell has a builtin command called test When the shell parses the command line it matches any builtin commands before it looks for executable files You have two choices rename your program or specify the path to it e g test Why do I get a not found message when I try to run my program The program is likely in a directory that isn t listed in your 64 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting PATH In particular your current directory isn t in your PATH for security reasons Either add the executable s dire
194. bugging a driver e A faulty driver isn t likely to crash the OS 6 Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd How Neutrino is unique February 1 2005 e You can usually stop and restart a driver without rebooting the system Developers can usually eliminate interrupt handlers typically the most tricky code of all by moving the hardware manipulation code up to the application thread level with all the debugging advantages and freedom from restrictions that that implies This gives Neutrino an enormous advantage over monolithic systems Likewise in installations in the field the modularity of Neutrino s components allows for the kind of redundant coverage expressed in our simple yet very effective High Availability HA manager making it much easier to construct extremely robust designs than is possible with a more fused approach People seem naturally attracted to the ease with which functioning devices can be planted in the POSIX pathname space as well Developers system administrators and users also appreciate Neutrino s adherence to POSIX the realtime responsiveness that comes from our devotion to short nonpreemptible code paths and the general robustness of our microkernel Neutrino s microkernel architecture lets developers scale the code down to fit in a very constrained embedded system but Neutrino is powerful enough to use as a desktop OS Neutrino runs on
195. buildfile for the default boot image qnxbasedma build includes these lines script startup script To save memory make everyone use the libc in the boot image For speed less symbolic lookups we point to libc so 2 instead of libc so Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 161 diskboot 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 2 usr lib ldqnx so 2 Default user programs to priority 10 other scheduler pri 100 Tell diskboot this is a hard disk boot b1 Tell diskboot to use DMA on IDE drives D1 Start 4 text consoles buy passing n4 to devc con o By adding e Linux ext2 filesystem will be mounted as well pri 100 PATH proc boot diskboot b1 D1 odevc con n4 This script starts the system by running diskboot a program that s used on disk based systems to boot Neutrino For the entire qnxbasedma build file see the Examples appendix e You can pass options to diskboot to control how the system boots and even to device drivers In this buildfile diskboot passes the n4 option to deve con to set the number of virtual consoles e You can set up your machine to not use diskboot For a sample buildfile see the Examples appendix When diskboot starts it prompts Press the space bar to input boot options Most of these options are for debugging purposes The diskboot program looks for a Neutrino partition to mount then runs a
196. c passwd The user ID and group ID determine the permission the process has to access files and system resources In addition if the process creates any files and directories they belong to that user and group Each new process that you start inherits your user ID and group ID from its parent process For more information about file permissions see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files For more information on characteristics that programs inherit from their parent programs see spawn in the Neutrino Library Reference For more information on sessions and process groups see EEE Std 1003 1 2001 Standard for Information Technology Portable Operating System Interface February 1 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 19 Account database 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The text mode login login handles a user s login shell differently from the graphical login phlogin2 or phlogin e When you log in via the login utility login changes directory to your HOME directory it also sets LOGNAME to your user name and SHELL to the login shell named in your account It then starts the login shell which is typically a command interpreter bin sh but could also be an application that gets launched as soon as you log in e When you log in via Photon s phlogin2 or phlogin the utility also changes to your HOME directory and sets your LOGNAME and SHELL environment variables according to your user name a
197. cess as it s received in edited input mode the application process receives characters only after a whole line has been entered usually signalled by a carriage return Terminal support Some programs such as vi need to know just what your terminal can do so that they can move the cursor clear the screen and so on The TERM environment variable indicates the type of terminal that you re using and the usr 1ib terminfo directory is the terminal database In this directory you can find subdirectories a through z that contain the information for specific terminals Some applications use etc termcap the older single file database model instead of usr 1lib terminfo The default terminal is qansi m the QNX version of an ANSI terminal For more information about setting the terminal type see Terminal types in Configuring Your Environment 38 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Character device drivers Telnet If you re using telnet to communicate between two QNX machines QNX 4 or Neutrino use the 8 option to enable an eight bit data path If you re connecting to a Neutrino box from some other operating system and the terminal isn t behaving properly quit from telnet and start it again with the 8 option To telnet from Windows to a Neutrino machine use ansi or vt100 for your terminal type The keyboard at a glance February 1 2005 The ta
198. cess files etc until you next log in The root user user ID 0 has permission to do nearly anything to files regardless of their ownership and permission settings For more information see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files 18 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What does a user account do When the shell interprets a username pathname it gets the user s home directory from etc passwd If you remove or change a user s account any shell running in the system that had previously accessed that user s home directory via username may be using the old home directory information to determine the actual path because the shell caches the data New shells read the data afresh from etc passwd This may be a problem if a shell script that uses username invokes another shell script that also uses this feature the two scripts would operate on different paths if the home directory information associated with the user name has changed since the first shell looked the information up What happens when you log in You typically start a session on the computer by logging in see Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down the configuration of your account determines what happens then When you log in the system creates a user session led by a process that runs under your user ID and default group ID as determined from your account entry in et
199. ck from summer time The rule has the form date time date time where the first date describes when the change from standard to summer time occurs and the second date describes when the change back happens Each time field describes when in current local time the change to the other time is made The format of date may be one of the following Jn The Julian day n 1 lt n lt 365 Leap days aren t counted That is in all years including leap years February 28 is day 59 and March 1 is day 60 It s impossible to refer explicitly to the occasional February 29 n The zero based Julian day 0 lt n lt 365 Leap years are counted it s possible to refer to February 29 188 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Setting the time zone Mm n d The dth day 0 lt d lt 6 of week n of month m of the year 1 lt n lt 5 1 lt m lt 12 where week 5 means the last d day in month m which may occur in the fourth or fifth week Week 1 is the first week in which the dth day occurs Day zero is Sunday The time has the same format as offset except that no leading sign or is allowed The default if time is omitted is 02 00 00 People frequently ask us for a complete list of time zones but maintaining such a list is outside our mandate of developing a realtime operating system Time zones are defined by local laws
200. ck return icmp host unr in proto tcp from any to 10 9 0 1 port 25 group 100 block return rst in proto tcp from any to 10 9 0 1 port 23 group 100 First line create a group head If a packet matched a group head rule the packet will only go through that group and skip other groups we set a group say we are interesting any packets coming in on enl interface The second line is saying if there is a TCP packet coming in through enl try to reach 10 9 0 1 port 25 smtp we block the packet and send a ICMP error HOST UNREACHABLE back The third line is almost the same as second except we are interesting in port 23 telnet and we will send a TCP RESET packet back Se te Se Se OSE OE HHH block in on en0 all head 200 pass in quick proto tcp from any to 10 9 0 1 port 8823 keep state group 200 block in log proto tcp udp from any to 10 9 0 1 32 port 20000 lt gt 40000 group 200 block in log body proto tcp from any to 10 9 0 1 32 flags S SA group 200 This is another set of rules rule group 200 Any packet coming in from en0 our external interface will fall in this group The pass line is opened a secret port 8823 let who ever try to contact this port pass through So you could run a telnetd on that port and just let your trust people know that port The keyword quick make any packet matched this rule being proceed pass as of test against further rules The third line is to block any tcp udp packet who hav
201. client dhep client obtains these parameters and configures your host for you to use the Internet or local network If your DHCP server supplies options configuration parameters that dhcp client doesn t know how to apply dhcp client passes them to a script that it executes You can use this script to apply any options you want to use outside of those that dhcp client sets for you For more information see the entry for dhcp client in the Utilities Reference Using AutolP 266 AutoIP is a module that you must mount into io net It is used for quick configuration of hosts on a small network AutoIP assigns a link local IP address from the 169 254 16 network to its interface if no other host is using this address The advantage of using AutoIP is that you don t need a central configuration server The hosts negotiate Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Using the SRI SNMP suite for Neutrino among themselves which IP addresses are free to use and monitor for conflicts It s common to have a host employ both DHCP and AutoIP at the same time When the host is first connected to the network it doesn t know if a DHCP server is present or not If you start dhcp client with the a option apply IP address as an alias then both a link local IP address and DHCP IP address can be assigned to your interface at the same time If the DHCP server isn t present dhep client times out
202. cludes the date of the change the name of the user who made the change and a log message that describes the change You can retrieve arbitrary revisions of a file for inspection at any time You can use symbolic names called tags to mark a particular revision for easy reference Chapter 17 e Using CVS 377 CVS basics 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd A revision is denoted by a sequence of numbers and dots It s analogous to the standard numbering scheme used for versions of software For example a file called foo c might have had three changes over the last few days The first revision would be numbered 1 1 the second would be 1 2 and the third 1 3 CVS automatically assigns the numbers and uses them internally You ll have to use these numbers on many occasions The changes in foo c are cumulative so revision 1 3 contains all the changes made between 1 1 and 1 2 as well as the changes made between 1 2 and 1 3 Basic operations How does CVS know when a file has changed Does it create a new revision every time you save a file You don t actually manipulate files directly in the repository Instead you create a copy of the repository on your hard disk You make any changes there and when you re satisfied with the changes you tell CVS to put those changes into the repository and create a new revision This process is called checking in The check in is the point at which you enter the reason for the change made H
203. covering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Storage choices Removable media Other forms of removable media are also useful for backing up data Neutrino supports LS 120 magnetic optical MO drives internal ZIP drives and USB mass storage devices Each has its own benefits and weaknesses it s up to you to determine which form of media is best for backing up your data For instructions on how to install this hardware see the Connecting Hardware chapter in this guide Backing up physical hard disks Ee A February 1 2005 The instructions here are for copying from one hard disk to another of identical properties size make model To make a copy of a drive that differs in size and make contact technical support for the QNX_Drive_Copy utility You can make identical images of hard drives under Neutrino using simple utilities This is called making a raw copy of the drive If you have an identical hard drive manufacturer size model number you can simply attach the drive to the system Make sure you know which position the drive is set up as e g EIDE Primary Slave Once you ve attached the drive boot the Neutrino system The system should automatically detect the hard drive and create an entry in the dev directory for it The new entry should appear as dev hd1 if there are only two drives in the system If there are more than two then the drive could be hd1 hd2 and so on In thi
204. cribes the available printers and how to communicate with them and it specifies the values for important items e g the spooling directory 1pd printer daemon The 1pd program which you typically invoke at boot time from the etc re d re local file see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter acts as a master server for coordinating and controlling the spooling queues configured in the etc printcap file When it starts lpd makes a single pass through the etc printcap database restarting any printers that have jobs In normal operation lpd listens for service requests on a socket within the Internet domain under the printer service specification for requests for printer access The daemon spawns a copy of itself to process the request the master daemon continues to listen for new requests The daemons use simple text files as lock files for synchronization the parent daemon uses usr spool output 1pd lock while its children use a lock file in the printer s spool directory as specified in the printcap file Clients communicate with 1pd using a simple transaction oriented protocol Authentication of remote clients is done based on the privileged port scheme employed by rshd See Access control below lpr start a print job 278 The lpr command lets you put a print job in a local queue and notifies the local Lpd daemon that new jobs are waiting in the spooling area The daemon either schedule
205. ctory to your PATH or specify the path to the command e g my_program For more information see Utilities earlier in this chapter Why does root have access to different commands The root user has a different PATH setting that includes such directories as sbin and usr sbin These directories contain executables and managers that typically only root can use If you aren t logged in as root you can still run some of the utilities in sbin if you have the right permission but you ll have to specify the full path e g sbin logger or add the directory to your PATH When I list a directory I don t see files that start with a dot Files whose names start with a dot are called hidden files To list them use the a option to 1s Why am I getting a No such file or directory message The shell can t find the file or directory that you specified Here are some things to check e Have you typed the name correctly In Neutrino the names of files and directories are case sensitive e Does the name contain spaces or other special characters If you have a file called my file and you don t escape the meaning of the space the shell uses the space when breaking the command line into tokens so the command looks for one file called my and another called file Use quoting to escape the meaning of the special characters e g less my file or less my file For information about the other characters that y
206. cumentation set if you don t have the entire set installed on your system you ll naturally get some bad link errors e g File not found February 1 2005 About This Guide XXVii Assumptions 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Disable PnP aware OS in the BIOS xxviii About This Guide February 1 2005 Chapter 1 Getting to Know the OS In this chapter How QNX Neutrino compares to other OSes 3 How Neutrino is unique 5 February 1 2005 Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS 1 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd How QNX Neutrino compares to other OSes How QNX Neutrino compares to other OSes UNIX February 1 2005 This section describes how the QNX Neutrino RTOS compares to UNIX and Microsoft Windows from a user s not a developer s perspective For more details about Neutrino s design and the philosophy behind it see the System Architecture guide If you re familiar with UNIX style operating systems you ll feel right at home with QNX Neutrino many people even pronounce QNX to rhyme with UNIX some spell it out Q N X At the heart of the system is the Neutrino microkernel surrounded by other processes and the familiar Korn shell ksh see the Using the Command Line chapter Each process has its own process ID or pid and contains one or more threads Neutrino is a multiuser OS it supports any number of users at a time The users are organized into groups that sh
207. current directory there CVS uses the last two arguments vendor and init to create a branch see Concurrent development branching and merging later in this chapter and a tag for the imported files They aren t applicable if you re importing your own software but CVS requires them anyway Getting information on files You can see the status of the file by using the status or stat command cvs status foo c This gives output similar to the following File foo c Status Up to date Working revision 1 1 Tue Jun 3 17 14 55 2003 Repository revision 1 1 home fred cvs myproj foo c v Sticky Tag none Sticky Date none Sticky Options none February 1 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 383 CVS basics 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Changing files When we created foo c we didn t put any comments in We should probably fix that Using your favorite editor add the following line to the top of foo c This is a file to test cvs Now look at the status File foo c Status Locally Modified Working revision 1 1 Tue Jun 3 17 14 55 2003 Repository revision 1 1 home fred cvs myproj foo c v Sticky Tag none Sticky Date none Sticky Options none The status has changed to Locally Modified This is your signal that you ve made changes but have yet to tell CVS about them Let s do that now cvs commit foo c As before an editor appears asking for a log message This is a little diffe
208. cvs ci foo c When you do this CVS starts an editor to let you enter a description of the file Type in something meaningful such as A file to test the basic functionality of CVS This is completely free form so you can add whatever message you like When you re finished save and exit CVS then tells you the file is committed Importing an existing source tree It s probably easy to see that adding an existing source tree to CVS using the sequence of add and commit commands outlined above is tedious for more than a couple of files In these cases we ll use the import command We ll cover the most basic use of this command in this section Later on we ll look at some more advanced things that you can do with it 382 Chapter 17 e Using CVS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CVS basics The import command assumes you have a directory tree somewhere on your disk It must not be in either your repository or your local copy of the repository To add the entire tree to your CVS repository use the following format cd source_to_add evs drepository_path import path_in_repository vendor init and provide a comment when the editor appears This may seem a little odd at first but the import command has other uses than simply importing It always imports the contents of the current working directory The path_in_repository tells CVS to create this path within the repository and to put the contents of the
209. d 744 myscript myscript In this instance your shell automatically invokes a new shell to execute the shell script Example of a Korn shell script February 1 2005 As a quick tutorial in the Korn shell let s look at a script that searches C source and header files in the current directory tree for a string passed on the command line bin sh tfind script to look for strings in various files and dump to less case in 1 find name ch xargs grep 1 less exit 0 good status esac echo Use tfind stuff_to_find X echo where stuff_to_find search string T echo echo e g tfind console_state looks through all files in uw echo the current directory and below and displays all Chapter 10 Writing Shell Scripts 203 Example of a Korn shell script 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 204 echo instances of console_state exit 1 bad status The first line bin sh starts with a which indicates a comment so the line is ignored by the shell processing this script Yet many if not most shell scripts start with a line like this The initial pair of characters aren t important to the shell but the loader code in proento recognizes them as an instruction to load the following executable bin sh and pass it this script as a command line parameter The next few lines are comments that describe what the script does Then we see case S in 1 esac Th
210. d it ll give you details on the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID Either find the information on the manufacturer s website or use the vendor ID and device ID to cross reference it with this online site http www pcidatabase com With the information you get from that site you can visit the QNX supported hardware site see the introduction to this chapter In the Network section locate your chipset and its associated driver Start the driver Once you ve located the correct driver for your hardware use io net to start the driver You can either start the driver as an option to io net or you can mount the driver into an already running copy of io net For example to start io net with the devn e1900 so 3Com 905 module type io net d e1900 t tcpip amp To mount the module type io net t tcpip amp mount T io net devn el900 so February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 335 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The driver automatically detects similar network adapters for multiple networks You can use the mount utility to mount different adapters Make sure the driver is communicating properly with the hardware Use the nicinfo utility to check if you re receiving and sending packets If you aren t receiving packets on a high traffic network the driver and the hardware might not be communicating Here s some typical output from this command Physical Node ID
211. d when you initialize the filesystem with the dinit utility 408 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX 4 disk structure Loader block Root block The first physical block of a disk partition is the loader block It contains the bootstrap code that the BIOS loads and then executes to load an OS from the partition If a disk hasn t been partitioned e g it s a floppy this block is the first physical block on the disk The root block is the second block of a QNX 4 partition It s structured as a standard directory and contains a label field and the inode information for these special files e the root directory of the filesystem usually e inodes e boot e altboot The files boot and altboot contain images of the operating system that can be loaded by the QNX bootstrap loader Normally the QNX loader loads the OS image stored in the boot file But if the altboot file isn t empty you can load the image stored in it For more information see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter Bitmap blocks February 1 2005 Several consecutive blocks follow the root block The bitmap blocks form the bitmap for the QNX 4 partition One bit exists for each block on the partition thus one bitmap block is used for every 4096 disk blocks corresponding to 2M of disk space If the value of a bit is zero the corresponding block is unused Unused
212. daries Since the embedded web server supports SSI we ve extended this support by adding the ability to talk to the data server Now you can have a process updating the data server about the state of a hardware device while the embedded web server accesses that state in a decoupled but reliable manner For more information about the data server process and an example device monitoring application see the documentation for ds in the Utilities Reference Security precautions When you choose the directory for your data files we recommend that you e Don t place any sensitive files in the document directory 370 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Examples e Isolate your data files directory from the system files directory For example usr www is much safer than the root directory The root directory opens up your whole system to be served by Slinger If you configure Slinger to support CGI e Place the CGI scripts in a directory isolated from your normal system binaries Don t use bin or usr bin as your CGI directory e Avoid setting your CGI script file permissions to set user ID when executing when the file is owned by a privileged user for example root e Keep your CGI scripts and documents in separate directories This prevents people from accessing your scripts Don t expose your machine to undue risk Make sure that e The per
213. date del dir erase diskcomp diskpart 60 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line ls 1 chmod and 1s a Shell scripts see Writing Shell Scripts in this guide or the docs for ksh ls 1 ksh script If the script begins with bin sh you can invoke it like a regular program e g script without prefixing it with sh or ksh ed builtin ksh command For QNX 4 Neutrino disk filesystems use chkf sys for DOS FAT filesystems use chkdosfs clear ksh ksh cmp or diff cp OF pax date and rtc Note that you must use rtc to set the hardware clock to the new date and time rm 1s rm See below fdisk command continued February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Neutrino for MS DOS users DOS command Neutrino command s driverquery fc find findstr format ftype getmac help logman lpq lpr md mode move msiexec path print query rem rename replace February 1 2005 See Troubleshooting in Working with Filesystems cmp or diff as appropriate grep i grep fdformat and dinit File type associations are a property of the Photon File Manager pfm See Browsing files with the File Manager in Using the Photon microGUI See ifconfig netstat also 1s dev io net use tracelogger lprq lpr mkdir stty mv qnxinstall echo PATH export PATH new path see Utilities in this chapter or the docs for ksh lpr sin pidin
214. e Desktop Menu which lets you easily run frequently used applications configure Photon or shut down You can customize this menu see below Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Overview of Photon February 1 2005 Desktop Menu Terminal Voyager Media Player Installer Help Configure Shutdown Desktop menu The taskbar is the area at the very bottom of the screen It includes by default the Launch button the date and time and icons for applications that are currently running From the taskbar you can e Click on an application icon on the taskbar to hide or show the application e Click the Launch button to launch an application get help or shut down the Photon session The shelf runs up the right side of your screen and lets you easily launch frequently used applications and utilities configure your system view system resource usage and switch consoles From the shelf you can e Toggle the appearance of shelf components by clicking on the component category An expanded component category appears with a next to it while a collapsed category appears with a e Launch an application utility or configuration utility by clicking on its icon Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 71 Settings and preferences 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd e Change the current console by clicking on a console in the World View You
215. e File Manager 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Browsing files with the File Manager Photon comes with a file manager pfm that lets you browse directories and files using a graphical interface To open the Photon File Manager click File Manager in the Applications group on the shelf or type pfm amp on the command line File Edit Go Bookmarks Help S e Bla S w amp Up Refresh Home Cut Copy Paste New Print Add Bookmarks Bookmarks Filename Size Date Owner Group Permissio Link B p The_Official_Lex 554 223 01 08 2004 04 root root rw rw r Bevs 4 096 01 08 2004 02 root root rx wX F X F small_coeffs h 01 08 2004 04 root root rw rw r snapl ipg 75 886 01 15 2004 111 root root rw rW r status txt 110 01 08 2004 04 root root rw rw r MF wnorm dat 01 08 2004 04 root root TW PW fen workspace 01 08 2004 02 root root rwx rwx F X Q 7 items 623 5KB Photon File Manager The Photon File manager represents files and folders graphically Double click on a folder to open it and display its contents Double click on a file to open it in an associated application if an association exists The File Manager also supports drag and drop operations for example you can drag a file to a folder to move it there You can right click on a file or folder to view a shortcut menu which contains a subset of the commands that are
216. e Helpviewer starts then searches the table of contents for any topics that contain the selected text The first matching topic is automatically displayed February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 81 Getting help with the Helpviewer 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You can also simply type something in a pterm window and then press Ctrl Alt H Most QNX documents include a keyword index that can also help you find what you re looking for In the online docs click on the keyword index button that you ll find at the top and bottom of each file Index Bookmarking a topic to view it again later If you find a topic that you want to view again later you can bookmark it This saves a quick link to that topic in the bookmarks list To bookmark your current topic select Bookmarks Add Bookmarks To view the list click the Bookmarks toolbar button Click an item in the list to view the topic Bookmarks also appear in the Bookmark menu You can remove bookmarks by viewing the bookmarked topic and then selecting Bookmarks Remove Bookmark Navigating around help files Helpviewer provides the following ways to navigate through the documentation Task Menu command Shortcut Go to the topmost help topic home File gt Home Ctrl H topic in the help set Go to the previously viewed topic File Back Alt continued 82 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1
217. e Microsoft Windows which represents drives as letters that precede pathnames e g C Neutrino represents disk drives as regular directories within the pathname space Directories that access another filesystem such as one on a second hard disk partition are called mountpoints Usually the primary disk based filesystem is mounted at the root of the pathname space A full Neutrino installation such as a self hosted QNX Momentics development installation mounts all additional disk filesystems automatically under the s directory For example A a E C cdo hd0 qnx4 2 February 1 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 113 Filenames and pathnames 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd So while in a DOS based system a second partition on your hard drive might be accessed as D in a Neutrino system you might access the second QNX 4 filesystem partition on the first hard drive as f s hd0 qnx4 2 For more information on where to find things in a typical Neutrino pathname space see Where everything is stored later in this chapter To learn more about mounting filesystems see Working with Filesystems and Controlling How Neutrino Starts Pathnames that begin with a dot When you list the contents of a directory the 1s utility usually hides files and directories whose names begin with a period Programs precede configuration files and directories with a period to hide them from view The files not surprisingly
218. e Systems Ltd Removing and restoring files the conflicting lines in place but marks them with rows of greater than equals and less than signs You should edit the file to correct the discrepancies and then check the corrected version into CVS Removing and restoring files February 1 2005 When you remove a file from the repository CVS puts it into the attic Each directory in the repository has a subdirectory called Attic You can t check the Attic out into your sandbox but you can examine its contents through a web interface to CVS To delete a file say phoenix c 1 Remove the file from your sandbox rm phoenix c 2 Remove the file from the repository cvs remove phoenix c or cvs rm phoenix c 3 Commit your changes If you later need to restore the file 1 Determine the last revision number for the file cvs log phoenix c less 2 Go to the base directory for your sandbox e g evs and get the file specifying the last version number minus one For example if the deleted version of phoenix c was 1 4 you need to get version 1 3 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 389 Setting up a CVS server 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 5 evs checkout r 1 3 my_project phoenix c or cvs get r 1 3 my_project phoenix c The r option sets a sticky tag Go back to the directory where you want the file to go and rename the file or move it out of the way then clear the sticky tag mv phoenix c save
219. e Using the Command Line chapter in this guide e the entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference e Rosenblatt Bill and Arnold Robbins 2002 Learning the Korn Shell 2nd Edition Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 0 596 00195 9 Neutrino also supplies or uses some other scripting environments e An OS buildfile has a script file section tagged by script The mkifs parses this script but it s executed by procnto at boot time It provides a very simple scripting environment with the ability to run a series of commands and a small amount of synchronization Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts 201 Available shells 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The embedded shell esh provides a scripting environment for running simple scripts in an embedded environment where the overhead of the full ksh might be too much It supports the execution of utilities simple redirection filename expansion aliases and environment manipulation The fat embedded shell fesh provides the same limited environment as esh but supplies additional builtin commands for commonly used utilities to reduce the overhead of including them in an embedded system The fesh shell includes builtins for cp df 1s mkdir rm and rmdir although in most cases the builtin provides only the core functionality of the utility and isn t a complete replacement for it sed is a stream editor which makes it most useful for performing repeated changes t
220. e a port not in range 20000 40000 our port mapping range That means we don t have any services on the gateway except using these port to do NAT and except the service we run on secret 8823 Also we log any blocked packet info into our internal log buffer so you could use ipmon oI to check it later This rule blocks most port scanning utils The forth line says if a TCP packet is coming in and it has the SYN flag set but ACK not set this is a regular TCP handshake packet We block it and log body means log the whole packet so we could use ipmon to examine it later Se Se Se Oe OE OE OOOH H H H H HHHH 494 Appendix A e Examples February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Configuration files for setting up a firewall ipnat conft Here s a sample configuration file for Network Address Translation NAT which you ll find in etc ipnat conf Copyright 2001 QNX Software Systems Ltd All Rights Reserved This source code has been published by QNX Software Systems Ltd QSSL However any use reproduction modification distribution or transfer of this software or any software which includes or is based upon any of this code is only permitted under the terms of the NX Open Community License version 1 0 see licensing qnx com for details or as otherwise expressly authorized by a written license agreement from QSSL For more information please email licensing qnx com NAT rules the sa
221. e account database by removing etc pwlock 5 If necessary remove or change ownership of system resources that the user owned 6 If necessary remove or alter references to the user in email systems TCP IP access control files applications and so on Instead of removing a user you can disable the account by using the passwd utility to change the account s password In this way you can tell which system resources the former user owned since the user D to name translation still works When you do this the passwd utility automatically handles the necessary locking and unlocking of the account database If you ever need to log into that account you can either use the su switch user utility to switch to that account from root or log in to the account If you forget the password for the account remember that the root user can always change it What should you do with any resources that a former user owned Here are some of your options e If you ve retained the user account in the account database but disabled it by changing the password or the login shell you can leave the files as they are February 1 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 29 Managing other accounts 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd e You can assign the files to another user find user user_name_or_ID chown new username e You can archive the files and optionally move them to other media find user user_name_or_ID pax wf a
222. e case inis a shell builtin command one of the branching structures provided by the Korn shell and is equivalent to the C switch statement The is a shell variable When you refer to a variable in a shell put a before its name to tell the shell that it s a variable rather than a literal string The shell variable is a special variable that represents the number of command line arguments to the script The 1 is a possible value for the case the equivalent of the C case statement This code checks to see if you ve passed exactly one parameter to the shell The esac line completes and ends the case statement Both the if and case commands use the command s name reversed to represent the end of the branching structure Inside the case we find find name ch xargs grep 1 less This line does the bulk of the work and breaks down into these pieces Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Example of a Korn shell script February 1 2005 e find name ch e xargs grep 1 e less which are joined by the or pipe character A pipe is one of the most powerful things in the shell it takes the output of the program on the left and makes it the input of the program to its right The pipe lets you build complex operations from simpler building blocks For more information see Redirecting input and output in Using the Command Line Th
223. e consider more efficient than the standard QWERTY one If we don t supply the mapping you need you can use the mkkbd utility to create your own Some keyboard layouts e g for the French and German languages use accent keys which by themselves don t generate a character Neutrino treats these keys as dead keys Pressing a dead key followed by a second key modifies the second key creating an accented character For example to create a U character if you re using the French keyboard layout press Shift followed by Shift U You can also generate composed characters by pressing and releasing Alt followed by two keys or keychords For example if you re using the US English layout you can press and release Alt followed by Shift and then Shift U to get a U character Neutrino for MS DOS users If you re familiar with Microsoft Windows you might need to know about the Neutrino equivalents for the basic DOS commands and variables DOS commands and their Neutrino equivalents The following table lists the Neutrino equivalents of some common MS DOS commands For more information about the Neutrino commands see the Utilities Reference February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 59 Neutrino for MS DOS users 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd DOS command Neutrino command s attrib Batch files cacls call script chdir chkdsk cls cmd command comp copy
224. e first piece find name ch uses another powerful and commonly used command Most filesystems are recursive through a hierarchy of directories and find is a utility that descends through the hierarchy of directories recursively In this case it searches for files that end in either c or h that is C source or header files and prints out their names The filename wildcards are wrapped in single quotes because they re special characters to the shell Without the quotes the shell would expand the wildcards in the current directory but we want find to evaluate them so we prevent the shell from evaluating them by quoting them For more information see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line The next piece xargs grep 1 does a couple of things e grep is a file contents search utility It searches the files given on its command line for the first argument The 1 is another special variable in the shell that represents the first argument we passed to the shell script i e the string we re looking for e xargs is a utility that takes its input and turns it into command line parameters for some other command that you give it Here it takes the list of files from find and makes them command line arguments to grep In this case we re using xargs primarily for efficiency we could do something similar with just find Chapter 10 Writing Shell Scripts 205 Example of a Korn shell script
225. e of an embedded system build a new image that contains new passwd and shadow files and then transfer it to your target system Managing other accounts As a system administrator you need to add and remove user accounts and groups manage passwords and troubleshoot users problems You must be logged in as root to do this because other users don t have permission to modify etc passwd etc shadow and etc group February 1 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 25 Managing other accounts 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CAUTION While it s safe at any time to use the passwd utility to change the password of an existing user who already has a password it isn t necessarily safe to make any other change to the account database while your system is in active use Specifically the following operations may cause applications and utilities to operate incorrectly when handling user account information e adding a user either by using the passwd utility or by manually editing etc passwd e putting a password on an account that previously didn t have a password e editing the etc passwd or etc group files If it s likely that someone might try to use the passwd utility or update the account database files while you re editing them lock the password database by creating the etc pwlock file before making your changes As described below you should use the passwd utility to change an account s passw
226. e owned by the process manager procnto that resolves to the controlling terminal device associated with the session of any process that opens the file This is useful for programs that may have closed their standard input standard output or standard error and later wish to write to the terminal device dev ttypx dev ttyqr dev ttyrx dev zero The slave side of the corresponding dev ptypx file The program being controlled typically uses one of these files for its standard input standard output and standard error Supplies an endless stream of bytes having a value of zero 122 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Where everything is stored etc The etc directory contains host specific system files and programs used for administration and configuration including etc acl conf Specifies permitted operations on a defined SNMP context See etc acl conf in the Utilities Reference etc autoconnect Automatic TCP IP connection configuration script See etc autoconnect in the Utilities Reference etc bootptab Network boot protocol server configuration file See etc bootptab in the Utilities Reference etc config A directory that contains system configuration files such as the ttys file that tinit uses to configure terminal devices etc context conf Context definitions for SNMP v2 See etc context conf in the Utilities Reference etc country Set
227. e plugin to down sample the MPEG audio stream by a given factor to reduce the CPU load see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide 98 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Photon environment variables MPEGAUDIOREFILLONUNDERFLOW Refill the audio input buffer to percent on underflow see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGAUDIOTRANSFORMBITCODE Transform the output of MPEG audio decoder see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGAUDIOTRANSFORMCHANNELCODE Transform the output of the MPEG audio decoder see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGSYSTEMBUFFERSIZE The size of the system input buffer see mpegsystem in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGSYSTEMBUFFERSTARTPERCENT The percent of the input buffer that needs to be filled before playing begins see mpegsystem in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGSYSTEMPLUGINPRIORITY The starting priority for the decoder process see Voyager Plugin Variants in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGSYSTEMREFILLONUNDERFLOW Refill the system input buffer to percent on underflow see mpegsystem in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEG VIDEOBUFFERSIZE The size of the input buffer see mpegvideo in the Multimedia Developer s Guide February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 99 Photon environment variables 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd
228. e video mode to a mode that either your monitor or graphics card doesn t support and that causes Photon to be displayed improperly you can revert to a previous mode as follows 1 Restart the system and boot into safe mode don t start Photon February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 359 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 2 Clear the modes file From the command line type crttrap clear 3 Restart your system and try to detect your video card again The erttrap program hangs If crtt rap hangs i e it doesn t start Photon and leaves you with a black screen try the following 1 Restart the system and boot into safe mode don t start Photon 2 Ensure that your graphics card is supported 3 Clear the modes file From the command line type crttrap clear 4 Restart your system and try to detect your video card again If this fails clear the modes file but don t restart the system Then run crttrap manually from the command line with the verbose option crttrap trap VVVVV If crtt rap hangs again you should be able to see where it failed or what the last adapter it tried to detect was If you can determine the adapter that it failed to trap remove it from the trap list by editing etc system config graphics traplist The list that s generated comes from the enumerators so you might have to change the enumerators so they no longer detect the card in your system e g if
229. ebruary 1 2005 The process whereby a filesystem manager recovers the space occupied by deleted files and directories Also known as space reclamation A collection of users who share similar file permissions High Availability in telecommunications and other industries HA describes a system s ability to remain up and running without interruption for extended periods of time See link A file whose name starts with a dot such as profile Commands such as 1s don t operate on hidden files unless you explicitly say to In the context of embedded Neutrino systems an image can mean either a structure that contains files i e an OS image or a structure that can be used in a read only read write or read write reclaim filesystem i e a flash filesystem image Information node a storage table that holds information about files other than the files names In order to support links for each file the filename is separated from the other information that describes a file Glossary 505 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd interrupt An event usually caused by hardware that interrupts whatever the processor was doing and asks it do something else The hardware will generate an interrupt whenever it has reached some state where software intervention is required IPC Interprocess Communication the ability for two processes or threads to communicate Neutrino offers several forms of IPC most no
230. ed dynamically and has the same format as fontdir fontext A set of extension rules to handle character dropouts i e missing characters fontkey Used to trim specific keywords from the font foundry names fontmap Font mappings for the system For detailed information about the format of this file see phfont fontopts Command line options one option per line for invoking the appropriate font server fontorient Keywords used to identify Asian Oriental font foundry names Used to optimize the extension system fontpreferred The preferred Asian font to attempt to use first for Asian Oriental extension processing font traplist A dynamic list of fonts The ph script regenerates this file if it doesn t exist or if the contents of the font _repository have changed Each entry in the font traplist file contains information such as the name and type of the font its size and style a textual description of the font family and the range of characters defined within the font You may uninstall fonts specified in this file by deleting entries in etc system config font traplist To install a new font on your system drop the font files into the font_repository directory The fontsleuth program loads them February 1 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 195 Terminal types 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd automatically and they become available for use by other applications Input methods Photon
231. ed in the etc printcap file Filter ps d lpr Pprinter_name Filter phs ps phs to ps Supported Resolution Supported PaperSize Supported Orientation 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 0 Portrait 1 Landscape Supported Intensity 0 Min 100 Max Supported InkType 1 B amp W 3a Color CMY 4 Color CMYK Resolution 600 600 PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter Orientation 0 Portrait Intensity 50 InkType 4 Color CMYK NonPrintable 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom ee ee ee ee if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _850DDE PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 B5 11692 16524 A3 f EEA AA DA AEE ET se ee ee eee EE if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _25A854 486 Appendix A e Examples February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Configuration files for spooler PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 2500C CLS PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize Using NCFTP PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 B5 11692 16524 A3 The following macros are expanded for each filter command line Sd De
232. ed into a single file jpg JPEG graphical image pv Photon viewer kbd Compiled Photon keyboard Photon mkkbd definition files kdef Source Photon keyboard mkkbd definition files mk Makefile source typically used make QNX Momentics within QNX recursive makes development system 0 Binary output file that results qcc make QNX Momentics from compiling a C C or development system Assembly source file pal Photon palette file Photon pfr Bitstream TrueDoc Portable phfont Font Resource file phf Bitmapped font file phfont qpr Neutrino installation package qnxinstall February 1 2005 repository a gzipped tar archive of qpm qpk and qrm files Chapter 6 e Working with Files continued 137 Filename extensions 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Extension Description Related programs utilities qpm Neutrino package manifest Usually found in a package repository qpr qnxinstall qpk Neutrino package contents Usually found in a package repository qpr qnxinstall qrm Neutrino package repository Usually found in a package manifest repository qpr qnxinstall S s Assembly source code file GNU assembler as QNX Momentics development system SO SO N Shared object qcc make QNX Momentics development system tar Tape archive tar Backing Up and tar gz tgz toc TTF txt ttf use Compressed tape archive Helpviewer table of contents file TrueT
233. ee DVMRP d11 file extension 135 d11 directory 128 DLLs Dynamic Linked Libraries 128 135 dloader 160 DNS Domain Name Service CIFS 223 security 432 documentation online 79 473 keyword index 82 searching 80 Domain Name Service See DNS domain names daemon 262 domains 239 DOS commands Neutrino equivalents 59 end of line characters converting 4 208 filesystems 220 February 1 2005 mounting 164 floppies formatting 311 variables Neutrino equivalents 63 DOS Denial Of Service attacks 433 dot directory link 413 dot dot directory link 413 dot file 207 double buffering 455 downarrow 39 53 drag and drop 78 dragging 76 drawers 73 dribble bits 347 drive letters 113 driverquery Windows XP command 234 drivers 129 CD ROM starting 164 character device command line interpreting 38 console 12 40 41 334 starting 164 debugging 6 determining which are running 233 disk starting 163 graphics starting 101 input 320 starting 101 network 241 257 starting 168 Index 529 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Vesa 361 video 77 ds 370 DSL Digital Subscriber Line 263 264 dual monitors 354 dumper 129 131 172 dumps directory 172 DVDs 310 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 261 Dvorak keyboard layout 59 Dyna touchscreens 321 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP dynamic HTML 365 367 368 370 Dynamic Linked Libraries See DLLs dynamic routing 255
234. eide use the CPU while the HTML files are written Eventually procnto including the idle thread gets almost all of the CPU You might be alarmed that htmlindex takes up to 96 of the CPU but it s actually a good thing if you re running only one program it should get most of the CPU time If your system is running several processes at once hogs could be more useful It can tell you which of the processes is using the most CPU and then you could adjust the priorities to favor the threads that are most important Remember that in Neutrino priorities are a property of threads not of processes For more information see Priorities in the Using the Command Line chapter Here are some other tips to help you improve your system s performance Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Faster boot times e You can use pidin to get information about the processes that are running on your system For example you can get the arguments used when starting the process the state of the process s threads and the memory that the process is using The number of threads doesn t effect system reaction time as much as the number of threads at a given priority The key to performing realtime operations properly is to set up your realtime threads with the priorities required to ensure the system response that you need Do you need to run Photon If not you can prevent Photo
235. em boots the system If none of the BIOS Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 159 Loading a Neutrino image 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd extensions boots the system the BIOS presents some usually strange failure message For the network boot case the boot ROM usually bootp downloads an image from a server copies it into memory then jumps to the start of the image The boot image generally needs to run a network stack and starts some sort of network filesystem to retrieve or access additional programs and files You can use the mkifs utility to create the OS image For a sample buildfile for this sort of image see the Examples appendix For a disk based boot of a Neutrino desktop system the process of booting and especially system initialization is more complex After the BIOS has chosen to boot from the disk the primary boot loader sometimes called the partition loader is called This loader is OS agnostic it can load any OS The one installed by Neutrino installations displays the message Press F1 F4 to select drive or select partition 1 2 3 1 After a short timeout it boots whatever OS system is in the partition prompted for This loader is boot sys ipl diskpcl You can write a loader onto a disk by using dloader Loading a Neutrino image When you choose a QNX partition the secondary boot loader sometimes called the OS loader starts This loader is Neutrino specific and resides on the Q
236. ems Ltd If you have any problems using Neutrino the first place to look for help is in the documentation You can view the online docs in the Photon Helpviewer or in a web browser The base directory for the documentation is usr help product Most of our manuals include an online index that you can access by clicking this button at the top or bottom of each help file Index However what do you do if you need more help The resources that are available to you depend on the support plan that you ve bought The Developer Support Resources include e public newsgroups see news inn qnx com e private newsgroups see news nntp qnx com e the myQNX account center where you can register your products so that you can download software and updates e Global Help Center available at any time of day e training e an online knowledge base that you can search e detailed hardware support lists e free software e and more Some of these resources are free others are available only if you ve purchased a support plan For more information about our technical support offerings see the Services section of our website at http www qnx com February 1 2005 Chapter 22 e Technical Support 473 Appendix A Examples In this appendix Buildfile for an NFS mounting target 477 qnxbasedma build 481 Buildfile that doesn t use diskboot 483 _profile 484 kshre 485 Configuration files for spooler 485 PPP wit
237. ents are separated by a forward slash This is unlike Microsoft operating systems which use a backslash To explore the files and directories on your system use the 1s utility This is the equivalent of dir in MS DOS For more information see Basic commands in Using the Command Line or 1s in the Utilities Reference Absolute and relative pathnames There are two types of pathname Absolute paths Pathnames that begin with a slash specify locations that are relative to the root of the pathname space For example usr 1ib libmalloc so 2 Relative paths Pathnames that don t begin with specify locations relative to your current working directory For example if your current directory is home fred a relative path of ph helpviewer is the same as an absolute path of home fred ph helpviewer February 1 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 111 Filenames and pathnames 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The pathname home fred ph helpviewer actually specifies a directory not a regular file You can t tell by looking at a pathname whether the path points to a regular file a directory a symbolic link or some other file type To determine the type of a file use file or ls ld The one exception to this is a pathname that ends with which always indicates a directory If you use the F option to 1s the utility displays a slash at the end of a directory name Dot and dot dot directories
238. environment when you log in By default applications pick this spot to install configuration files Configuration files are generally preceded by a period and run either when you log in such as profile or when you start an application such as jedrc Photon applications are a special case Applications that are run in Photon generally store their configurations in the HOME ph directory If you want to automatically start any applications when you start Photon put the commands in your HOME ph phapps file Configuring your shell There are many files that configure your environment this section describes some of the more useful ones e etc profile e SHOME profile e ksh s startup file etc profile The login shell executes etc profile if this file exists and is executable This file does the shell setup that applies to all users so you ll be interested in it if you re the system administrator you need to log in as root in order to edit it The etc profile file 180 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Configuring your shell e sets the HOSTNAME PROCESSOR and SYSNAME environment variables if they aren t already set e adds the appropriate directories to the PATH environment variable the root user s PATH includes directories such as sbin that contain system executables e sets up the file permission mask umask see F
239. er Development Kit DDK includes the source to deve ser8250 which you can use to implement any additional protocols or features The serial drivers support software and hardware flow control e To enable software flow control start the serial driver with the s option or use stty after starting the driver stty tosflow tisflow lt dev serl e To disable software flow control start the driver with the sS option or use stty osflow isflow lt dev serl e To enable hardware flow control start the driver with the option or use stty tohflow tihflow lt dev serl e To disable hardware flow control start the driver with the F option or use stty ohflow ihflow lt dev serl Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Character devices In edited mode e flow control is disabled Don t enable software and hardware flow control at the same time Heavy serial port usage can be very taxing on some systems by default the serial adapter triggers an interrupt for each character transmitted or received You can use these options to reduce the number of interrupts T number Enable the transmit FIFO and set the number of characters to be transmitted at each TX interrupt to 1 4 8 or 14 The default is O FIFO disabled t number Enable the receive FIFO and set its threshold to 1 4 8 or 14 characters The default is O trigger disabled A receive timeo
240. ere x is the number of the drive starting from 0 If the driver doesn t find any devices it might not know the device ID of the adapter Passing the device ID and vendor ID to the driver often corrects this problem On a self hosted system you can pass these options to the driver via diskboot see Controlling How Neutrino Starts In the following example the driver automatically scans for SCSI devices on the chain and adds them into the dev directory as they re found For example if the system has four hard drives in it the entries in the dev directory are as follows e dev hdo lowest SCSI ID first e dev hdl e dev hd2 e dev hd3 the last SCSI hard drive detected When the driver starts it sends debugging information to the system log which you can view using sloginfo This information is often very helpful when you re trying to debug a problem with a SCSI adapter or device If the driver doesn t correctly detect a device check the following e Is the SCSI chain terminated correctly This is frequently the problem when a device doesn t show up correctly shows up and then disappears or doesn t show up at all 316 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Hard disks February 1 2005 e Is the SCSI adapter supported Even if an adapter claims to be compatible with a supported adapter that doesn t mean that the driver will work with it correctly
241. erl In a typical disk based Neutrino system the directory maps to the root of a filesystem on a physical hard drive partition This filesystem on disk doesn t actually contain a dev directory which exists virtually adopted via the process manager In turn the filename ser1 doesn t exist on a disk filesystem either it has been adopted by the serial port driver This capability allows virtual directory unions to be created This happens when multiple resource managers adopt files that lie in a common directory within the pathname space In the interests of creating a maintainable system we suggest that you create directory unions as rarely as possible For more information on pathname space management see Pathname Management in the Process Manager chapter of the System Architecture guide Filename rules Neutrino supports a variety of filesystems each of which has different capabilities and rules for valid filenames For information about February 1 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 115 Filenames and pathnames 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 116 filesystem capabilities see Working with Filesystems for filesystem limits see Understanding System Limits The QNX 4 filesystem is the normal hard disk filesystem that Neutrino uses In this filesystem filenames can be up to 48 bytes long but you can extend them to 505 bytes see Filenames in Working with Filesystems Individual bytes within
242. ervice a policy e g loadbalance used to connect nodes in a network in order to ensure highly dependable transmission QoS is an issue that often arises in high availability HA networks as well as realtime control systems QNX Software Systems Ltd February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd quoting RAM raw mode A method of forcing a shell s special characters to be treated as simple characters instead of being interpreted in a special way by the shell For example less my file name escapes the special meaning of the spaces in a filename Random Access Memory a memory technology characterized by the ability to read and write any location in the device without limitation Contrast flash EPROM and EEPROM In raw input mode the character device library performs no editing on received characters This reduces the processing done on each character to a minimum and provides the highest performance interface for reading data Also raw mode is used with devices that typically generate binary data you don t want any translations of the raw binary stream between the device and the application Contrast canonical mode remote execution Running commands on a machine other than your own over a network replenishment reset vector February 1 2005 In sporadic scheduling the period of time during which a thread is allowed to consume its execution budget The address at which the processor be
243. es e multi threaded design Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX 4 filesystem Extents Filenames February 1 2005 e client driven priority e same disk format as the filesystem under QNX 4 e support for files up to 2G 1 byte in size For information about the implementation of the QNX 4 filesystem see QNX 4 disk structure in the Backing Up and Recovering Data chapter in this guide In the QNX 4 filesystem regular files and directory files are stored as a sequence of extents contiguous sequences of blocks on a disk The directory entry for a file keeps track of the file s extents If the filesystem needs more than one extent to hold a file it uses a linked list of extent blocks to store information about the extents When a file needs more space the filesystem tries to extend the file contiguously on the disk If this isn t possible the filesystem allocates a new extent which may require allocating a new extent block as well When it allocates or expands an extent the filesystem may overallocate space under the assumption that the process will continue to write and fill the extra space When the file is closed any extra space is returned This design ensures that when files even several files at one time are written they re as contiguous as possible Since most hard disk drives implement track caching this not only ensures that files are
244. es sizeof files 0 srand int time NULL num rand 4 Print out head with Random Filename and Base Directory printf lt img src s s alt s border 1 gt n lt BR gt dir files num files num printf Location s s n n lt BR gt dir files num return 0 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 373 Examples 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd rand_images pl usr bin perl This script selects a random number and then chooses an image based on that number This allows the image to change each time the webpage is loaded Se 4b Fe Se set variables dir images files filel jpg file2 jpg file3 jpg file4 jpg file5 jpg srand time num rand files Pick a Random Number Print Out Header With Random Filename and Base Directory print lt img src dir files num alt files num border 1 gt n lt BR gt print Location dir files num n n lt BR gt 374 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server February 1 2005 Chapter 17 Using CVS In this chapter A crash course in CVS 377 CVS basics 377 CVS and directory trees 386 Concurrent development branching and merging 387 Removing and restoring files 389 Setting up a CVS server 390 February 1 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 375 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd A crash course in CVS A crash course in CVS CVS Concurrent Versions Sys
245. es both etc default login and etc profile For more information on configuration strings see Configuration strings below Configuration strings In addition to environment variables Neutrino uses configuration strings These are system variables that are like environment variables but are more dynamic When you set an environment variable the new value affects only the current instance of the shell and any of its children that you create after setting the variable when you set a configuration string its new value is immediately available to the entire system 184 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Configuration strings Neutrino also supports configurable limits which are variables that store information about the system For more information see the Understanding System Limits chapter You can use the POSIX get conf utility to get the value of a configurable limit or a configuration string Neutrino also defines a non POSIX setconf utility that you can use to set configuration strings if you re logged in as root In a program call confstr to get the value of a configuration string The names of configuration strings start with CS and are in uppercase although getconf and setconf let you use any case omit the leading underscore or the entire prefix provided that the rest of the name is unambiguous The configuration strings include
246. es file under etc system enum The enumerator includes this file last and adds February 1 2005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 169 Device enumeration 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 170 any definitions in it to the set that enum devices works with If the overrides file has something that a previously included file also has the later definition wins For example e If you want to stop a particular device from running or change how it starts create a etc system enum overrides file and add a device entry for the device device pci ven 1234 dev 2000 device pci ven 1234 dev 2001 requires IONET_CMD uniq netnum devn en 0 mount Tio net 1lib d11 devn pcnet so dev io net en netnum device pci ven 1234 dev 2002 device pci ven 1234 dev 2003 The first block of this code specifies to do the following if the enumerator detects devices 2000 and 2001 from vendor 1234 1 If io net isn t running start it IONET_CMD is a macro defined in etc system enum include net that specifies the default io net command line 2 Set netnum to the next unique network interface device number starting at 0 3 Mount the PCNET driver into io net The second block of code tells the enumerator to do nothing if it detects devices 2002 or 2003 from vendor 1234 When you add device entries to prevent devices from being enumerated make sure that there aren t any action clauses after
247. essing 237 Conventions for naming nodes 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd the Neutrino utilities cp mv and so on to manipulate files anywhere on the Qnet network as if they were on your machine Because it s meant for a group of trusted machines such as you d find in an embedded system Qnet doesn t do any authentication of requests Files are protected by the normal permissions that apply to users and groups see File ownership and permissions in Working with Files although you can use Qnet s maproot and mapany options to control in a limited way what others users can do on your machine Qnet isn t connectionless like NFS network errors are reported back to the client process TCP IP is intended for more loosely connected machines that can run different operating systems TCP IP does authentication to control access to a machine it s useful for connecting machines that you don t necessarily trust It s used as the base for specialized protocols such as FTP and Telnet and can provide high throughput for data streaming For more information see the TCP IP Networking chapter in this guide NFS was designed for filesystem operations between all hosts all endians and is widely supported It s a connectionless protocol the server can shut down and be restarted and the client resumes automatically It also uses authentication and controls directory access For more information see NFS filesyste
248. estions e Does this change apply to all users or just to me e Do I need to do something only when I first log in or whenever I start a shell When you log in the system starts the login shell that s specified in your entry in the account database see etc passwd in Managing User Accounts The login shell is typically sh which is usually just a link to the Korn shell ksh When ksh starts as a login shell it executes these profiles if they exist and are executable e etc profile e SHOME profile Why have two profiles Settings that apply to all users go into etc profile your own customizations go into your own profile As you might expect you need to be root to edit etc profile There s actually a third profile for the shell The special thing about it is that it s executed whenever you start a shell see ksh s startup file below February 1 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 179 Customizing your home 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Customizing your home Your home directory is where you can store all the files and directories that are relevant to you It s a good place to store your own binaries and scripts Your entry in the password database specifies your home directory see etc passwd in Managing User Accounts and the HOME environment variable stores this directory s name Your home directory is also where you store information that configures your
249. esystem There are two other situations in which a file can have an entry in the inodes file e Ifa file s filename is longer than 16 characters the inode information is stored in the inodes file making room for a 48 character filename in the directory entry Filenames greater than 48 characters are stored within a longfilenames file which has room for a 505 character name a truncated 48 character name is also placed in the directory entry for use by legacy systems e Ifa file at one time had more than one link and all links but one have been removed the file continues to have a separate inodes file entry This is done because the overhead of searching for the Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 217 QNX 4 filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd directory entry that points to the inode entry would be prohibitive there are no links from inode entries back to the directory entries Removing links When a file is created it is given a link count of one As you add and remove links to the file this link count is incremented and decremented The disk space occupied by the file data isn t freed and marked as unused in the bitmap until its link count goes to zero and all programs using the file have closed it This allows an open file to remain in use even though it has been completely unlinked This behavior is part of that stipulated by POSIX and common UNIX practice Directory links Although you can
250. ets that come in and use a software mode to sort them Another way of thinking about this is to compare it to a postal system where if we wanted to pretend to be someone else we would accept all mail from the Post Office However we would then have to sort all the mail This would take a much longer time compared with the amount of time the Post Office would take to presort the mail and give us only the mail addressed to us For more information see Promiscuous Mode below Current Operation Rate 338 The media rate is the speed at which the network card operates On most cards it s either 1OMb s or 100 Mb s This display also shows what form of duplex the card uses Most cards run at half or full duplex transmission Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Network adapters e Full duplex transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions simultaneously e Half duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions but not at the same time The easiest way to illustrate this is to think of a road If the road has two lanes it s full duplex because cars can drive in both directions at the same time without obstructing the other lane If the road has only a single lane it s half duplex because there can be only one car on the road at a time When you examine the media rate check the speed the form of duplex and what
251. exrc Here are some of the vi commands that you ll use a lot To Press Leave vi without saving any changes q Save the current file iW Save the current file and exit Wq x OF ZZ Move the cursor to the left h see below Move the cursor to the right 1 see below Move the cursor up one line k see below Move the cursor down one line j see below Move to the beginning of the next word w Move to the end of the current or next word e depending on the cursor position Move to the beginning of the current or previous b word depending on the cursor position Page back Ctrl B continued February 1 2005 Chapter 7 e Using Editors 145 Supported editors 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd ped 146 To Press Page forward Ctrl F Yank copy the current line yy Yank from the cursor to the end of the current yw word Delete from the cursor to the end of the current dw word Delete the current line dd Paste text before the cursor P Paste text after the cursor Pp In some implementations of vi including Neutrino s you can also use the arrow keys to move the cursor whether you re in command or input mode You can combine the commands to make them even more useful for example type a number before dd to delete several lines at once In addition vi has 26 named buffers that let you easily cut or copy and paste different blocks of text You can find numerous resources tut
252. filesystem _PC_LINK_ MAX Maximum value of a file s link count PC_MAX_CANON Maximum number of bytes in a terminal s canonical input buffer edit buffer _PC_MAX_INPUT Maximum number of bytes in a terminal s raw input buffer PC_NAME_MAX Maximum number of bytes in a filename not including the terminating null _PC_PATH_ MAX Maximum number of bytes in a pathname not including the terminating null _PC_PIPE_BUF Maximum number of bytes that can be written atomically when writing to a pipe PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED If defined not 1 indicates that the use of the chown function is restricted to a process with appropriate privileges and to changing the group ID of a file to the effective group ID of the process or to one of its supplementary group IDs February 1 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 463 Filesystem limits 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd PC_NO_TRUNC If defined not 1 indicates that the use of pathname components longer than the value given by PC_NAME MAX will generate an error PC_VDISABLE If defined not 1 this is the character value that can be used to individually disable special control characters in the termios control structure For more information see Configurable limits above QNX 4 filesystem The limits for QNX 4 filesystems include Filename length 48 bytes or 505 if longfilenames exists before mounting see Filenames in the descriptio
253. force or disable synchronous writes Consider using a RAM disk for temporary files e g tmp 3 Optimize application code Read and write in large chunks 16 32K is optimal Read and write in multiples of a disk block on block boundaries typically 512 bytes but you can use stat or statvfs to determine the value at runtime Avoid standard I O where possible use open read and write instead of fopen fread and fwrite The f functions use an extra layer of buffering The default size is given by BUFSIZ you can use setvbuf to specify a different buffer size Pregrow files if you know their ultimate sizes Use direct I O DMA to user space Use filenames that are no longer than 16 characters If you do this the filesystem won t use the inodes file so there won t be any inter block references In addition there will be one less disk write and hence one less chance of corruption if the power fails Long filenames i e longer than 48 characters especially slow down the filesystem 448 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystems e Use the i option to dinit to pregrow the inodes file which eliminates the runtime window of manipulating its metadata during a potential power loss e Big directories are slower that small ones because the filesystem uses a linear search Performance and robustness When you design or configure a
254. fs o guest none SMB_SERVER 10 0 0 1 QNX_BIN bin See the Utilities Reference for details on usage and syntax Image filesystem By an image we refer to an OS image here which is a file that contains the OS your executables and any data files that might be related to your programs for use in an embedded system You can think of the image as a small filesystem it has a directory structure and some files in it The image contains a small directory structure that tells procnto the names and positions of the files contained within it the image also contains the files themselves When the embedded system is running the image can be accessed just like any other read only filesystem cd proc boot 1s script cat datal data2 devc ser8250 esh ls procnto cat datal This is a data file called datal contained in the image Note that this is a convenient way of associating data files with your programs 212 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd dev shmem RAM filesystem The above example actually demonstrates two aspects of having the OS image function as a filesystem When we issue the 1s command the OS loads 1s from the image filesystem pathname proc boot 1s Then when we issue the cat command the OS loads cat from the image filesystem as well and opens the file datal Configuring an OS image You can create an OS image by using mkifs MaKe I
255. g February 1 2005 A script I put in etc profile d doesn t run Check the following e Make sure that the script s name has ksh or sh as its extension e Make sure the executable bit is set on the script e Make sure that the script begins with the line bin sh How do I set the time so it s right in Neutrino and Microsoft Windows If you have Windows in one partition and Neutrino in another on your machine you might notice that setting the clock on one OS changes it on the other Under Neutrino you usually set the hardware clock to use UTC Coordinated Universal Time and then set the time zone Under Windows you set the hardware clock to use local time To set the time so that it s correct in both operating systems set the hardware clock to use local time under Neutrino For more information see the description of etc system sysinit in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter of this guide How can I properly check if kshre is being run as a script rather than as a terminal session If the i option is set then kshrc is running in interactive mode Here s some code that checks to see if this option is set case in i set o emacs export EDITOR vi export VISUAL vi export PS1 hostname s bin pwd gt bind z list Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 197 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd bind I complete esac The pa
256. g anything If the user name isn t already registered passwd prompts you for account information such as the user s group list home directory and login shell The etc default passwd configuration file specifies the rules that determine the defaults for new accounts For more information see the description of this file in the documentation for passwd The prompts include User id default Specify the numeric user ID for the new user By default no two users may share a common user ID because applications won t be able to determine the user name that corresponds to that user ID Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 27 Managing other accounts 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Group id default Choose a numeric group ID that the user will belong to after initially logging in m The passwd utility doesn t add the new user to the group s entry in the etc group file you need to do that manually using a text editor See Defining Groups for more details Real name Enter the user s real name The real name isn t widely used by system utilities but may be used by applications such as email Home directory home username Enter the pathname of the user s home directory usually home username The passwd utility automatically creates the directory you specify If the directory already exists passwd by default prompts you to select a different pathname For information on disabli
257. g other accounts 25 Troubleshooting 32 February 1 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 15 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What does a user account do This chapter explains how user accounts work how users can change their password by using the passwd utility and how system administrators can use the passwd utility and edit account database files to create and maintain users accounts In embedded systems the designer may choose to eliminate the account related files from the system disabling logins and references to users and groups by name even though the system remains fully multiuser and may have multiple numeric user IDs running programs and owning system resources If your system is configured this way most of this chapter won t be relevant to you What does a user account do February 1 2005 A user account associates a textual user name with a numeric user ID and group ID a login password a user s full name a home directory and a login shell This data is stored in the etc passwd and etc shadow files where it s accessed by login utilities as well as by other applications that need user account information User names and passwords are case sensitive User accounts let e users log in with a user name and password starting a session under their user ID and group ID e users create their own login environments e applications determine the user name and account information relat
258. g queues both local and remote printers printers attached via serial lines that require line initialization e g baud rate To print a file using the line printer system you need 276 Chapter 14 a user interface and a method of organizing and preparing print jobs spooling directories somewhere to store files waiting to be printed a way of preventing unauthorized access for remote printing a network manager capable of delivering the files to be printed some knowledge about the printer being used e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr You need to log in as root to set up the lpr system User interface The line printer system consists mainly of the following files and commands etc printcap i i Any user Printing with the lpr utilities lpd Printer daemon that does all the real work lpr Program to enter a job in a printer queue lprq Spooling queue examination program lprrm Program to delete jobs from a queue lpre Program to administer printers and spooling queues only root can use this utility February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 277 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd etc printcap A master database that describes printers directly attached to a machine and printers accessible across a network It des
259. gins executing instructions after the processor s reset line has been activated On the x86 for example this is the address OxFFFFFFFO Glossary 513 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd resource manager root round robin RTOS A user level server program that accepts messages from other programs and optionally communicates with hardware Neutrino resource managers are responsible for presenting an interface to various types of devices whether actual e g serial ports parallel ports network cards disk drives or virtual e g dev nul1l1 a network filesystem and pseudo ttys In other operating systems this functionality is traditionally associated with device drivers But unlike device drivers Neutrino resource managers don t require any special arrangements with the kernel In fact a resource manager looks just like any other user level program See also device driver The superuser which can do anything on your system The superuser has what Windows calls administrator s rights Scheduling algorithm whereby a thread is given a certain period of time the timeslice to run Should the thread consume CPU for the entire period of its timeslice the thread will be placed at the end of the ready queue for its priority and the next available thread will be made READY If a thread is the only thread READY at its priority level it will be able to consume CPU again immediately See also FIFO and sporadic Realt
260. gured in contiguous T O mapped addressing i e 0x320 not 0x1 0 0x170 specify the interface control block address The control block address is offset 12 from the base If a PCMCIA interface is located at I O port 0x320 and IRQ 7 specify devb eide eide ioport 0x320 0x32c irq 7 noslave e If your devices support UDMA 4 or higher but sloginfo reports that the driver is using a lower mode make sure you re using an 80 conductor cable e If you have an 80 conductor cable and your devices support UDMA 4 or higher but sloginfo reports that the driver is using a lower mode the device firmware might be out of date The driver relies on the device firmware to detect the cable type You can check to see if the device manufacturer has a firmware upgrade or you can use the udma xxx command line option to override the mode For example devb eide eide vid 0x8086 did 0x2411 pci 0 chnl 1 master udma 4 If the drives are detected but they re running slowly 314 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Hard disks e Use sloginfo to examine the devb driver output in the system log It will tell you the current speed of the driver e g max udma 5 cur udma 3 1S Neutrino automatically uses the maximum UDMA mode unless you ve specified a maximum in the BIOS The following table shows the maximum mode and rate for each disk specification The PIO MDMA and lower UDMA
261. gured to display it The default etc profile displays this file only if the etc motd file is more recent than the time you last logged in to the system as determined by 124 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Where everything is stored February 1 2005 etc networks etc opasswd etc oshadow the time your SHOME lastlogin file was last modified For more information see the description of etc profile in Configuring Your Environment Network name database file For more information see etc networks in the Utilities Reference Backup of etc passwd file before its last change via the passwd utility See the Managing User Accounts chapter Backup of etc shadow file before its last change via the passwd utility See Managing User Accounts etc party conf etc passwd etc photon Configuration file for SNMP v2 party definitions See etc party conf in the Utilities Reference for more details This file defines login accounts See the chapter Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down as well as Managing User Accounts for more details also see passwd login phlogin2 and phlogin in the Utilities Reference A directory that contains some Photon related configuration files including pterm Configuration files for pterm shelf A directory that contains the default configuration file for the shelf and the default layout of the Launch menu
262. h CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes 490 Configuration files for setting up a firewall 493 February 1 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 475 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Buildfile for an NFS mounting target This appendix includes examples of the following e buildfile for an NFS mounting target e qnxbasedma build e buildfile that doesn t use diskboot e profile e kshre e configuration files for spooler e PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes e configuration files for setting up a firewall Buildfile for an NFS mounting target Here s a sample buildfile for an NFS mounting target In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read FEAE AE HEHE AEE AE AE HE AEE AEE HE AE AEE HE EA EAE HE EA EE AE EAE HE AE FE HE EE A FE FE FE E FE A A EA EE EA EE A RA QNX Neutrino 6 x on the MIPS Malta evaluation board Galileo GT64120A FEE HE HE HE AEE FE FE AE HE a a aE HE FE E a FE HE EE FE HE a EA FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE aE FE HE HE HE a a EE a FE FE E HE EHE HEHHE SUPPORTED DEVICES SERIAL RS 232 ports UARTO and UART1 PCI 4 PCI slots NETWORK AMD 79C973 FLASH 4MB Intel Strata Flash USB UHCI USB Host Controller For detailed instructions on the default example configuration for HH these devices see the CONFIGURING ON BOARD
263. h a new Photon session When a request is detected from a remote Phindows client in our case inetd automatically establishes a full TCP IP connection and launches phrelay on that connection Phindows is then fully connected to the local machine For more information about inetd see the Utilities Reference Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 91 Connecting to other systems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Starting Phindows 92 To launch Phindows on your Windows machine do one of the following e Click on the Phindows icon if you created one e Choose the Start gt Programs QNX Momentics Phindows menu entry e Run the C Program Files phindows phindows exe program Phindows displays a Connect dialog where you can specify the type of connection TCP IP or direct connect serial Various connection options are available but the defaults usually work well If you request a TCP IP connection you must also specify the Internet address of the Neutrino computer you re connecting to e g 198 53 31 1 If the remote computer has been configured properly you should see a Photon login prompt at which point you re connected and running Photon If you request a serial connection then you must specify the COM port e g COM1 or COM2 If you don t specify a baud rate Phindows uses the current Windows default settings With a serial connection Phindows initially acts as a simple text terminal that lets you ty
264. h driver to use for yours See also Input drivers devi in the Summary chapter of the Utilities Reference Determine which options are appropriate for your setup and then start the driver For example here s how to start the driver for a Dynapro SC4 touchscreen devi dyna dyna 4 fd d dev serl amp This command starts the driver devi dyna using the SC4 protocol 4 and a file descriptor that s attached to serial port 1 a d dev ser1 When you start the driver for the first time it returns an error stating that it can t read the calibration file To calibrate the touch screen use the calib utility while running Photon February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 321 Audio cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Audio cards ISA cards By default the operating system detects your audio card The enumerators identify the card and use io audio to start it Audio drivers in Neutrino are very simple to initialize When you use io audio you can use the d option to pass the driver io audio vv d audiope amp To see what other options you can use see the documentation for io audio in the Utilities Reference and for your specific card If the operating system doesn t detect your card properly you can manually start the driver In order to do this you need to identify the card You can find a list of supported hardware on our website see the introduction to this chapter ISA cards are
265. h memory February 1 2005 Glossary 515 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd socket In TCP IP a combination of an IP address and a port number that uniquely identifies a single network process software interrupts Similar to a hardware interrupt see interrupt except that the source of the interrupt is software spilling What happens when you try to change a file that the package filesystem manages if you re using it a copy of the file is transferred to the spill directory sporadic Scheduling algorithm whereby a thread s priority can oscillate dynamically between a foreground or normal priority and a background or low priority A thread is given an execution budget of time to be consumed within a certain replenishment period See also FIFO and round robin startup code The software component that gains control after the IPL code has performed the minimum necessary amount of initialization After gathering information about the system the startup code transfers control to the OS static linking The process whereby you combine your programs with the modules from the library to form a single executable that s entirely self contained The word static implies that it s not going to change all the required modules are already combined into one 516 Glossary February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd superuser symbolic link The root user which can do anything on yo
266. hardware fills the system page with information about the hardware loads callout routines that the kernel uses for interacting with the hardware and then loads and starts the microkernel and process manager procento IPL and startup for a board are generally part of a Board Support Package BSP for a particular board After procnto has completed its initialization it runs the commands supplied in the boot script which might start further customization of the runtime environment either through a shell script or through some program written in C C or a combination of the two Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What happens when you boot February 1 2005 On a non x86 disk booted system that s pretty well how it happens most customization is done in the boot script or in a shell script that it calls For more details see Making an OS Image in Building Embedded Systems For an x86 BIOS boot this becomes more complex Reset vector y C BIOS extension BIOS extension ie y Startup OS boot image procnto Boot script 4 Initialization scripts and programs Booting a Neutrino system with an x86 BIOS After gaining control the BIOS configures the hardware and then it scans for BIOS extension signatures 0x55AA It calls each BIOS extension e g a network card with a boot ROM or hard disk controller until one of th
267. he w and 1 parameters are the same as for of filters The n and h parameters specify the login name and hostname of the job owner The last argument is the name of the accounting file from etc printcap e All other filters are called with these arguments filter xwidth ylength nlogin hhost acct_file The x and y options specify the horizontal and vertical page size in pixels from the px and py entries in the etc printcap file The rest of the arguments are the same as for if filters Some etc printcap examples This section gives you some examples to show you how to set up your printer descriptions see also etc printcap in the Utilities Reference Single printer Let s assume we have two nodes node1 and node2 and node1 has a printer connected to dev par1 5 dev parl TCP IP nodel node2 The etc printcap file on node1 might be as follows lpt1 1lp dev par1 288 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr This file simply gives the name 1pt1 to the printer connected to dev par1 It doesn t need to describe any other capabilities because the default settings suffice To access this printer from nodel specify lpr Plpt1 or set the PRINTER environment variable to 1lpt1 Make sure the spooling directory exists and that there
268. he Photon microGUI Working with Files Using Editors Controlling How Neutrino Starts Configuring Your Environment Writing Shell Scripts Working with Filesystems Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing TCP IP Networking Printing Connecting Hardware Setting Up an Embedded Web Server continued February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Note to Windows users To find out about Go to Keeping track of changes to your software and other files Backing up and restoring your files Making your Neutrino system more secure Analyzing and improving your machine s performance How many processes files etc your system can support How to get help Samples of buildfiles profiles etc Terms used in QNX docs Using CVS Backing Up and Recovering Data Securing Your System Fine Tuning Your System Understanding System Limits Technical Support Examples Glossary Note to Windows users In QNX documentation we use a forward slash as a delimiter in all pathnames including those pointing to Windows files We also generally follow POSIX UNIX filesystem conventions Assumptions e We assume that QNX Neutrino is already installed and running on your computer e This guide is intended for all users of a QNX Neutrino system from system administrators to end users e The online version of this guide contains links to various books throughout our entire do
269. he Photon microGUI 93 Hotkeys and shortcuts 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Text field If you want to Press Copy selected text to the clipboard Paste selected text from the clipboard Toggle text selection Search help with selected text Set pterm options Scroll through buffered lines Increase or decrease font and window size Increase or decrease font size only Ctrl Alt X or Ctrl Alt C Ctrl Alt V or Ctrl right mouse button Ctrl Alt R Ctrl Alt H Ctrl Alt O Ctrl Alt Ctrl Alt 4 Ctrl Alt Page Up Ctrl Alt Page Down Ctrl Alt Home and Ctrl Alt End Ctrl Alt and Ctrl Alt Ctrl Alt and Ctrl Alt If you want to Press Cut selected text Ctrl X or Ctrl Alt X Copy selected text to the Ctrl C or clipboard Ctrl Alt C Paste selected text from the Ctrl V or clipboard Ctrl Alt V or 94 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI Ctrl right mouse button February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Hotkeys and shortcuts February 1 2005 The window manager pwm provides the following shortcuts If you want to Press Move the window to the front Alt F2 Move the window to the back Alt F3 Close the window Alt F4 or Restore the window to previous size if it s been maximized Move the
270. he default is usr spool output 1pd Each printer should have a separate spooling directory if it doesn t jobs are printed on different printers depending on which printer daemon starts first By convention the name of the spooling directory has the same name as its associated printer Make sure you create the named spooling directory before you print IE 1f usr adm lpd errs A file to take printing error messages by default errors are sent to the console Sometimes errors that are sent to standard error output don t appear in the log file We highly recommend that you use the system logger daemon syslogd mx 0 Remove the default limits on the size of the spooling buffer sh Suppress the printing of the burst header a page that lists the user ID and job information about the print job 284 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr Printers on serial lines When you connect a printer via a serial line you must set the proper baud rate and terminal modes The following example is for a DecWriter III printer connected locally via a 1200 baud serial line lp LA 180 DecWriter III lp dev 1p br 1200 s 06320 tr of usr lib lpf 1f usr adm lpd errs lp The name of the file to open for output br The baud rate for the tty line fs Flags that set CRMOD no parity and XTABS tr f Print a formfeed character when the queue empt
271. he file and then sends it to the printer Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with spooler Photon application dev printers printer_name spool File that needs to Filter be converted l i i B gt dev par gt File of the correct type Printing with spooler Normally spooler stores a file to be printed in a directory on disk then tells the filter where to get the file If you need to cut down on disk memory you can use the F option of spooler to disable the spooling of print files This option causes the spooler to send sections of a file to be printed directly to a FIFO buffer in piecemeal fashion the filter receives data to be printed from the FIFO and prints that part of the file When the buffer has been emptied spooler loads the next section of the file into the buffer and so on until the whole file has been printed February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 297 Printing with spooler 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd If you ask a Photon application for a print preview it sends the output to the preview utility If you want to view or manage the print queue start prjobs from the command line or select Configure Print Manager from the Launch menu For more information see the Utilities Reference Remote printing over Qnet To print across Qnet print to net nodename dev printers printer_name spool The spoole
272. he shell passes the output from all of the invocations of xargs to less In contrast this command find name html xargs grep 1 QNX Neutrino less passes the command grep 1 QNX Neutrino less to xargs which will have quite different results if it works at all For more information see Quoting in the docs for ksh in the Utilities Reference History recalling commands The shell lets you recall commands that you ve previously entered use the T and J up and down arrows to move through the history buffer You can edit the command if you wish and then press Enter to reexecute it The shell also includes a builtin fe command that you can use to display and edit previous commands as well as an r alias to fc that reexecutes a previous command For example r string reexecutes the last command that starts with the given string Shell scripts You can enter shell commands into a text file called a shell script and then invoke the commands in batch mode by executing or shelling the file For more information see the Writing Shell Scripts chapter in this guide February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 53 Utilities 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Utilities Give us the tools and we will finish the job Sir Winston Churchill Once the shell has processed all of its special characters what remains typically consists of commands and the arguments to them Most comma
273. heir supported features see the introduction to this chapter You can start the devb eide driver without any options and by default it automatically detects the EIDE controller on the system devb eide amp When the driver starts it detects all EIDE devices attached to the chain For each device the driver creates an entry in the dev directory e g a hard drive appears as hdx where x is the number of the drive starting from 0 For example suppose a system has two hard drives installed The driver creates the following entries in the dev directory dev hdo Usually the primary master dev hd1 Usually the primary slave or the next drive on the system the secondary master If the system has one hard drive and a CD ROM the entries are 312 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Hard disks dev hd0 The primary master dev cd0 The CD ROM drive A slave drive must have a master drive When the driver starts it displays on the console the type of detected hardware along with other debugging information that gets sent to the system logger slogger To view the system log run sloginfo When you view the output from sloginfo there will likely be a number of ASC_MEDIA_NOT_PRESENT entries The driver logs these messages if there isn t a CD in the CD ROM drive You can generally ignore them Troubleshooting for devb eide February 1 2005 If
274. hen For more information see RFC 952 8 Then sysinit runs etc re d re devices to enumerate your system s devices see Device enumeration below This starts io net as well as various other drivers depending on the hardware detected 9 If etc system config useqnet exists and io net is running sysinit initializes Neutrino native networking see the Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing chapter in this guide and npm qnet so in the Utilities Reference 10 Next sysinit runs the system initialization script etc re d re sysinit see below 11 If that fails sysinit tries to become a sh or if that fails a fesh so that you at least have a shell if all else fails Device enumeration Neutrino uses a device enumerator manager process enum devices to detect all known hardware devices on the system and to start the appropriate drivers It s called by the etc re d re devices script which etc system sysinit invokes The enum devices manager uses a series of configuration files to specify actions to take when the system detects specific hardware devices After it reads the configuration file s enum devices queries its various enumerators to discover what devices are on the system It then matches these devices against the device IDs listed in the configuration files If the device matches the action clauses associated with the device are executed You can find the enumerator configuration files i
275. hive the entire partition To conserve space you can compress archives although it takes some time to compress on storage and decompress on retrieval Neutrino includes the following compressors and decompressors e bzip2 and bunzip2 e freeze and melt e gzip and gunzip The best choice is usually gzip because it s supported on many operating systems while freeze is used mainly for compatibility with QNX 4 systems There are also many third party compressors February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 401 Archiving your data 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The gzip utility is licensed under the Gnu Public License GPL which is a consideration if you re going to distribute gzip to others as part of the backup solution you re developing For example to compress my archive tar to create a new file called my_archive tar gz type gzip my archive tar This file is much smaller than the original one which makes it easier to store Some of the utilities including gzip have options that let you control the amount of compression Generally the better the compression the longer it takes to do The default extension is tar gz but you ll see others such as tgz You can use the S option to gzip to specify the suffix Decompressing the archive 402 To decompress the archive use the compressor s corresponding utility In the case of a gz or tgz file use gunzip gun
276. hostname unique e Are the nodes in the same domain Is Qnet running Qnet creates the net directory Use the following command to make sure that it exists ls net If you don t see any directory Qnet isn t running Ideally the directory should include at least an entry with the name of your machine i e the output of the hostname command If you re using the Ethernet binding all other reachable machines are also displayed For example joseph eileen Are io net and the drivers running February 1 2005 As mentioned before io net is the framework used to connect drivers and protocols In order to troubleshoot this use the following pidin command pidin P io net mem Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 245 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Look for the Qnet shared object in the output pid tid name 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 86034 prio STATE code data stack 1 sbin io net 100 SIGWAITINFO 56K 684K 8192 516K 2 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 68K 3 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 68K 4 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 68K 5 sbin io net 200 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 6 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 68K 7 sbin io net 21r RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 8 sbin io net 10r RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 9 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4096 132K 10 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 684K 4
277. hoton dllpath gri photon so Here s a second example that shows how to use two different devices for two displays GLOBAL devices banshee DEVICE banshee dllpath pci_vendor_id pci_device_id pci_index plugins photon xres 1280 yres 1024 bitpp 32 DEVICE rage128 dllpath ragel28 devg banshee so 0x121a 0x5 0 photon devg ati_rage128 so pci_vendor_id 0x1002 pci_device_id 0x5050 pci_index 0 plugins photon February 1 2005 357 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd photon xres 1024 yres 768 bitpp 16 region_x 1280 PLUGIN photon dllpath gri photon so Troubleshooting your video card Here are some things to check if erttrap fails to detect your video card or has problems The display is slightly misaligned on the monitor Each monitor behaves differently in certain resolutions and refresh rates If Photon seems to be slightly off center you may need to use the controls on your monitor to adjust the display to properly align with the video mode See your monitor s documentation for more information The refresh rate isn t correct the display isn t centered or in the worst case there s no display at all The timings set by drivers might not match the timings required by the monitor or LCD You might have to edit usr photon config crtc settings This file contains the timing
278. i vvv and see what T O port and IRQ are assigned to the modem Use the correct I O port and IRQ from pei vvv to start deve ser8250 When you use the appropriate I O port and IRQ the dev directory entry gets created for you External modems External modems are easy to set up Look in the dev directory for the serial port that the modem is attached to You ll attach this at the back of the system If you know the modem is attached to serial port 1 then look in the dev directory for ser1 February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 349 Modems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Cable Modems ISDN We assume that your cable modem is attached to your system via a network card and that the driver for your card has been started and is running properly If this isn t the case see Network adapters earlier in this chapter To set your configuration use the TCP IP configuration tool You can start it by typing phlip on the command line by selecting Network from Photon s shelf or by choosing Launch Configure Network Then do the following 1 Go to the Devices tab and use these settings e Choose eno e Choose DHCP for the connection e Inthe Server field enter the machine ID given by the cable network operator 2 Go to the Network tab and use these settings e Use the machine ID as the hostname e Set the domain name to be the domain name of your cable network operator e Set the gateway to be
279. ich options you need to use For a serial mouse you need to specify the correct protocol e g the Microsoft Mouse protocol Keyboards are detected on these interfaces e AtT style adapters appear as dev kbddev e PS 2 keyboards appear as dev kbd If inputtrap detects a serial Microsoft mouse and a keyboard interfaced through the file descriptor provided by opening dev kbd it invokes devi hirun like this 320 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Input devices devi hirun kbd fd d dev kbd msoft fd amp If inputtrap detects a PS 2 mouse interfaced through the auxiliary port on the keyboard controller nousedev and a keyboard interfaced through the primary keyboard port on the keyboard controller kbddev it invokes devi hirun like this devi hirun kbddev ps2 mousedev amp Once the mouse has been started you can change the behavior of the mouse by using the Photon Input configuration utility You can start it by typing input cfg on the command line by selecting Mouse in the shelf or by choosing Launch Configure Mouse Currently there s no support for USB keyboards in text mode but Intel machines can use BIOS emulation to support them Photon supports USB mice and keyboards for more information see USB devices later in this chapter Touchscreens Neutrino supports various touchscreens check the list of supported hardware on our website to determine whic
280. ies This is handy when the printer has continuous paper because you can tear the paper off when the print job finishes instead of first having to take the printer offline and manually advance the paper of usr lib lpf Use a filter program called 1p for printing the files see Filters below 1f usr adm lpd errs Write any error messages to the file usr adm 1lpd errs instead of to the console Remote printers Printers that reside on remote hosts should have an empty 1p entry For example the following etc printcap entry directs output to the printer named 1p on the machine named ucbvax lp default line printer lp rm ucbvax rp lp sd usr spool vaxlpd February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 285 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filters 286 The rm entry is the name of the remote machine to connect to this name must be a known hostname for a machine on the network The rp capability indicates that the name of the remote printer is 1p you can leave it out in this case because this is the default value The sd entry specifies usr spool vaxl1pd as the spooling directory instead of the default pathname usr spool output 1pd Filters are used to handle device dependencies and accounting functions Output filters Input filters Other filters Chapter 14 e Printing Used when accounting isn t needed or when all text data must be passed through a filter An output
281. ies Reference Read from this device to obtain random data see random in the Utilities Reference A pathname space where entries for named semaphores appear Serial ports See stty for configuration and devc ser for driver details in the Utilities Reference Contains files representing shared memory regions on the system also sometimes used for generic memory mapped files For more information see the description of the RAM filesystem in Working with Filesystems Chapter 6 e Working with Files 121 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd dev slog dev socket dev text dev tty A device managed by slogger used to read or write system log messages Try sloginfo dev slog See slogger and sloginfo in the Utilities Reference for more information This directory is owned and managed through the TCP IP stack npm tcpip so or npm ttcpip so running under io net This directory contains pathnames through which applications interact with the stack For more information see the TCP IP Networking chapter in this guide This file is managed by procnto Text written to this device is output through debug output routines encoded in the startup code for your system The actual result therefore varies from board to board On a standard PC using startup BIOS the default is to write to the PC console For more information see startup in the Utilities Reference A virtual devic
282. ile gt New Section or press Ctrl N You can view any open topic by clicking on its tab To close the current topic select File Close Section or press Ctrl D Surfing the web with Voyager Photon ships with a web browser called Voyager that you can use to browse local HTML files or to browse the Internet Neutrino also includes an embedded web server called Slinger that you can use to build Internet access into embedded systems For more information see Setting Up an Embedded Web Server To start Voyager right click on the desktop and select Voyager or type voyager amp at a pterm prompt 84 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Surfing the web with Voyager Fie Edit View Go Hotlist Help o O 8 amp amp Back Forward Home Reload Font Print Hotlist Add Url Stop http www google ca search q QNX amp ie ISO 8859 1 amp hl en amp meta Advanced Search Preferences Language Tools Google Search theweb O pages from Canada Searched the web for QNX Results 1 10 of about 285 000 Search took 0 13 second Category Computers gt Software gt Operating Systems gt Realtime gt QNX NX Realtime operati tem RTOS software development tools Sponsored Links QNX Software Systems Reliable RTOS and Productive Development Free Q 1 Rtos R Tools for Embedded Premier sites Demos White papers Free Info on Qnx and
283. ile or another device input lt redirection Write stdout to a file output redirection gt Write stdout to a file appending to the file s gt gt contents output append For example the 1s command lists the files in a directory If you want to redirect to output of 1s to a file called filelist enter ls gt filelist You can specify a file descriptor for the above redirections For example if you don t want to display any error messages redirect stderr to dev null a special file also known as the bit bucket that swallows any data written to it and returns end of file when read from my command 2 gt dev null For more information see Input output redirection in the docs for ksh in the Utilities Reference You can also use a pipe to to build complex commands from smaller ones grep some term html sort u we 1 Programs such as grep sort and we a utility that counts characters words and lines that read from standard input and write to standard output are called filters 50 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Shell Quoting special characters Certain characters may have special meaning to the shell depending on their context If you want a command line to include any of the special characters that the shell processes then you may have to quote these characters to force the shell to treat them as simple characters Yo
284. ile descriptors 469 files link count 463 names length of 463 message queues 470 path names length of 463 physical address space 468 pipes number of bytes written atomically 463 platform specific 470 prefix space 468 process groups 468 processes 468 540 Index semaphores 469 sessions 468 shared memory 469 synchronization primitives 469 TCP IP 469 terminals canonical input buffer size 463 raw input buffer size 463 threads 468 timers 468 lines counting 50 links 216 413 circular preventing 220 creating to directory 410 directories 218 dot directory link 413 dot dot directory link 413 QNX4FS_FILE_LINK bit 413 removing 218 symbolic 218 removing 220 Linux Ext2 filesystem 222 465 mounting 164 load monitor 75 loader blocks 409 creating 417 loaders primary boot or partition 160 secondary or OS 160 local 131 localtime 192 log CVS command 385 389 logger system 120 122 163 166 loggingin 12 19 bypassing 173 environment variables 183 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index profiles 181 logging out 13 login 12 33 41 174 remote daemon 261 time of last 124 login file 184 loginID 17 18 creating 27 removing 29 login shell program 20 22 26 28 29 non POSIX 33 logman DOS command 59 LOGNAME 20 63 logout 14 42 long filenames enabling for QNX 4 filesystems 215 lp UNIX command 3 lpe UNIX command 3 lpd 261 278 error messages 303 lock files 278 lpd l
285. ile ownership and permissions in Working with Files e displays the date you logged in the message of the day found in etc motd and the date you last logged in e sets the TMPDIR environment variable to tmp if it isn t already set e runs any scripts in the etc profile d directory as dot files i e instead of executing them as separate shells the current shell loads their commands into itself For more information about dot files see dot builtin command in the documentation for ksh in the Utilities Reference If you have a script that you want to run whenever anyone on the system runs a login shell put it in the etc profile d directory You must have root level privileges to add a file to this directory For example if you need to set global environment variables or run certain tasks when anyone logs in then this is the place to put a script to handle it If you re using sh as your login shell make sure that the script has a sh extension SHOME profile The system runs HOME profile whenever you log in after it runs etc profile If you change your profile the changes don t go into effect until you next log in You should use your profile to do the customizations that you need to do only once or that you want all shells to inherit For example you could February 1 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 181 Configuring your shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd
286. iles for ksh see also Configuring your shell in Configuring Your Environment Reserved words The Korn shell recognizes these reserved words and symbols case else function then do esac if time IL done fi in until elif for select while and uses them to build compound commands For example you can execute commands in a loop for iin c do cp i i bak done Entering multiple commands You can enter more than one command at a time by separating your commands with a semicolon For example if you want to determine your current working directory invoke pwd If you want to see what the directory contains use 1s You could combine the two commands as follows pwd ls As described in Pipes you can also use pipes to connect commands on the command line February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 45 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Aliases You can define an alias in the shell to create new commands or to specify your favorite options For example the F option to the 1s command displays certain characters at the end of the names to indicate that the file is executable a link a directory and so on If you always want 1s to use this option create an alias alias ls ls F If you ever want to invoke the generic 1s command specify the path to the executable or put a backslash in front of the command e g ls For information on adding an alias to yo
287. ils see CD ROMs above DVD RAM You can treat DVD RAM drives like hard disks They appear in the dev directory as a CD but you can mount and treat them just like a hard disk see Hard disks below Floppy disks The driver for a floppy drive is devb fdc In order to use a floppy disk you need to ensure that the floppy controller is enabled in the BIOS and that the BIOS is configured to recognize the correct type of floppy drive e g 1 44MB 2 88MB The driver uses these locations as default e I O port 0x3 0 e IRQ6 e DMA 2 If your controller is located at a different address you can change these locations in the driver s options 310 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Hard disks The default cache size specified by io b1k so is 15 of system memory which is excessive for devb fdc You ll probably want to reduce it to something more reasonable devb fde blk cache 128K amp The driver creates a dev f dx entry where x is the number of the floppy drive starting at 0 If no entry appears the BIOS settings might be incorrect or there could be a problem with the controller Check the output from sloginfo for clues Once you have an entry in the dev directory you need to mount the floppy disk The mount command detects the type of filesystem you re using e g DOS QNX 4 but you can also specify it on the command line e To mount a DOS
288. ime operating system runtime loading 514 Glossary The process whereby a program decides while it s actually running that it wishes to load a particular function from a library Contrast static linking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd scheduling latency The amount of time that elapses between the point when one thread makes another thread READY and when the other thread actually gets some CPU time Note that this latency is almost always at the control of the system designer Also designated as T Contrast interrupt latency session A collection of process groups established for job control purposes Each process group is a member of a session A process belongs to the session that its process group belongs to A newly created process joins the session of its creator A process can alter its session membership via setsid A session can contain multiple process groups session leader A process whose death causes all processes within its process group to receive a SIGHUP signal shell A process that parses what you type on the command line also known as a command interpreter shell script A file that contains shell commands simple command A command line that contains a single command usually a program that you want to run e g less my_file Contrast compound command socket A logical drive in a flash filesystem consisting of a contiguous and homogeneous region of flas
289. includes input methods for Chinese Japanese and Korean You can launch these applications by typing cpim Chinese Input Method vpim Japanese or kpim Korean Using a standard keyboard you can input characters in these languages to any application that normally accepts text For more information see the Photon Multilingual Input bookset Terminal types You need to set the TERM environment variable to indicate to your console or pterm what type of terminal you re using The usr 1ib terminfo directory contains directories that contain terminal database information You can use the utilities tic and infocmp to change the mappings in the database For example you could run infocmp on usr 1ib terminfo q qansi m and this would generate the source for this database You could then modify the source and then run the tic utility on that source to compile the source back in to a reconcilable database The etc termcap file is provided for compatibility with programs that use the older single file database model as opposed to the newer library database model For more information see Strang John Linda Mui and Tim O Reilly 1988 termcap amp terminfo Sebastopol CA O Reilly and Associates ISBN 0937175226 Troubleshooting Here are some common problems you might encounter while customizing your environment 196 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshootin
290. ine 340 ISA cards 322 modems 348 isapnp 323 349 ISDN 350 ISO images creating 403 ISO 9660 filesystem 309 ISO Latin1 supplemental character set 116 IVE_HOME 98 J JIPLUGIN ARGS 98 jabber 346 Japanese input method 196 jar file extension 135 Java archives 135 Java plugins arguments to 98 Jaz disks 319 jed 151 JPEG graphicalimages 135 jpg file extension 135 Julian dates 188 February 1 2005 K kbd device 320 kbd file extension 135 kbddev 320 kdef file extension 135 kernel See also microkernel callouts 158 starting 158 system page 158 key bindings 44 keyboard 59 keyboards AT style 320 configuring 320 definition files 135 focus assigning 76 international 59 layout 59 LEDs 75 PS 2 320 329 setting 77 shortcuts 93 keys dead 59 keyword index online documentation 82 knowledge base 473 Korean input method 196 kpim 196 ksh Korn shell 3 20 42 201 configuring 180 interactive mode 197 key bindings 44 profile 182 shell scripts 201 Index 539 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd L language setting 77 97 105 languages def 97 Launch menu 71 74 76 Shutdown 13 launcher so 74 launchmenu so 74 LD LIBRARY PATH 183 leap days and years 188 led so 75 LEDs keyboard 75 left arrow 39 left handedness adjusting for 77 less 3 52 58 183 206 lib 128 130 libc so NFS 226 libexec 130 libraries location of 128 130 library archives 135 limits channels 468 configurable 461 f
291. information about the network interfaces Name Mtu Network Address Ipkts Ierrs Opkts Oerrs Coll 100 32976 lt Link gt 0 0 0 0 0 February 1 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 259 Running the Internet daemons 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 100 32976 127 en0 1500 lt Link gt enO 1500 10 127 0 0 1 0 00 50 da c8 61 92 21 10 0 0 100 21 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 To display information about the routing table in the full stack use netstat rn the resulting display looks like this Routing tables Flags Refs Use Internet Destination Gateway default 10 0 0 1 UGS 10 10 0 0 100 U 10 0 0 100 10 0 0 100 UH 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 UH 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Mtu Interface end en0 100 100 The table shows that the default route to the gateway was configured 10 0 0 1 Running the Internet daemons If a host is a server it invokes the appropriate daemon to satisfy a client s requests A TCP IP server typically runs the inetd daemon also known as the Internet super server You can start inetd in your machine s re local file see the description of etc re d re sysinit in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts 260 chapter in this guide CAUTION Running inetd lets outside users try to connect to your machine and thus is a potential security issue if you don t configure it properly The inetd daemon listens for connections on some well known ports as defined in etc inetd conf in the TCP IP
292. ing and stopping a block filesystem Mounting and unmounting filesystems 212 Image filesystem 212 Configuring an OS image 213 dev shmem RAM filesystem 213 QNX 4 filesystem 214 Filesystem robustness 220 DOS filesystem 220 CD ROM filesystem 221 Linux Ext2 filesystem 222 Flash filesystems 223 CIFS filesystem 223 NFS filesystem 224 Setting up NFS 225 NFS server 226 NFS client 226 Package filesystem 227 Packages in their repositories 228 Spill directory 230 Underlying filesystem 232 Control files 232 Patches 232 Inflator filesystem 233 Troubleshooting 233 211 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 235 What is Qnet 237 When should you use Qnet 237 Contents ix 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd x 13 Contents Conventions for naming nodes 238 Software components for Qnet networking 240 Starting Qnet 241 Creating useqnet 242 Starting the network manager protocols and drivers 243 Checking out the neighborhood 244 Troubleshooting 244 Is Qnet running 245 Are io net and the drivers running 245 Is the Qnet protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed 246 Is the network card functional 246 How do I get diagnostic information 247 Is the Qnet version correct 248 Is the hostname unique 248 Are the nodes in the same domain 249 TCP IP Networking 251 Overview of TCP IP 253 Clients and servers 253 Hosts and gateways 253 Nameservers 254 Routing 255 Software components for TCP IP netwo
293. ing to a user ID and group ID if they re defined in etc passwd and etc group e g 1s 1 displays the names not the IDs of the user and group who own each file e utilities and applications accept user names as input as an alternative to numeric user IDs Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 17 What does a user account do 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd e shells expand username paths into actual pathnames based on users home directory information stored in their accounts Groups are used to convey similar permissions to groups of users on the system Entries in etc passwd and etc group define group membership while the group ID of a running program and the group ownership and permission settings of individual files and directories determine the file permission granted to a group member When you log in you re in the group specified in etc passwd You can switch to another of your groups by using the newgrp utility User accounts vs user IDs login lookup and permissions Once you ve logged in the numeric user ID of your running programs and system resources determines your programs ability to access resources and perform operations such as sending signals to other processes Textual names are used only by utilities and applications that need to convert between names and numeric IDs Changing user names groups user IDs and so on in the account database has no effect on your permission to ac
294. ion tab 87 preferences 86 User Info tab 88 vpim 196 Index 559 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd vt100 terminal type 39 W waitfor 328 wav file extension 135 we 50 web browser 84 web servers embedded 262 365 security 370 whence 55 which 54 wildcards 48 205 Win modems not supported 351 window manager configuration files 126 menu 75 options 76 starting 101 windows colors changing 76 dragging 76 hotkeys 95 titles alignment 76 Windows Microsoft commands Neutrino equivalents 59 234 compared to Neutrino 4 end of line characters converting 4 208 terminal types fortelnet 39 time setting 197 variables Neutrino equivalents 63 560 Index wm 126 wm menu 103 wmswitch hotkeys 96 Word documents editing 148 word processing 5 words command line editing 43 counting 50 Workspace editor 151 workspace Photon 69 hotkeys 95 96 world view 74 75 worldview so 75 write UNIX command 3 write 448 449 451 458 writer permission 132 ws 151 X x86 booting 157 BIOS 159 buildfiles 119 481 console driver 12 41 directories 118 limits 470 parallel port manager 334 resources database 163 serial adapter 331 xargs 52 205 xcopy DOS command 59 xml file extension 135 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index Y years leap 188 Z zap 418 zero 122 zip file extension 135 Zip disks 319 February 1 2005 Index 561
295. ions 135 Troubleshooting 139 Using Editors 141 Choosing an editor 143 Supported editors 144 vi 144 ped 146 Third party editors 148 AbiWord 148 Emacs 149 JED 151 Vim 151 Workspace ws 151 Specifying the default editor 153 Controlling How Neutrino Starts 155 What happens when you boot 157 Loading a Neutrino image 160 diskboot 161 diskroot 164 etc system sysinit 166 Device enumeration 168 oem directory 169 Contents vii 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd viii 10 Contents overrides file 169 Host specific enumerators 171 ete re d re sysinit 171 re local 173 tinit 174 Troubleshooting 174 Configuring Your Environment 177 What happens when you login 179 Customizing your home 180 Configuring your shell 180 etc profile 180 HOME profile 181 ksh s startup file 182 Environment variables 183 Setting PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH 183 Configuration strings 184 Setting the time zone 186 Examples 189 Programming with time zones 192 Customizing Photon 193 Starting applications automatically 193 The right fonts 193 Input methods 196 Terminal types 196 Troubleshooting 196 Writing Shell Scripts 199 What s a script 201 Available shells 201 Running a shell script 203 Example of a Korn shell script 203 Efficiency 207 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 11 12 February 1 2005 Caveat scriptor 207 Working with Filesystems 209 Introduction 211 Setting up start
296. iption A link to the directory fsg Also a link to the directory bitmap Represents a read only file that contains a map of all the blocks on the disk indicating which blocks are used inodes A normal file of at least one block on a longfilenames boot altboot Directories floppy RAM disk and 16 blocks on other disks inodes is a collection of inode entries The first entry is reserved and used as a signature info area The first bytes of the inode file are set to IamTHE inodeFILE An optional file that stores information about files whose names are longer than 48 characters see QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems Represents an OS image file that will be loaded into memory during the standard boot process This file will be of zero length if no boot file exists Represents an OS image file that will be loaded into memory during the alternate boot process This file will be of zero length if no alternate boot file exists A directory is simply a file that has special meaning to the filesystem the file contains a collection of directory entries February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 411 QNX 4 disk structure 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Offset gt 0 i_fname 16 One F 7 physical 16 teres block 20 i first xtnt ofa directory 28 i_xblk 32 i_ftime 0 36 i_mtime 1 40 i_atime 44 i_ctime
297. is an acronym of sorts for Portable Operating System Interface the X alludes to UNIX on which the interface is based preemption The act of suspending the execution of one thread and starting or resuming another The suspended thread is said to have been preempted by the new thread Whenever a lower priority thread is actively consuming the CPU and a higher priority thread becomes READY the lower priority thread is immediately preempted by the higher priority thread 510 Glossary February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd prefix tree The internal representation used by the Process Manager to store the pathname table priority inheritance The characteristic of a thread that causes its priority to be raised or lowered to that of the thread that sent it a message Also used with mutexes Priority inheritance is a method used to prevent priority inversion priority inversion process A condition that can occur when a low priority thread consumes CPU at a higher priority than it should This can be caused by not supporting priority inheritance such that when the lower priority thread sends a message to a higher priority thread the higher priority thread consumes CPU on behalf of the lower priority thread This is solved by having the higher priority thread inherit the priority of the thread on whose behalf it s working A nonschedulable entity which defines the address space and a few
298. is executable a directory or a link add this line to the shell s profile alias ls l1s F 182 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Environment variables Any changes that you make to the profile apply to new shells but not to existing instances For an example of kshrc see the Examples appendix Environment variables Many applications use environment variables to control their behavior For example less gets the width of the terminal or window from the COLUMNS environment variable many utilities write any temporary files in the directory specified by TMPDIR For more information see the Commonly Used Environment Variables appendix of the Utilities Reference When you start a process it inherits a copy of its parent s environment This means that you can set an environment variable in your profile and all your shells and processes inherit it provided that no one in the chain undefines it For example if you have your own bin directory you can add it to your PATH by adding a line like this to your profile export PATH SPATH home username bin If you re the system administrator and you want this change to apply to everyone export the environment variables from etc profile or from a script in etc profile d For more information see the discussion of etc profile earlier in this chapter Setting PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH The login utili
299. it 0 Deferred Transmits 00 sees eee 0 Late Collision on Transmit errors 0 Transmits aborted excessive collisions 0 Transmits aborted excessive deferrals 0 Transmit Underruns 00 eee eee 0 No Carrier on Transmit 45 0 Jabber detected eee eee eee 0 Receive Alignment errors 0 Received packets with CRC errors 0 336 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Network adapters Packets Dropped on receive 0 Ethernet Headers out of range Oversized Packets received Frames with Dribble Bits 0 Total Frames experiencing Collision s 0 The output from nicinfo depends on what the driver supports not all fields are included for all drivers However the output always includes information about the bytes and packets that were transmitted and received The categories shown in the above example are described below When dealing with a network problem start with these e Physical Node ID e Hardware Interrupt e I O Aperture e Packets Transmitted OK e Total Packets Transmitted Bad e Packets Received OK e Received packets with CRC errors Physical Node ID The physical node ID is also known as the Media Access Control MAC address This value is unique to every network card although some models do
300. itable only by a daemon user and daemon group e The lpr program runs with the user ID root and the group ID daemon Running as root lets lpr read any file required Accessibility is verified by calling access see the Library Reference The group ID is used in setting up proper ownership of files in the spooling area for lprrm e Users can t modify control files Control files in a spooling area are made with daemon ownership and group ownership daemon Their mode is 0660 This ensures that users can t modify control files and that no user can remove files except through lprrm e Users may alter files in the spool directory only via the print utilities The spooling programs lpd lprq and lprrm run setuid to root and setgid to group daemon to access spool files and printers Chapter 14 Printing 281 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Local access to queues is controlled with the rg entry in the etc printcap file xrg lprgroup Users must be in the group lprgroup to submit jobs to the specified printer The default is to allow all users access Note that once the files are in the local queue they can be printed locally or forwarded to another host depending on the configuration The print manager authenticates all remote clients The method used is the same as the authentication scheme for rshd see the Utilities Reference The host on which a client resides must be present in etc hos
301. itional programs e mounting libraries for processes that are already running You can also use re local to slay running processes and restart them with different options but this is a heavy handed approach Instead of doing this modify the device enumeration to start the processes with the correct options For more information see Device enumeration earlier in this chapter For example you can e run an NFS or CIFS client to mount a remote filesystem e start inetd to allow users on other machines to access your machine see TCP IP Networking e start 1pd or a specific instance of spooler or both to support printing see Printing e arrange to bypass the login prompt when booting into Photon by adding this usr photon bin Photon 1 usr photon bin phlogin O Uuser password Note that you have to put your password as plain text in your re local but presumably you aren t concerned with security if you want to bypass the login prompt The 0 option to phlogin brings you back to text mode when you terminate your Photon session without the 0 pressing Ctrl Shift Alt Backspace simply logs you in again Alternatively you can set up a user s profile to start Photon with the ph command and then add this command to your re local file Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 173 tinit 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd login f username For more information see login in the
302. l client or Mail User Agent such as Mozilla mutt or elm along with the sendmail delivery agent see the third party repository You might find it useful to run an IMAP or POP server on another machine to host your email if you don t want to configure a local mail delivery using sendmail Or you may avoid using a local email client entirely by using a web based mail service hosted on another machine How Neutrino is unique Neutrino consists of a microkernel and various processes Each process even a device driver runs in its own virtual memory space February 1 2005 Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS 5 How Neutrino is unique 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd DOS fil manac Neutrino microkernel Software bus Charact The QNX Neutrino architecture The advantage of using virtual memory is that one process can t corrupt another process s memory space For more information see The Philosophy of QNX Neutrino in the System Architecture guide Neutrino s most important features are its microkernel architecture and the resource manager framework that takes advantage of it for a brief introduction see Resource managers below Drivers have exactly the same status as other user applications so you debug them using the same high level source aware breakpointing IDE that you d use for user applications This also means that e You aren t also debugging the kernel when you re de
303. l have to start with that You also need to make a place for the local copy which is called your sandbox because we all like playing in sandboxes right and put it in your home directory cd HOME mkdir sandbox cd sandbox Now we need to get our working copy of the repository cvs d HOME cvs checkout or cvs d HOME cvs get The dot for the filename translates to give me the entire repository You ll notice a directory called Cvs in every directory that you ve checked out CVS uses this directory to store information about where in the repository the files belong the versions of the files and so on Don t change any of the information in this directory 380 Chapter 17 e Using CVS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CVS basics CAUTION If you create a new project by copying directories from one part of your sandbox to another don t copy the Cvs directory If you do your project probably won t get stored where you expect in the repository Now that we have a working copy we can create some directories and files to demonstrate how to check in and out We ll start with the standard Hello world C program It s good practice to keep all of your projects in separate directory structures so we ll also create a new directory for our project To make the project directory mkdir myproj Now we have to add this directory to the CVS repository cvs d HOME cvs
304. lears the sticky tags cvs update A February 1 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 387 Concurrent development branching and merging 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Merging or cvs up A What if you need to have both versions checked out You could keep updating your sandbox to use the head as shown above and the branch cvs update r Stella_1 0 but keeping track of which version you re working on could be difficult Instead you can check out the branch in another directory cd cvs mkdir version1 0 cd version1 0 cvs checkout r Stella_1 0 path_to_the _files So you ve made a change in one branch and you need to make it in the other You could edit the files twice but that isn t very efficient Instead you could get CVS to merge one branch onto another It s usually easier to merge a branch onto the head than vice versa To merge the changes in foo c in your Stella_1 0 branch into the version on the head go to where you have the head branch version checked out into your sandbox then type cvs update j Stella_1 0 foo c It s a good idea to check the file to make sure CVS merged the changes correctly never trust a machine Sometimes the changes you made in one branch conflict with those you made in another If this happens CVS displays a c before the filename when you merge the versions CVS leaves both versions of 388 Chapter 17 e Using CVS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Softwar
305. ler OHCI UHCI or EHCI If you don t know what type of controller you re using you can identify it using pci vvv Find the entry for the USB controller to determine the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID You can either find the information on the manufacturer s website www usb org or use the vendor and device IDs to cross reference it at http www pcidatabase com The class codes that appear in the output from pci vvv are Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 327 USB devices 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Class Code Controller Type 0c0300 UCHI 0c0310 OHCI 0c0320 EHCI There might be multiple chips and therefore multiple drivers that you need to load You can also try running just one of the USB stacks if it fails try running another stack Log in as root and start the io usb stack with the appropriate module e OHCI controller devu ohci so e UHCI controller devu uhci so e EHCI controller devu ehci so This should create an entry in dev called dev io usb io usb If you re starting the USB stack and a driver in your startup scripts make sure that you use the wait for command to make sure that dev io usb io usb has appeared before you start the driver For example io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb devu prn When the stack is running start the device drivers as described below USB hubs don t need a driver the stack itself supports them
306. les 419 What to do if your system will no longer boot 422 February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 393 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Introduction Introduction No matter how reliable your hardware and electrical supply are or how sure you are that you Il never accidentally erase all your work it s just common sense to keep backups of your files Backup strategies differ in ease of use speed robustness and cost Although we ll discuss different types of archives below here s a quick summary of the file extensions associated with the different utilities Extension Utility tar pax or tar cpio pax or cpio GZ gzip or gunzip tar gzor tgz tar z ZOr F melt No matter how robust a filesystem is designed to be there will always be situations in the real world where disk corruption will occur Hardware will fail eventually power will be interrupted and so on The QNX 4 filesystem has been designed to tolerate such catastrophes It is based on the principal that the integrity of the filesystem as a whole should be consistent at all times While most data is held in the buffer cache and written after only a short delay critical filesystem data is written immediately Updates to directories inodes extent blocks and the bitmap are forced to disk to ensure that the filesystem structure on disk is never corrupt i e the data on disk should never be internally inconsistent If a cr
307. les to the xargs command which executes the given grep command on each file in turn All of the output from xargs is then passed to less which displays the output one screenful at a time This command uses quoting in various ways to control when the special characters are processed and by which process e If you don t put quotes around the htm1 the shell interprets the and passes to find the list of files in the current directory with an extension of html1 If you quote the htm1 the shell passes the string as is to find which then uses it to match all of the files in this directory and below in the filesystem hierarchy with that extension e Ina similar way if you don t quote the QNX Neut rino string at all the shell generates a list of files that match the pattern Quoting it once QNX Neutrino works for a single invocation of grep but this example has the added complexity of the xargs command e The xargs command takes a command line as its argument and the shell interprets this command line for each item that s passed to xargs If you don t want the QNX Neutrino string to be interpreted by the shell at all you need to put nested quotes around the pattern that you want to pass to grep xargs grep 1 QNX Neutrino Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Shell e The quoting also indicates when you want to execute the less command As given t
308. lesystem is mounted Although the s ext2 so module is equipped to perform a quick test it automatically mounts the filesystem as read only if it detects any significant problems which should be fixed using a filesystem checker Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Flash filesystems This filesystem allows the same characters in a filename as the QNX 4 filesystem see Filenames earlier in this chapter Flash filesystems The Neutrino flash filesystem drivers implement a POSIX compatible filesystem on NOR flash memory devices The flash filesystem drivers are standalone executables that contain both the flash filesystem code and the flash device code There are versions of the flash filesystem driver for different embedded systems hardware as well as PCMCIA memory cards e The components for flash filesystems are available only in the Flash Filesystem amp Embedding Technology Development Kit TDK e Flash filesystems don t include and entries for the current and parent directories The naming convention for the drivers is devf system where system describes the embedded system For example the dev 800fads driver is for the 8300FADS PowerPC evaluation board For information about these drivers see the devf entries in the Utilities Reference For more information on the way Neutrino handles flash filesystems see e mkefs and flashct1 in the Uti
309. let you assign your own address However this is rare and generally found only on embedded systems If the value represented is FFFFFF FFFFFF or 000000 000000 there s likely something wrong with the setup of the hardware or you need to assign a MAC address to the card Check the hardware manual to see whether or not this is the case February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 337 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd If the hardware didn t get set up correctly the MAC address may not always appear as shown above The first six digits of the MAC address are the vendor ID Check the entries against the list at http www cavebear com CaveBear Ethernet vendor html to see if the vendor ID is valid Then check the card ID the last 6 digits The card ID should be something semi random A display similar to 444444 is likely incorrect Current Physical Node ID The current physical node ID is shown if a card has been set up to spoof the ID of another card Basically a parameter is passed to the driver telling it that the node s ID is actually the value that appears Depending on the card some drivers will accept this What spoofing does on a higher software level is filter out the packets that were meant for this node ID This method is considerably slower than if you let the card filter out the packets on a hardware level Because the card is set in promiscuous mode it has to accept all pack
310. level sensitive mode the IRQ is considered active whenever the corresponding hardware line is active Contrast edge sensitive A filename a pointer to the file s contents Contrast symbolic link A parcel of bytes passed from one process to another The OS attaches no special meaning to the content of a message the data in a message has meaning for the sender of the message and for its receiver but for no one else Message passing not only allows processes to pass data to each other but also provides a means of synchronizing the execution of several processes As they send receive and reply to messages processes undergo various changes of state that affect when and for how long they may run Data about data for a filesystem metadata includes all the overhead and attributes involved in storing the user data itself such as the name of a file the physical blocks it uses modification and access timestamps and so on A part of the operating system that provides the minimal services used by a team of optional cooperating processes which in turn provide the higher level OS functionality The microkernel itself lacks filesystems and many other services normally expected of an OS those services are provided by optional processes Glossary 507 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd mountpoint mutex The location in the pathname space where a resource manager has registered itself For example a CD ROM files
311. list 360 Greenwich Mean Time GMT See UTC Coordinated Universal Time grep 47 50 52 205 group 20 124 entries 22 users removing 29 groups adding 31 Index 535 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd changing 18 creating 30 files and directories specifying for 132 IDs 17 adding 31 assigning 28 passwords not supported 22 permissions 18 30 running programs as a specific 133 groups shelf 73 GTF See generic timing formula GUI 69 gunzip 395 401 402 gzip 135 395 401 GPL issues 402 H h file extension 135 half duplex 339 hard disks 311 backing up 405 filesystems 128 mounting 120 hardware clock UTC or local time 167 197 cursor 353 detecting 127 129 168 307 333 flow control 332 interrupts 340 supported 307 473 536 Index hd 3 head branch 387 help documentation online 79 473 keyword index 82 searching 80 technical support 473 usage messages 56 help directory 130 help DOS command 59 Helpviewer 79 135 adding documentation 103 search database generating 166 table of contents files 135 Hewlett Packard printers 296 HID Human Interface Device 329 hidden files 65 114 wildcard characters and 49 hidview 329 hogs 445 HOME environment variable 20 63 180 Home key 39 home directory 18 20 22 26 28 46 128 180 root 129 HOMEDRIVE DOS variable 63 HOMEPATH DOS variable 63 host cfg directory 171 173 230 Host Signal Processor modems See HSP m
312. listens for possible collisions or any errors These errors occur when a NIC is transmitting a frame on the network and it notices that it doesn t see its own carrier wave much February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 345 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd like when you are dialing a number on the phone and you can hear the dial tones being pressed These errors are caused by plugging and unplugging cables on the network and by poor optical power supplied to the Fiber Optic Transceiver FOT Jabber detected You typically see this error only on a 1OMbit network It means that a network card is continuing to transmit after a packet has been sent This error shouldn t occur on faster networks because they allow a larger frame size Receive Alignment errors A receive alignment error means that the card has received a damaged frame from the network When one of these errors occurs it also triggers an FCS Frame Check Sequence error These errors occur if the received frame size isn t a multiple of eight bits one byte These errors are commonly due to faulty wiring cable runs that are out of the IEEE 802 3 specification a faulty NIC or possibly a faulty hub or switch To narrow down this problem do a binary division of the network to help eliminate the source Received packets with CRC errors An entry in this field indicates the number of times on a hardware level the card received cor
313. lities Reference e Filesystems in the System Architecture guide e Building Embedded Systems CIFS filesystem CIFS the Common Internet File System protocol lets a client workstation perform transparent file access over a network to a Windows system or a UNIX system running an SMB server It was February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 223 NFS filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd formerly known as SMB or Server Message Block protocol which was used to access resources in a controlled fashion over a LAN File access calls from a client are converted to CIFS protocol requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual filesystem operation and then sends a response back to the client CIFS runs on top of TCP IP and uses DNS The f s cifs filesystem manager is a CIFS client operating over TCP IP To use it you must have an SMB server and a valid login on that server The fs cifs utility is primarily intended for use as a client with Windows machines although it also works with any SMB server e g OS 2 Peer LAN Manager and SAMBA The s cifs filesystem manager requires a TCP IP transport layer such as the one provided by io net with the full TCP IP stack npm tcpip so The CIES filesystem manager doesn t work properly with the tiny TCP IP transport layer provided by npm ttcpip so For information about passwords and some examples
314. local IP addresses to hosts in a small network It uses a peer negotiation scheme to determine the link local IP address to use instead of relying on a central server February 1 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 263 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Using PPPoE 264 PPPoE stands for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It s a method of encapsulating your data for transmission over a bridged Ethernet topology PPPoE is a specification for connecting users on an Ethernet network to the Internet through a broadband connection such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem Using PPPoE and a broadband modem LAN users can gain individual authenticated access to high speed data networks By combining Ethernet and the Point to Point Protocol PPP PPPoE provides an efficient way to create a separate connection to a remote server for each user Access billing and choice of service are managed on a per user basis rather than a per site basis It has the advantage that neither the telephone company nor the Internet service provider ISP needs to provide any special support Unlike dialup connections DSL and cable modem connections are always on Since a number of different users are sharing the same physical connection to the remote service provider a way is needed to keep track of which user traffic should go to where and which user should be billed PPPoE lets each user re
315. m Most files in Neutrino have the following overall structure Signatures TMONX in dot entry of each directory Tay VA T dir SS S IamXblk in header of each extent block 4 S s dir file 6 SS Extent ME blocks 0 2 lt 0 0 E AEE a E m A Extent 1 Extent 2 Extent 3 Extent n QNX 4 file structure File maintenance utilities If a crash occurs you can use the following file maintenance and recovery utilities 416 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd File maintenance utilities fdisk dinit February 1 2005 e fdisk e dinit e chkfsys e dcheck e zap e spatch This section gives a brief description of these utilities for more information see the Utilities Reference The fdisk utility creates and maintains the partition block on a hard disk This block is compatible with other operating systems and may be maintained by other OS versions of fdisk although ours has the advantage of recognizing QNX specific information If the partition loader is missing or damaged fdisk can create it We recommend that you keep a hard copy of the partition table information for every disk in your network The dinit utility creates but the QNX 4 filesystem maintains the following e loader block e root block e bitmap blocks e root direc
316. m in Working with Filesystems Conventions for naming nodes 238 In order to resolve node names the Qnet protocol follows certain conventions node name A character string that identifies the node you re talking to This name must be unique in the domain and can t contain slashes or periods The default node name is the value of the CS_HOSTNAME configuration string If your hostname is localhost the default when you Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Conventions for naming nodes node domain first boot Qnet uses a hostname based on your NIC hardware s MAC address so that nodes can still communicate A character string that npm qnet so adds to the end of the node name Together the node name and node domain must form a string that s unique for all nodes that are talking to each other The default is the value of the CS DOMAIN configuration string fully qualified node name FQNN network directory The string formed by concatenating the node name and node domain For example if the node name is karl and the node domain name is qnx com the resulting FQNN is kar1 qnx com A directory in the pathname space implemented by npm qnet so Each network directory there can be more than one on a node has an associated node domain The default is net as used in the examples in this chapter i The ent
317. m amp Embedding TDK 223 233 flash filesystems 223 467 read only 233 flashetl 233 FLASHQUALITY 97 floppy disks DOS formatting 311 driver 310 filesystems 127 mounting 120 flow control 332 focus assigning 76 font_repository 194 font traplist 195 fontadmin 76 193 fontdesc 194 fontdir 194 fontdynamic 195 fontext 195 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index fontkey 195 fontmap 195 fontopts 195 fontorient 195 fontpreferred 195 fonts anti aliasing 76 Asian 76 file extensions 135 installing 195 maps 126 server 100 121 setting up 193 substitutions 76 fontsleuth 195 fopen 448 format DOS command 59 FQNN fully qualified node name 239 fragmentation reducing 215 Frame Check Sequence See FCS fread 448 457 free software 473 freeze 401 fs_qnx4 h 407 fs cd so 221 309 fs cifs 224 fs dos so 221 fs ext2 so 222 fs nfs2 226 fs nfs3 226 fs pkg 227 fs qnx4 so 214 fsck UNIX command 3 fsync 453 ftpd 261 configuration 124 February 1 2005 ftpd conf 124 ftpusers 124 ftruncate 453 458 ftype DOS command 59 full duplex 339 fully qualified node name FQNN 239 furite 448 G gateways 253 generic timing formula GTF 358 get CVS command 380 390 getconf 185 216 461 getenv 192 getmac DOS command 59 getrlimit 469 ghostimages 406 GIF graphical images 135 graphical user interface 69 graphics drivers settings 77 starting 101 graphics modes 352 graphics trap
318. m which is the default under Neutrino and is compatible with the older QNX 4 OS For more information see the Working with Filesystems chapter in this guide Everything is a file In a Neutrino system almost everything is a file devices data and even Services are all typically represented as files This lets you work with local and remote resources easily from the command line or through any program that works with files Types of files February 1 2005 Neutrino supports the following types of files and 1s 1 uses the character shown in parentheses to identify the type Regular Directory d Symbolic link 1 A file that contains user data such as C code HTML and data For example home fred myprog c Conceptually a directory is something that contains files and other directories For example home fred A directory is implemented as a disk file that stores a list of the names of files and other directories Each filename is associated with an inode information node that defines the file s existence For more information see QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems An additional name for a file or directory For example usr bin more is a symbolic link to usr bin less For more information see Symbolic links in Working with Filesystems Chapter 6 e Working with Files 109 Filenames and pathnames 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Named special n A shared memory
319. mage FileSystem For more information see Building Embedded Systems and mkifs in the Utilities Reference dev shmem RAM filesystem Neutrino provides a simple RAM based filesystem that allows read write files to be placed under dev shmem This filesystem isn t a true filesystem because it lacks features such as subdirectories It also doesn t include and entries for the current and parent directories The files in the dev shmem directory are advertised as name special files S IFNAME which fools many utilities such as gzip and more that expect regular files S IFREG For this reason many utilities might not work for the RAM filesystem This filesystem is mainly used by the shared memory system of procnto In special situations e g when no filesystem is available you can use the RAM filesystem to store file data There s nothing to stop a file from consuming all free RAM if this happens other processes might have problems You ll use the RAM filesystem mostly in tiny embedded systems where you need a small fast temporary storage filesystem but you don t need persistent storage across reboots The filesystem comes for free with procnto and doesn t require any setup or device driver You can simply create files under dev shmem and grow them to any size depending on RAM resources February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 213 QNX 4 filesystem 2005 QNX Software System
320. me 126 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Where everything is stored fts February 1 2005 directory For more information see the description of etc default passwd in the documentation for passwd and the description of profile in Configuring Your Environment etc system A directory that includes files and directories used when you boot the system including e etc system sysinit the main script for initializing the system e etc system config nophoton a file indicating that you don t want to start Photon e etc system config useqnet a file indicating that you want to start Qnet For more information see the Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing chapter e etc system enum the location of configuration files for the enumerators For more information see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter For more information see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter etc timezone A directory where phlocale looks for a list of possible time zones see Setting the time zone in Configuring Your Environment Additional filesystems are mounted under s See Working with Filesystems in this guide and devb and mount in the Utilities Reference This directory can include s cdn CD ROM filesystems s dn Floppy disk filesystems Chapter 6 e Working with Files 127 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX
321. memory card F Not configured Window is part of previous configuration Window is an unlockable window Window is a temporary window Machine booted from this device or W Locked exclusive locked read write Locked read only Level mode IRQs Shared IRQs Attribute memory gt nF wD X W H G Wide 16 bit memory access PID The process ID of the process attached to the PC Card driver devp pecard Base The base address of the PC Card This information is useful for starting device drivers Size The number of bytes in the I O port range IRQ The PC Card s IRQ This information is useful when starting the driver manually February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 325 USB devices 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd USB devices A Universal Serial Bus USB provides a hot swappable common interface for USB devices e g network input character I O audio and hubs For more information on USB USB specifications and a list of frequently asked questions see www usb org 326 If you don t know what kind of USB device you re using you can use the usb utility to identify it usb vvv less The output from this command looks like this Device Address Vendor Product Device Release USB Spec Release Serial Number Class Max PacketSize0O Languages Current Frame Configurations Configuration Attributes Max Power Interfaces Interface Class Subclass Protocol Endpoints Endpoint At
322. ment for USB driver HEE aE AE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE devu uhci so libusbdi so data c devc ser8250 HEE aE AE A AEE AE AE A AEA EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE uncomment for REMOTE_DEBUG gdb or Momentics HAE AEE AE AE A EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE E EEEE EEEE EE devc pty qconn FEAE AE EHE AE FE EAE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE E HE FE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE AE HE FE AE FE HE HE FE FEAE HE FE FE AE E FE FE FE AE A FE AE E FE FE EHE EE FE HEHHEE RA uncomment for PCI server SEAR AE AE HEHE HE AE AEE HE A FE E HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE AE HE FE AE FE E HE FE AE AE HE FE FE FE HE HE FE AE AE HE FE FE AE A FE FE FEAE HE FE HHH pci malta pci EAE AE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HE HE uncomment for FLASH driver EHE EHE FE AE FE E HE FE HE FE HE HE FE HE FE HE FE AE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE E FE FE HE FE HH HE devf malta flashctl EHEHE AEE HE HE A AE AE E HE FE FE AE HE FE FE FE AE HE HE FE AE AE HE HE HE FE AE HE HE FE FE AE HE FE FE A
323. missions on all the files and directories are read only e No files are owned by user ID 2 because Slinger runs at user ID 2 and you don t want Slinger to own the files These precautions will help prevent anybody from giving your machine a new password file or tampering with your web pages For more information see the Securing Your System chapter in this guide Examples Configuration We recommend that you put your documents and scripts in separate directories In this example the documents are in the usr local httpd directory the root document is index html and the CGI scripts are in usr www cgi bin export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd February 1 2005 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 371 Examples 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Script export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin slinger amp The following example is the wrong way to configure Slinger Anyone can download the scripts because the documents and scripts are in the same directory export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr www export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www slinger amp To configure Slinger to start with SSI and enable debugging you can use these commands export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index shtml export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin slinger des amp Here are two examples of a simple CGI script that displays a randoml
324. mode 12 Once you ve logged in 12 Logging out 13 Photon mode 13 Text mode 14 Shutting down and rebooting 14 Contents iii 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 3 Managing User Accounts 15 What does a user account do 17 User accounts vs user IDs login lookup and permissions 18 What happens when you log in 19 Account database 20 etc passwd 21 etc group 22 etc shadow 23 etc pwlock 23 Managing your own account 24 Changing your password 24 Forgot your password 25 Managing other accounts 25 Adding users 27 Removing accounts 29 Defining groups 30 Troubleshooting 32 4 Using the Command Line 35 Command line or GUI 37 Processing a command 37 Character device drivers 38 Input modes 38 Terminal support 38 Telnet 39 The keyboard ata glance 39 Physical and virtual consoles 40 Shell 42 Editing the command line 43 Command and filename completion 44 Reserved words 45 Entering multiple commands 45 Aliases 46 iv _ Contents February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd February 1 2005 Substitutions 46 Redirecting input and output 49 Pipes 50 Quoting special characters 51 History recalling commands 53 Shell scripts 53 Utilities 54 Understanding command syntax 55 Displaying online usage messages 56 Executing commands on another node or tty 57 Priorities 57 Basic commands 58 International keyboards 59 Neutrino for MS DOS users 59 DOS commands and their Neutrino equivalents 59 MS DOS local command interp
325. mote site session learn each other s network addresses during an initial exchange called discovery Once a session is established between an individual user and the remote site for example an Internet service provider the session can be monitored for billing purposes Many apartment houses hotels and corporations are now providing shared Internet access over DSL lines using Ethernet and PPPoE A PPPoE connection is composed of a client and a server Both the client and server work over any Ethernet like interface It s used to hand out IP addresses to the clients based on the user and workstation if desired as opposed to workstation only authentication The PPPoE server creates a point to point connection for each client Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters Establishing a PPPoE session Use the pppoed daemon to negotiate a PPPoE session The npm pppoe so shared object provides PPP to Ethernet services Start ie net with this shared object For example io net del900 pttcpip ppppmgr ppppoe Then make a session to any server using the file etc ppp pppoe up to start pppd pppoed Make a session to the server with a name of PPPOE __GATEWAY pppoed name PPPOE_GATEWAY Once the PPPoE session is established pppoed uses pppd to create a point to point connection over the PPPoE session The pppd daemon gets a local TCP IP configur
326. mountpoints 2 Show the drivers cut d f2 lt mountpoints sort uniq xargs i pidin P FanQ lt pidlist grep v pid name February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 233 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 3 Show the mountpoints for the specified process ID grep pid mountpoints 4 Show the date of the specified driver use i drivername This procedure which approximates the functionality of the Windows XP driverquery command shows the drivers programs that have mountpoints in the pathname space that are currently running it doesn t show those that are merely installed 234 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 Chapter 12 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing In this chapter What is Qnet 237 When should you use Qnet 237 Conventions for naming nodes 238 Software components for Qnet networking 240 Starting Qnet 241 Checking out the neighborhood 244 Troubleshooting 244 February 1 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 235 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What is Qnet What is Qnet A Neutrino native network is a group of interconnected workstations running only Neutrino In this network a program can transparently access any resource whether it s a file a device or a process on any other node a computer or a workstation in your local subnetwork You can even run prog
327. mple network looks like this box1 192 0 0 2 lt gt 192 0 0 1 Gateway 10 9 0 1 lt gt whole network 10 The box1 is internal machine the Gateway is the one running lsm ipfilter so The 10 9 0 1 is suppose the external internet On Gateway start io net like this io net d epic d speedo p tcpip forward ifconfig en0 10 9 0 1 ifconfig enl 192 0 0 1 mount Ttcpip lsm ipfilter so Now the rules first NAT rules map en0 192 0 0 0 8 gt 10 9 0 1 32 proxy port ftp ftp tcp map en0 192 0 0 0 8 gt 10 9 0 1 32 portmap tcp udp 20000 40000 mssclamp 1452 map en0 192 0 0 0 8 gt 10 9 0 1 32 The first line tells NAT to using the builtin ftp proxy The second line tells NAT to mapping any TCP UDP packet on en0 from 192 0 0 0 8 to 10 9 0 1 32 The lt num gt is the netmask It also tells NAT map the original port into a port range between 20000 40000 the mssclamp 1452 is optional in case your external interface has MTU less than 1500 for example a ppp0 running pppoe have MTU as 1492 The third line tells NAT mapping any packet if they are not matching above 2 This basically make ICMP packet being mapped I H HHH rdr en1 10 9 0 1 32 port 80 gt intra qnx com port 80 tcp This rdr rule says that if someone tries to access port 80 on 10 9 0 1 redirect it to intra qnx com February 1 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 495 Glossary February 1 2005 Glossary 497 2005 QNX Software Systems
328. must decide where the repository is to reside For this example it s SHOME evs To create an empty repository enter the following command cvs d HOME cvs init If you look in HOME evs you ll see a directory called CVSROOT It contains internal administrative files for CVS The d option to evs tells CVS where to find the repository The init command tells CVS to create a new repository The d option is considered a global option because it appears before the init command The general format of a CVS command is evs global options command command specific options file names Once you ve created the repository you need to edit these files in the CVSROOT directory readers A list of the users who can only read from the repository February 1 2005 Chapter 17 e Using CVS 379 CVS basics 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd writers A list of those who can read from and write to the repository A user can t be in both files Getting files in and out of the repository There are two ways of getting source into the repository adding new files or importing an existing directory tree Let s look at creating new files first Since we re going to be working with a new repository you have to first create the local working copy But there s nothing there is there You can check out the CVSROOT directory mentioned in the previous section as you can any other directory Since that s all you have you l
329. n dev console CD ROM block devices see devb in the Utilities Reference for driver information Text mode console TTY device see devc con in the Utilities Reference The device that s used for diagnostic log messages on a full x86 system this is a write only device Chapter 6 e Working with Files 119 Where everything is stored 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd dev f dn dev hdn dev hdntn dev io net dev mem managed by the system logger slogger Buildfiles for embedded systems may configure a link from this path to another device such as a serial port See slogger in the Utilities Reference Floppy disk block devices see devb fdc in the Utilities Reference for driver details Hard disk block devices data representing an entire drive spanning all partitions see devb in the Utilities Reference Hard disk partition block devices the data in these devices is a subset of that represented by the corresponding hdn file see devb in the Utilities Reference A directory owned and operated by io net under which you can find files relating to the network devices for your various LANs C programs can perform devcti operations on these files to interact with the driver e g to obtain driver statistics A device that represents all physical memory dev mq dev mqueue dev null dev parn dev pci A pathname space where entries for message queues appear A bit bucket
330. n the system automatically starts phlogin2 or phlogin to display a login dialog Enter your user name or click your user icon enter your password and then click Login Text mode If your system is configured to boot into text mode the system automatically starts the Login utility which prompts you for your user name and then your password If you type an invalid user name the system prompts you for the password anyway This avoids giving clues to anyone who s trying to break into the system Text mode on an x86 machine could be on a physical console supplied by deve con or deve tcon On any other type of machine you could be connecting to the target via a serial port or TCP IP connection Once you ve logged in After you ve logged in the system automatically runs the home username profile script This script lets you customize your working environment without affecting other users For more information see Configuring Your Environment To change your password use the passwd command This utility prompts you for your current and new passwords see Managing your own account in Managing User Accounts 12 Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Logging out To log in as a different user enter login at the command prompt and then enter the user s name and password The su switch user ID utility also lets you run as another user
331. n from starting when you boot Type touch etc system config nophoton and reboot This reduces the number of processes that the system runs when it starts Faster boot times Here are a few tips to help you speed up booting e If your system s setup is static you can set up its device drivers yourself instead of running the enumerators e Remove as much as you can from the system initialization files and from the OS image if necessary For more information see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide Filesystems Here are the basic steps to improving the performance of your filesystems February 1 2005 1 Optimize disk hardware and driver options This is most important on non x86 targets and systems without hard drives e g Microdrive Compact Flash Not using the fastest available DMA mode or degrading to PIO can easily affect Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 447 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd the speed by a factor of ten For more information see Connecting Hardware 2 Optimize the filesystem options Determine how you want to balance system robustness and performance see below Concentrate on the cache and vnode options the other sizes scale themselves to these The default cache is 15 of the total RAM or 10MB whichever is smaller This might be too small for intensive use Set the commit option either globally or as a mount option to
332. n get_data cgi foo the get _data cgi script found in usr www cgi bin is executed and foo is sent as pathname information to get data cgi The foo directory is stored in the PATH INFO environment variable which is used to send extra path information Slinger sets several environment variables which can be used by CGI scripts For more information see slinger in the Utilities Reference SSI method Server Side Includes SSI is a type of command language that can be embedded in HTML files With SSI you can add dynamic content to your HTML Slinger uses the PATH and CMD INT environment variables to provide information to the SSI command exec Using dynamic HTML clients can offer interactive realtime features on their web pages 368 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Dynamic HTML Clients can create dynamic HTML by placing SSI tokens in the HTML code of their web pages The SSI token contains a command that s handled by Slinger While transmitting the HTML code Slinger replaces a token with HTML data based on the tag contained in the SSI token For example the embedded server can e execute utilities at user defined points in an HTML document the output of these utilities can be optionally inserted into the document e insert contents of other HTML files at a user defined point e handle conditional statements e g if break goto so you can define wha
333. n it as a dot file e A script won t run if it contains DOS end of line characters If you edit a Neutrino script on a Windows machine use the textto utility with the 1 option to convert the file to the format used by the QNX 4 filesystem 208 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts February 1 2005 Chapter 11 Working with Filesystems In this chapter Introduction 211 Setting up starting and stopping a block filesystem 211 Mounting and unmounting filesystems 212 Image filesystem 212 dev shmem RAM filesystem 213 QNX 4 filesystem 214 DOS filesystem 220 CD ROM filesystem 221 Linux Ext2 filesystem 222 Flash filesystems 223 CIFS filesystem 223 NFS filesystem 224 Package filesystem 227 Inflator filesystem 233 Troubleshooting 233 February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 209 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Introduction Introduction Neutrino provides a variety of filesystems so that you can easily access DOS Linux as well as native QNX 4 disks The Filesystems chapter of the System Architecture guide describes their classes and features The System Architecture guide sometimes describes features that haven t yet been implemented For example io cam doesn t exist as a process the devb drivers are still processes instead of shared objects Under Neutrino e You can dynamically start and stop filesystems e Multiple filesystems may run concurrently e Applications are
334. n of the QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2G 1 Directory size No practical limit although the files that the directory uses to manage its contents are limited to 2G 1 bytes which works out to approximately 33 million files in a single directory You wouldn t want to do that though as directory scans are linear they d be very slow Filesystem size 2G x 512 limited by the disk driver 764 Disk size bytes limited by the disk driver 464 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystem limits Ext2 filesystem The limits for Linux Ext2 filesystems include Filename length Pathname length File size Directory size Filesystem size Disk size 255 bytes 1024 bytes 2G 1 2G 1 directories are files with inode and filename information as data 2G x 512 264 bytes limited by the disk driver DOS FAT12 16 32 filesystem The limits for DOS FAT12 16 32 filesystems include February 1 2005 Filename length Pathname length File size Directory size 255 bytes 260 bytes 2G 1 uses a 32 bit filesystem format Depends on the type of filesystem e The root directory of FAT12 16 is special in that it s pregrown and can t increase You choose the size when you format and is typically 512 entries FAT32 has no such limit e Neutrino s FAT12 16 filesystem is limited to
335. n syslogd and examine the syslog file for logged system messages 304 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 Chapter 15 Connecting Hardware In this chapter Introduction 307 PCI AGP devices 308 CD ROMs 309 DVDs 310 Floppy disks 310 Hard disks 311 Input devices 320 Audio cards 322 PCCARD and PCMCIA cards 323 USB devices 326 Character devices 331 Network adapters 334 Modems 347 Video cards 352 February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 305 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Introduction Introduction When you boot a Neutrino desktop system it starts a device enumerator a manager that detects most hardware devices The enumerator loads a set of configuration files from etc system enum devices that define what your system should do e g start a specific driver when you add or remove hardware You can edit the enumerator s configuration files if necessary For more information see Controlling How Neutrino Starts in this guide and enum devices in the Utilities Reference An embedded Neutrino system typically has specific hardware so when the system boots it s likely to explicitly start the appropriate drivers You can find a list of currently supported hardware in the Developer Support Center area of our website http www qnx com The website lists the chipsets and hardware that we ve tested with Neutrino However many times there are slight variants of chipsets that will work with the d
336. n the etc system enum directory Here s some sample code from a configuration file device pci ven 2222 dev 1111 168 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Device enumeration uniq sernum devc ser 1 driver devc ser8250 u sernum ioport1 irq This code directs the enumerator to do the following when it detects device 1111 from vender 2222 1 Set sernum to the next unique serial device number starting at 1 2 Start the deve ser8250 driver with the provided options the device enumerator sets the ioport and irq variables To detect new hardware or specify any additional options you can extend the enumerator configuration files in the following ways e an oem directory e an overrides file e ahost specific set of enumeration files as described below The enumerator reads and concatenates the contents of all configuration files under the chosen directory before it starts processing For details on the different command line options and a description of the syntax for the configuration files see enum devices in the Utilities Reference oem directory If you re an OEM and you ve written any device drivers create an oem directory under etc system enum to contain configuration files for the devices overrides file If you need to set up devices or options that are specific to your particular system configuration create an overrid
337. name 114 135 extents 215 locating extent blocks 413 414 structure 416 external modems 349 F fat embedded shell fesh 202 FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 filesystems 221 465 fc DOS command 59 FCS Frame Check Sequence 346 fdisk 214 405 417 reporting errors 423 fesh 202 fiber cables 339 FIFO special files 110 file 112 139 file descriptors maximum 469 File Manager 78 file associations 103 FILE variables 451 filenames about 110 completing 44 extensions 114 135 generating 48 205 hyphen starting with 66 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index international characters 116 long enabling 215 longer than 16 characters 413 maximum length 216 461 relationship to inode entries 413 rules 115 valid characters CD ROM 221 DOS 221 Ext2 222 NFS 225 QNX4 216 wildcards 48 205 fileno 452 dev shmem under 213 about 109 archiving 398 400 associations 103 backing up 395 blocks examining and restoring 422 checking integrity 416 420 compressing 233 401 concatenating 58 contents searching 47 205 converting for printing 286 296 copying 49 58 485 decompressing 233 402 deleting 58 485 permissions 134 without returning used blocks 418 displaying one screenful at a time 58 February 1 2005 extents 215 413 414 finding 47 205 former users 29 group ownership 132 hidden 65 114 wildcard characters and 49 inodes 216 413 links 216 413 maximum number of 463 listing 58
338. nd a small microkernel This modular architecture makes Photon fast flexible and inherently capable of network distributed computing Your workspace When you start Photon for the first time you re prompted to set up your graphics card and settings February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 69 Overview of Photon 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 70 When Photon starts you see your workspace which is an area where you can run applications The workspace consists of the taskbar the shelf and the desktop IB Welkome E Beta into Help internet amp Voyager WD ovoler connect utilities Bo File anager E caicutstor By Region ew eestor B Terminal BE Terminal char QNX Momentics D Find TR system nfor G nage Viewer GP Snapshot Multimedia Games ED video Poker Othello E Columns h Peo Q sonare Configure System Monitor CD Player by Launch wed 20 anisonra Photon s workspace including the taskbar shelf and desktop The desktop is the main part of the screen It s where application windows appear In Photon the desktop is actually a view called a virtual console into a much larger desktop space which is three desktops wide by three desktops high You can run applications in different consoles and switch consoles by using keyboard shortcuts or the world view in the shelf If you right click on the desktop you see th
339. nd on a separate line For example to start the Photon editor when you start Photon include this line ped amp This file isn t a shell script so don t set any environment variables in it The right fonts The Photon environment supports a wide variety of font types Any Unicode font should work inside of the Photon environment To configure your fonts run the Photon Font Administration tool fontadmin This tool lets you set up font mappings set global options for fonts and configure Asian Font options Font mappings let you tell the font server what font to substitute for another if the requested font isn t installed or doesn t contain the requested symbol If the symbol can t be found in any mapped font the system displays an empty box in place of the symbol The global options for fonts include Always Anti Alias This turns on anti aliasing which helps fonts look crisp and clean on the screen at practically any resolution Strict International Support If enabled the font manager uses the missing glyph and the font family style and size to locate a font to provide a February 1 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 193 Customizing Photon 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd substitute glyph If this option is disabled only the missing glyph is used to locate a substitute Enabling this option may provide more uniform text output but it significantly decreases performance
340. nd your account s login shell However the graphical login doesn t start your login shell as an interactive program it runs your login shell with the arguments c usr bin ph A N CAUTION If your login shell is something other than bin sh or bin ksh you might not be able to log in at all using phlogin2 or phlogin The ph command launches the Photon desktop environment From the Photon desktop you can start a command line interpreter i e shell in a pterm window This shell is the one identified by the SHELL environment variable Account database The account database consists of the following files listed with the appropriate access permissions 20 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Account database File Owner Group Permissions etc passwd root root rw r r etc group root root rw r r etc shadow root root rw etc pwlock root root rw r r Note that anyone can read etc passwd This lets standard utilities find information about users The encrypted password isn t stored in this file it s stored in etc shadow which only root has permission to read This helps prevent attempts to decrypt the passwords To protect the security of your user community make sure you don t change these permissions etc passwd February 1 2005 Each line in etc passwd is in this format username has pw userid group
341. ndom numbers for encryption 172 setuid and setgid commands 134 432 Trojan horse programs 54 433 viruses 433 web server 370 sed 202 seedres 163 self 129 sem 121 semaphores limits 469 named February 1 2005 manager mqueue 166 pathname space 121 sendmail 5 separators shelf 74 ser 348 serial mice 320 329 serial ports 110 121 multiport 333 performance 333 Server Side Includes See SSI servers CVS 390 font 100 121 Internet super server 260 Photon 101 121 PPPoE 264 running chkfsys on 420 TCP IP 253 web embedded 262 365 security 370 services 91 390 sessions limits 468 setconf 185 187 setenv 192 setgid 133 setrlimit 469 470 setuid 133 432 setvbuf 448 452 456 sh 42 201 See also ksh Korn shell SH 4 directories 118 limits 470 shadow 20 entries 23 users removing 29 share 131 Index 553 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd shared memory 121 limits 469 procnto 213 shared objects 128 135 shelf 71 clock 74 configuration files 125 modifying 72 shelf disabling 105 shelf cfg 73 SHELL 20 63 shells 18 aliases 46 setting 103 182 485 command completion 44 command line interpreting 42 commands builtin 55 finding 54 multiple 45 recalling 53 configuring 180 debug 175 dot file 207 embedded 202 fatembedded 202 filename completion 44 login program 20 22 26 28 29 non POSIX 33 prompt setting 485 quoting 51 205 redirection 49 remote daemon 261 scripts
342. nds correspond to executable files somewhere on your system although some such as ed are built into the shell It s possible for you to have more than one executable file with the same name on your system The shell uses the PATH environment variable to determine which version to use The value of PATH is a list of directories separated by colons in the order in which you want the shell to search for executables To see the value of your PATH type echo PATH CAUTION You can put your current directory in your PATH but it can leave you vulnerable to Trojan horse programs For example if is at the beginning of your PATH the shell looks in the current directory first when trying to find a program A malicious user could leave a program called 1s in a directory as a trap for you to fall into If you want to have your current directory in your PATH make sure that you put it after the directories that hold the common utilities For information about setting your PATH see Environment variables in Configuring Your Environment If you want to know which version of a command the shell will choose use the which command For example which ls bin 1s You can use command line options to get more information 54 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Utilities which laf ls rwxrwxr x 1 root root 19272 May 03 2002 bin 1s If you try
343. ne 57 Basic commands 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Basic commands Here are some Neutrino commands that you ll frequently use If you want to Use Determine your current pwd builtin ksh command directory Change directory ed builtin ksh command List the contents of a directory ls Rename move files and mv directories Delete remove files rm Copy files and file hierarchies cp Or pax Create directories mkdir Remove directories rmdir Concatenate and display files cat Display output on a less or more page by page basis Find files based on search find criteria Change a file s chmod permissions attributes Create hard and symbolic links 1n Create a tape archive tar or pax Extract files from a tar file tar Extract files froma tar gzor gunzip filename pax r or tgz file tar xzf filename 58 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd International keyboards For more information about these and other commands see the Utilities Reference its Utilities Summary arranges all the utilities according to what you use them for International keyboards If you re using Photon you can use phlocale to change the keyboard mapping among other things The choices are in usr photon keyboard and include mappings for specific languages e g German French as well as for several versions of the Dvorak keyboard layout a layout that some peopl
344. network On receiving a request it runs the corresponding server daemon For example if a client requests a remote login by invoking rlogin then inetd starts rlogind remote login daemon to satisfy the request In most instances responses to client requests are handled this way Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 o 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Running the Internet daemons You use the super server configuration file etc inetd conf to specify the daemons that inetd can start As shipped in the Neutrino distribution the file describes all currently shipped Neutrino TCP IP daemons and some nonstandard pidin services Unless you want to add or remove daemon definitions you don t need to modify this file When it starts inetd reads its configuration information from this configuration file It includes these commonly used daemons ftpd rlogind rfitp rshd telnetd tftpd File transfer Remote login Remote file transfer Remote shell Remote terminal session DARPA trivial file transfer e Remember that you shouldn t manually start the daemon processes listed in this file they expect to be started by inetd e Running rshd or rlogind can open up your machine to the world Use the etc hosts equiv or rhosts files or both to identify trusted users but be very careful You may also find other resident daemons that can run independently of inetd see the Utilities Reference fo
345. ng this feature see the description of etc default passwd in the documentation for passwd Login shell bin sh This is the program that s run once the user logs in Traditionally this is the shell bin sh giving the user an interactive command line upon logging in m You can specify any program as the login shell but you can t pass command line arguments to it Also the phlogin2 or phlogin graphical login fails if the login shell is anything but a POSIX compatible shell Instead of specifying a custom program within the account entry you should customize the user s profile file in their home directory bin sh runs this profile automatically when it starts up For more information see Configuring Your Environment New password Specify the initial password for the account You re asked to confirm it by typing it again 28 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Managing other accounts Removing accounts To remove a user account 1 Lock the user account database if the etc pwlock file doesn t exist lock the account files by creating it if it does exist wait until it s gone 2 Remove the account entry in etc passwd and etc shadow to disable future logins or change the login shell to a program that simply terminates or that displays a message and then terminates 3 Remove references to the user from the etc group file 4 Unlock th
346. nit ksh c etc system sysinit libc so libcam so io blk so February 1 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 483 profile 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd cam disk so fs qnx4 so fs dos so fs ext2 so cam cdrom so fs cd so data c seedres pci bios devb eide slogger ksh devc con mount profile When you create a new user account the user s initial profile is copied from etc skel profile see Managing User Accounts Here s what s in that file default profile if test tty not a tty then echo edit the file profile if you want to change your environment echo To start the Photon windowing environment type ph fi This profile runs the tty utility to get the name of the terminal that s open as standard input If there is a terminal profile simply displays a couple of helpful hints You might want to set some environment variables EDITOR The path to your favorite editor the default is vi ENV The name of the profile that ksh should run whenever you start a shell The code for these changes could look like this export EDITOR usr local bin jed export ENV HOME kshrc 484 Appendix A e Examples February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd kshre kshre Here s an example of a profile that ksh runs if you set the ENV environment variable as described above for profile alias rm rm i alias 11 l1s 1 export PS1 pwd
347. nitors a printer and uses Slinger to update a remote client that displays the printer s status External Data arog app server SSI token Device e g a printer HTML page Where should you put the files A February 1 2005 Before you start the Slinger web server and begin creating your web pages you need to determine what directory structure is appropriate and where you should put your files CAUTION Be careful not to place your files in a location where your system is open to outsiders thereby exposing your system to undue risk For example don t place your CGI scripts in the same directory as your regular system binaries because doing so could let people run any command on the machine that supports your web server Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 365 Running Slinger 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Use these environment variables to configure Slinger HTTPD_ROOT_DIR The name of the directory where Slinger looks for data files The default is usr local httpd HTTP_ROOT_ DOC The name of the root document When a web client requests the root document HTTPD_ROOT_DOC is appended to HTTPD_ROOT_DIR to build the full pathname of the root document The default is index html For example if HTTPD_ROOT_DOC is defined as index html and HTTPD_ROOT_DIR is defined as usr www Slinger appends index html to usr www to build usr www index h
348. ns with p m but they didn t work correctly For example based on the existing associations I tried to associate txt files with ped but ped doesn t start Make sure you have usr photon bin in your PATH environment variable then do the following February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 103 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Start pfm Press F11 or select Associations from the Edit menu Click Add to add a new file association A QOQ Na Enter these settings e Pattern txt e Open ped e View ped e Edit ped 5 Choose Done to close the New Association Type dialog 6 Choose Done to close the Associate dialog How can I disable the Ctrl Alt 1 2 key chords that allow console switching in Photon Place this line in your ete re d re local file export PHWMOPTS s For more information see pwm in the Utilities Reference If a mouse isn t connected to my computer how do I shut down Photon You can press Ctrl Alt Shift Backspace to shut down Photon If it doesn t work the computer may be locked up in which case you might have to press the reset button To avoid using the reset button run inetd and telnet into the box and slay the processes that Photon is using How do I change the text and background colors of the terminal There s a K option for pterm that lets you select the initial colors For example pterm K 17 sets the colo
349. ntcap database contains one or more entries per printer This file isn t present when you first install Neutrino you have to create one to suit your printing needs This section describes the basic fields for information on the others see etc printcap in the Utilities Reference A typical setup Here s a basic etc printcap file that you can modify lptl tpptr printer in Docs department lp dev par1 sd usr spool output 1pt1 1 usr adm 1lpd errs mx 0 sh Each entry in the etc printcap file describes a printer Comments start with number sign An entry consists of a number of fields delimited by colons In the example above each field is on a separate line but you can string the fields together on one line as long as they each start and end with a colon Here s what each line means February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 283 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd lpti1 tpptr printer in Docs department The known names for the printer separated by bar characters The last name is the only name that can include spaces it s a long name that fully identifies the printer Entries may continue onto multiple lines by giving a backslash as the last character of a line Empty fields may be included for readability lp dev par1 The name of the device to open for output the default is dev 1p sd usr spool output 1pt1 The spooling directory t
350. nts can make RPC calls only if rpcbind is running on the server The nfsd daemon reads the etc exports file which lists the filesystems that can be exported and optionally specifies which clients those filesystems can be exported to If no client is specified any requesting client is given access The nfsd daemon services both NFS mount requests and NFS requests as specified by the exports file Upon startup nfsd reads the etc exports hostname file or if this file doesn t exist etc exports to determine which mountpoints to service Changes made to this file don t take affect until you restart nfsd NFS client An NFS client requests that a filesystem exported from an NFS server be grafted onto its local namespace For the client to work you need to start the version 2 or 3 of the NFS filesystem manager fs nfs2 or fs nfs3 first The file handle in version 2 is a fixed size array of 32 bytes With version 3 it s a variable length array of 64 bytes The fs nfs2 or fs nfs3 filesystem manager is also the NFS 2 or NFS 3 client daemon operating over TCP IP To use it you must have an NFS server and you must be running a TCP IP transport layer such as that provided by io net with npm ttcpip so It also needs socket so and libc so 226 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Package filesystem You can create NFS mountpoints with the mount command by specifying nfs fo
351. o a file or set of files It s often used for scripts or as a utility within other scripts awk is a programming language for pattern matching and working with the contents of files You can also use it for scripting or call it from within scripts The third party repository includes per1 which like awk is useful for working with files and patterns The name per1 stands for Practical Extraction and Report Language In general a shell script is most useful and powerful when working with the execution of programs or modifying files in the context of the filesystem whereas sed awk and per1 are primarily for working with the contents of files For more information see e the entries for awk and sed in the Utilities Reference e Robbins Arnold and Dale Dougherty 1997 sed amp awk 2nd Edition Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 1 56592 225 5 e Schwartz Randal L and Tom Phoenix 2001 Learning Perl Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 0 59600 132 0 202 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Running a shell script Running a shell script You can execute a shell script in these ways e Invoke another shell with the name of your shell script as an argument sh myscript e Load your script as a dot file into the current shell myscript e Use chmod to make the shell script executable and then invoke it like this chmo
352. ob into the spooler queue and then sends the print jobs in the order they were received to the printer you specified 292 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr Remote printing to a printer on another network Using TCP IP and 1pr you can print a file on a remote printer connected to a server on another network You just have to set up your Neutrino network node for remote printing and the remote server for TCP IP and handling printers compatible with lpr For instance let s suppose you want to print root junk ps a PostScript file on a node on your Neutrino network but the only Postscript printer available windows printer is connected to a Windows server with an IP address of 10 2 1 8 First make sure that the Windows server is configured for TCP IP printing and that the printer is compatible with lpr Then as root on your Neutrino node 1 Add a printer description in etce printcap like this rlpt4 rm windows_server lp rp windows_printer sd usr spool output l1pd rlpt4 2 Add a new line in etc hosts like this 10 2 1 8 windows_server 3 Create the spool directory mkdir usr spool output lpd rlpt4 4 Make sure io net is running with a TCP IP stack 5 Start lpd To print a PostScript file on the printer type lpr Prlipt4 junk ps February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 293 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Remote
353. ocated on different disk cylinders from the data and is even disjoint to itself bitmaps inodes directory entries and hence incurs seek delays e The metadata is usually written to the disk with more urgency than user data because the metadata affects the integrity of the filesystem structure and hence may incur a transfer delay Almost all operations on the filesystem even reading file data unless you ve specified the noatime option see io b1k so in the Utilities Reference involve some metadata updates Ordering the updates to metadata Some filesystem operations affect multiple blocks on disk For example consider the situation of creating or deleting a file Most filesystems separate the name of the file or link from the actual attributes of the file the inode this supports the POSIX concept of hard links multiple names for the same file Typically the inodes reside in a fixed location on disk the inodes file for s qnx4 so or in the header of each cylinder group for fs ext2 so Creating a new filename thus involves allocating a free inode entry and populating it with the details for the new file and then placing the name for the file into the appropriate directory Deleting a file involves removing the name from the parent directory and marking the inode as available These operations must be performed in this order to prevent corruption should there be a power failure between the two writes note th
354. ock 278 lpq DOS command 59 lpq UNIX command 3 lpr 3 275 276 278 486 DOS version 59 error messages 300 remote printing 292 lpre 3 279 error messages 303 lprm UNIX command 3 lprq 3 279 error messages 301 lprrm 3 279 error messages 302 February 1 2005 lpstat UNIX command 3 ls 45 46 50 58 112 182 long listing 485 LS 120 drives 318 lsm ipfilter so 438 Istat 220 MAC Media Access Control addresses 337 Macromedia Flash resolution for 97 magnetic optical drives 319 make 135 Makefile source 135 man 131 man UNIX command 3 56 135 managers 129 device enumerator 127 129 168 307 333 message queues 166 named semaphores 166 network io net 240 257 pipe 166 window 75 76 101 126 manifests package 232 manual pages 131 mapping pathname space 8 114 mass storage devices 330 Matrox Millenium chipsets 354 Maximum Receivable data Unit See MRU Maximum Transmittable data Unit See MTU Index 541 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd md DOS command 59 Media Access Control addresses See MAC addresses melt 395 401 mem 120 memory allocation failures 342 aperture 340 physical 120 shared 121 limits 469 procnto 213 usage 75 447 menus Desktop 70 Launch 13 71 74 76 Photon window manager 75 merging 388 message of theday 124 181 message passing security 435 message queues limits 470 manager starting 166 pathname space 120 messages system 120 122 163 166 usage 5
355. ocol r Once you ve created the ISO image you can send the image to a system that can burn an ISO image or you can burn it using cdrecord cdrecord v speed 2 dev dev cd0 my_iso_image iso This command burns a CD at dual speed 2 using the CD burner called cdo from the ISO image called my_iso_image iso For more information see the documentation for cdrecord Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 403 Storage choices 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Ey For a list of supported CD drives see the README file that comes with the cdrecord source code Bootable CDs You can also make the CD bootable using cdrecord and its associated utilities as follows 1 Create a bootable floppy that calls the needed scripts and includes the needed binaries in the image Make an image of the floppy using the dd utility For example dd if dev fd0 of floppy img Create a directory with all the needed binaries in the layout that you want in your CD ROM ISO image For example mkdir iso_image cp Rc bin iso_image bin cp Rc etc iso_image etc Make sure that the isocatalog is in usr share cdburning on the system Create the ISO image using mkisofs making sure to specify the catalog with the c option For example mkisofs 1 f r joliet quiet V My Label b floppy img c usr share cdburning isocatalog o my_iso_image iso Burn the ISO image to a CD 404 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Re
356. ocol 255 262 RLIMIT_AS 469 470 RLIMIT_DATA 469 RLIMIT_NOFILE 469 rlogind 261 rm 58 interactive mode 485 rm CVS command 389 rmdir 58 ROM monitor 157 root Ill home directory 129 ownership 132 PATH 65 permissions 18 132 privileged priorities 468 prompt default 11 security 432 user accounts managing 25 root block QNX 4 filesystem 409 creating 417 restoring 418 root directory QNX 4 filesystem 410 creating 417 route 255 259 552 Index routed 255 262 routers 439 Routing Information Protocol See RIP routing protocols 256 routing tables 260 daemon 262 routing TCP IP 255 RPC Remote Procedure Call 226 rpcbind 226 RS 232 protocol 332 rshd 261 runas DOS command 59 rwhod 262 character while booting 161 fileextension 135 s file extension 135 SAMBA printing over 276 488 sandbox 380 savercfg 77 sbin 129 131 scanning for consistent data chkfsys 420 schtasks DOS command 59 _SC_LOPEN_MAX 462 screen clearing 39 printing 102 screensavers 77 scripts CGI 367 372 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index perl 372 shell 53 Scroll Lock 75 SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface 309 316 search permission 132 secondary boot loader 160 security CGI scripts 368 firewalls 437 493 general 431 inetd 260 IPSec 436 message passing 435 Neutrino specific 435 password database 20 PATH 54 pdebug 435 printing 281 protecting encrypted passwords 21 qeonn 436 Qnet 242 436 ra
357. odems hostname 185 245 248 HOSTNAME 63 167 181 185 230 HOSTNAME file 167 hosts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index connections checking 271 IP addresses mapping 270 names must be unique 248 setting 167 valid characters 168 TCP IP 253 hosts hostname database file 124 254 270 hosts equiv 261 282 hosts lpd 282 hotkeys 93 HSP Host Signal Processor modems 351 HTML dynamic 365 367 368 370 file extensions 135 viewing 79 84 HTTP 365 HTTPD_ROOT_DIR 366 HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS 367 HTTP_ROOT_DOC 366 hubs USB 328 Human Interface Device See HID HyperText Markup Language See HTML T O aperture 340 standard performance 451 456 February 1 2005 redirecting 49 synchronous 453 icons 131 IDE Integrated Development Environment 131 command line alternative to 37 documentation 135 editor 144 security 436 system fine tuning 445 458 idle thread 446 IDs group 17 adding 30 31 assigning 28 login 17 18 27 user 17 18 assigning 27 root 18 ifconfig 3 259 ifs file extension 135 image filesystems 135 images filesystem creating 223 OS 119 212 creating 160 213 images directory 130 img file extension 135 import CVS command 382 include directory 130 index online documentation 82 inetd 260 inetd conf 91 124 260 CVS server 390 phrelay 91 Index 537 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd inflator 233 info directory 130 file extension 135 GNU utilit
358. oduction to this chapter 3 Test the driver by using io graphics to start it manually io graphics drage vid 0x1002 did 0x4755 index 0 xres 1024 photon yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh 80 pphoton For information about the options see Graphics drivers devg in the Utilities Summary in the Utilities Reference as well as the entry for io graphics You ll also need to start Photon and other utilities to ensure that this is working correctly The best thing to do is create a script that starts Photon See the ph script for ideas and examples February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 353 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You can also manually add this command to the graphics modes file at the top line to test it out Setting up multiple displays You can use the io graphics configuration file to set up a dual or multiple monitor display You can configure either two or more separate cards for multiple displays or a single device to support multiple displays These graphics device drivers support multiple displays devg radeon so Graphics driver for ATI RADEON chipsets devg matroxg so Graphics driver for Matrox Millenium G series chipsets For specific chipsets and the number of displays supported see the documentation for devg radeon so and devg matroxg so in the Utilities Reference For information about the ioe graphics configuration file format and the options you can set see
359. oesn t contain usage message records use displays an error message For more information see use in the Utilities Reference or simply type use use Executing commands on another node or tty Priorities February 1 2005 If the machines on your network are running Qnet see Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing you can execute commands on another machine This is known as remote execution For example on n net dasher date where net dasher is the name of the node that you want to run the command on When you invoke a command on another node the command s standard input standard output and standard error output are displayed on your console screen or terminal unless you explicitly redirect them to another device To run a command on a specific tty use the t option specifying the terminal name For example on t con3 login root For more information see the on command in the Utilities Reference By default when you start a utility or other program it runs at the same priority as its parent Actually priorities aren t associated with a process but with the process s threads You can determine the priority of a process s threads by looking at the output of the pidin Process ID INformation command If you want to run something at a specific priority use on specifying the p option If you want to specify a relative priority use the nice command Chapter 4 e Using the Command Li
360. oesn t get sent the driver is the cause Check the driver s setup to make sure it s initialized correctly Use sloginfo to check the system log for clues 342 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Network adapters Bytes Received OK This is the number of bytes of data received from the network This value increases with the number of packets received Single Collisions on Transmit This is the number of collisions that were encountered while trying to transmit frames The NIC checks for a carrier sense when it knows that the network hasn t been used for a while and then starts to transmit a frame of data The problem occurs when two network cards check for the carrier sense and start to transmit data at the same time This error is more common on busy networks When the NICs detect a collision they stop transmitting and wait for a random period of time The time periods are different for each NIC so in theory when the wait time has expired the other NIC will have already transmitted or will be still waiting for its time to expire thus avoiding further collisions You can reduce this type of problem by introducing a full duplex network Multiple Collisions on Transmit This error is due to a attempted transmission that has had several collisions despite backing off several times This occurs more frequently on busy half duplex networks If there are a lot of these er
361. ollisions on the network The network card gives up on transmitting the frame after 16 collisions This generally means that the network is jammed and is too busy Routers also give up on transmitting a frame if they experience excessive collisions but instead of alerting the original transmitter routers simply discard the frame If these sort of errors are being experienced see if the network can be reduced or introduce a strategically placed switch into the network to help eliminate the number of packets that are being placed on the entire network Switching to a full duplex network also resolves these problems Transmits aborted excessive deferrals Aborted transmissions due to excessive deferrals mean that the NIC gave up trying to send the frame due to an extremely busy network You can resolve this type of problem by switching to a full duplex network Transmit Underruns Chips with a DMA engine may see this error The DMA engine copies packet data into a FIFO from which the transmitter puts the data on the wire On lower grade hardware the DMA might not be able to fill the FIFO as fast as the data is going on the wire so an underrun occurs and the transmit is aborted No Carrier on Transmit When the NIC is about to transfer a frame it checks first to make sure that it has carrier sense much like before you dial the phone you check to make sure you have a dial tone While the NIC is transmitting the frame it
362. on 135 qrm file extension 135 qtalk 348 350 query DOS command 59 quoting 51 205 R RADEON chipsets 354 RAID Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks 318 RAM filesystem 213 RAM system limits 470 random 121 172 RANDOM 63 DOS version 63 raw copies 405 raw disks browsing 419 raw input mode 38 buffer 463 re d 126 re devices 168 re local 172 175 278 re rte 167 re setup once 166 re sysinit 168 171 read permission 132 read 448 451 457 February 1 2005 readlink 220 realtime clock setting up 167 rebooting 14 recovering from unexpected 420 receive alignment errors 346 record size 454 recovering a zapped file 419 blocks 418 lost files directories 419 recursive make 135 redirection 49 Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks See RAID refresh rate 353 regular files 109 213 relative pathnames 111 rem DOS command 59 remote access via Phditto disabling 77 remote execution 57 Remote Procedure Call See RPC remove CVS command 389 rename DOS command 59 replace DOS command 59 repositories CVS 377 third party editors 148 man 135 perl 202 troff 135 reset vector 157 resolution video 353 resolv conf 126 254 269 resolver Index 551 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd configuration files 126 Qnet 239 resource managers defined 8 inflator 233 return codes from shell scripts 206 revisions 377 rftpd 261 rhosts 261 right arrow 39 RIP Routing Information Prot
363. on see Hard disks above The MO drive should appear in your dev directory as dev mox where x is the number of the drive starting at 0 To mount the drive type mount dev mo0 fs mo_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 319 Input devices 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Input devices The devi set of drivers handles input under Photon The type of input device attached to your system determines which driver you need to use Photon input can consist of a single mouse a mouse and a keyboard or many mice at the same time provided you have the space The inputtrap utility automatically detects basic input devices non USB keyboards and mice The Photon startup script invokes this utility after starting the graphics adapters You can override the automatic detection by creating an input trap file etc system trap input hostname This is the default location you can change it if you want to Each line of this file invokes a driver e For devi hirun the line should contain only the arguments that you want to pass to it For example this file starts a PS 2 keyboard and a PS 2 mouse kbd fd d dev kbd ps2 mousedev e For other input drivers specify the name of the driver as well as the arguments Mice and keyboards Mice and keyboards both use the devi hirun driver The type of mouse attached to your system determines wh
364. on files 135 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index configuration strings _CS_ARCHITECTURE 185 _CS_DOMAIN 185 239 CS HOSTNAME 185 239 _CS_HW_PROVIDER 185 CS HW_SERIAL 185 _CS_LIBPATH 183 185 CS LOCALE 186 _CS_MACHINE_ 186 CS PATH 183 186 _CS_RELEASE 186 CS_RESOLVE 186 254 269 _CS_SRPC_DOMAIN 186 CS_SYSNAME_ 186 _CS_TIMEZONE _ 167 186 _CS_VERSION 186 environment variables compared to 184 setting 185 confstr 185 consoles 12 40 334 driver starting 41 162 164 mounting 119 switching 41 disabling 104 terminal type setting 38 66 196 virtual 41 70 74 75 context conf 123 control characters disabling 464 controllers type determining 308 conventions node names 238 typographical xxiii utility syntax 55 February 1 2005 Coordinated Universal Time See UTC copy DOS command 59 copying command line 43 country 123 cp 49 58 399 interactive mode 485 cpim 196 cpio 395 398 cpp file extension 135 CPU limits 470 load monitor 75 usage by processes 445 CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check 242 346 422 creat 449 Critical Process Monitoring TDK 8 cron 3 ertc settings 358 erttrap 352 problems 360 CS_ARCHITECTURE 185 _CS_DOMAIN 185 239 CS_ HOSTNAME 185 239 CS HW PROVIDER 185 _CS_HW_SERIAL 185 _CS_LIBPATH 183 185 CS LOCALE 186 CS_MACHINE 186 _CS_PATH 183 186 CS_RELEASE 186 CS_RESOLVE 186 254 269 ess file extension 135 _CS_SRPC_DOMAIN 186
365. onent Name Help Type Launch Application This item type is a plugin A shelf plug in adds functionality to your shelf Add Plug In After Command to launch helpviewer O Show text only Show icon and text O Show icon only O Use large icon if present Shelf configuration dialog When you configure your shelf the new settings are saved for the current user only Your shelf configuration file is stored in your home directory under HOM E ph shelf shelf cfg The first time you log in the default version of etc photon shelf shelf cfg is copied to SHOME ph shelf shelf cfg The items you can add or modify on the shelf include Group A group of applications or utilities A group can contain child groups Drawer Like a group but a drawer expands horizontally out of its parent container rather than vertically in the shelf Separator A space that visually separates two containers Any space not used in a shelf is occupied by a separator Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 73 Settings and preferences 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 74 World view CD player Volume so you always have at least one separator per shelf If you try to remove a separator it s repositioned A world view plugin which lets you see which consoles contain open windows and lets you set the current console A CD player plugin A volume control
366. ontext based coloring of displayed text Vim has a gentler learning curve than vi and tolerates or minimizes the effects of common mistakes without losing any of vi s speed flexibility or power To start Vim choose Editors Vim from the desktop s Launch menu or type vim filename To learn more about Vim see www vim org Workspace ws Workspace is a Photon based editor that accommodates many programming languages but is particularly useful for developing in C Workspace uses the make gdb and ctags utilities The editor also incorporates terminals web browsers an image viewer a file manager an archive viewer and other extras February 1 2005 Chapter 7 e Using Editors 151 Third party editors 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd File Edit Action Window Help First files Cut Ctrl n amama a ad eE amp J Paste a Ce EAS Untitleda x gt Delete Undo Ctri 2 Redo Indentation Select e Find Replace Preferences B mipsbe B mipsle my61 gt Gopt gt B pkgs gt B ppche gt Bproc gt Broot gt B sbin gt gt GBshle western European ISO 8859 1 Workspace provides font support and word wrapping and lets you edit hundreds of files simultaneously You can use regular expressions when searching Workspace sup
367. or resource records for applications built with PhAB See the Photon in Embedded Systems appendix of the Photon Programmer s Guide AUTOCONNECT DISPLAY In order to run etc autoconnect you must set this environment variable to 1 For more information see etc autoconnect in the Utilities Reference The name of the physical display on which to draw FLASHQUALITY February 1 2005 The resolution for voyager to use with Macromedia Flash Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 97 Photon environment variables 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd IVE_ HOME Used by Java VM JSPLUGIN ARGS Arguments passed to Browser Java plugins MPEGAUDIOBUFFERSIZE The size of the input buffer see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGAUDIOBUFFERSTARTPERCENT The percent of the input buffer that needs to be filled before you begin playing see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGAUDIOCONVERTCODE How to transform the output of the MPEG audio decoder see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGAUDIOFREQLIMIT Set a low pass filter on the specified frequency see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGAUDIOMAXBITRATE The maximum bit rate see mpegaudio in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGAUDIOPLUGINPRIORITY The starting priority for the decoder process see Voyager Plugin Variants in the Multimedia Developer s Guide MPEGAUDIOREDUCTIONCODE Tell th
368. or both depending on how you ve set up your machine and network e If you ve attached your printer to your machine s serial port you need to use the lpr family e If you ve attached your printer to your machine s parallel port you can use either the lpr family or spooler In this case the device enumeration that the system does when it boots automatically starts spooler see Device enumeration in Controlling How Neutrino Starts We supply configuration files in etc printers for the most commonly used printers If you want to use the lpr family you have to set up the printer configuration file etc printcap Chapter 14 e Printing 275 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd If you want to use a network printer or a printer that s attached to another node s parallel port you need to use a TCP IP network for the lpr family spooler can use Qnet SAMBA NCFTP or even the lpr family to print on remote printers In order to print remotely you have to set up some configuration files whether you use the lpr family or spooler If you want to print from a Photon application e g helpviewer voyager you need to use spooler Another difference is that the 1pd daemon manages all of the defined printers spooler manages one printer but you can run more than one instance of spooler at a time Printing with lpr The lpr line printer system supports multiple printers multiple spoolin
369. or down arrow the character device driver passes a back or forward command to the shell which recalls the actual command Physical and virtual consoles The display adapter the screen and the system keyboard are collectively referred to as the physical console which is controlled by a console driver Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Character device drivers Some systems don t include a console driver For example embedded systems might include only a serial driver devc ser The deve con and deve tcon drivers are currently supported only on x86 platforms To let you interact with several applications at once Neutrino permits multiple sessions to be run concurrently by means of virtual consoles These virtual consoles are usually named dev con1 dev con2 etc Photon provides virtual consoles even if your system doesn t include a console driver see Using the Photon microGUI When the system starts devc con it can specify how many virtual consoles to enable by specifying the n In a desktop system the buildfile specifies four consoles when it starts diskboot For more information see the description of diskboot in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter The maximum number of virtual consoles is nine The tiny console driver devc tcon supports only one console The root user can also specify the program if any that s initiall
370. ord However you need to use a text editor to e change an existing user s user name full name user ID group ID home directory or login shell e create a new account that doesn t conform to the passwd utility s allowed configuration e remove a user account e add or remove a group e change the list of members of a group If you re using Photon you can use phuser which provides a graphical front end to passwd and also lets you choose an icon or shell for a user and edit the groups 26 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Managing other accounts The changes you make manually to the account files aren t checked for conformance to the rules set in the passwd configuration file For more information see the description of etc default passwd in the documentation for passwd in the Utilities Reference Adding users February 1 2005 To add a user log in as root then either use phuser if you re using Photon or use passwd passwd new _username Make sure that the user name is no longer than 14 characters otherwise that user won t be able to log in If you specify a user name that s already registered passwd assumes you want to change their password If that s what you want just type in the new password and then confirm it If you don t wish to change the user s password type Ctrl C to terminate the passwd utility without changin
371. orials and command summaries online In Neutrino vi is actually a link to elvis see the Utilities Reference The Photon editor ped is a simple graphical editor that s similar to editors that you ll find on other windowing systems It runs in a Photon window so you can t access ped through text consoles or console only systems Chapter 7 e Using Editors February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Supported editors N Search Type Buffer Marker Help ee A Ce E P EE s A Select All line 1 Column 1 Buffer 1 The Photon editor ped If you need to type international characters accents and diacritical marks you ll find ped useful because it supports UTF 8 To type international characters in ped use the compose sequences described in Photon compose sequences in the Unicode Multilingual Support appendix of the Photon Programmer s Guide To start ped choose Editors Ped from the desktop s Launch menu or type ped filename amp in a pterm terminal window For more information about using ped see the Utilities Reference February 1 2005 Chapter 7 e Using Editors 147 Third party editors 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Third party editors AbiWord The third party repository includes at least these editors e AbiWord e Emacs e JED e Vim vi IMproved e Workspace ws Note that we don t support these editors or anything else in the third party
372. ork In a software development group this may range from a day to a week Each day of out of date backup will generally cost you a day of redevelopment If you re saving financial or point of sale data then daily or even twice daily backups are common It s a good idea to maintain off site storage Archiving your data 398 You can store backups of each of your files separately or you can store them in an archive with other files that you re backing up Files stored in an archive can be more readily identified as belonging to a certain time or machine by naming the archive more easily transferred in bulk to other systems transfer of a single archive file and can sometimes be more readily compressed than individual files can You have several archive formats to choose from under Neutrino including pax and tar Neutrino also supports cpio cpio but Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Archiving your data we recommend it only when the archive needs to be readable by other systems that use cpio archives Creating an archive The simplest backup you can do on your system is to duplicate the files individually using cp or pax For example to duplicate a single file cp t my_file backup_directory or echo my_file pax rw backup_directory To back up an entire directory type cp Rt my_directory backup_directory or find my_directory prin
373. ork Address Translation 437 sample configuration file 495 native networking 237 navigation buttons in documentation 83 NCFTP printing over 276 487 NDP Node Discovery Protocol 239 net 237 245 net cfg 254 netstat 259 270 network activity 75 card functionality checking 246 drivers 241 257 manager io net 240 257 native Qnet 237 routing tables daemon 262 running chkfsys on servers 420 settings 77 TCP IP 253 network adapters 334 mounting 120 Network Address Translation See NAT Network File System See NFS Network Interface Card See NIC Network Time Protocol See NTP networks 125 networks configuration 259 directory 239 Index 543 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd hostname database 124 names 125 status getting 270 newgrp 18 newsgroups 473 nfm autoip so 267 NFS buildfiles 477 filesystem 224 466 starting 173 server daemon 262 nfsd 226 262 NIC Network Interface Card 335 nice 57 nicinfo 246 271 336 Node Discovery Protocol NDP 239 node IDs physical 337 nodes 57 domain 239 names 238 248 fully qualified 239 remote Qnet contacting via 244 noditto 77 nophoton 127 172 npm pppoe so 265 npm gqnet compat so 241 npm qnet 14_lite so 241 npm gqnet so 239 241 security 436 npm tcpip so 257 259 CIFS 224 npm ttcpip so 257 258 CIFS doesn t work with 224 NFS 226 NTP Network Time Protocol 262 544 Index ntpd 262 null 50 120 Num Lock 75 numbers random 172
374. ory address between the displayed values to locate and map memory Promiscuous Mode Multicast When a card is placed in promiscuous mode the card accepts every Ethernet packet sent on the network This is quite taxing on the system but is a common practice for debugging purposes Also when a card is placed in promiscuous mode a network MAC address can be spoofed i e the card accepts all packets whether they re addressed to it or not Then on a higher software level you can accept packets addressed to whomever you please Promiscuous mode is disabled by default Support When you enable multicast mode you can mark a packet with a special destination so that multiple nodes on the network may receive it Multicast packets are also accepted Packets Transmitted OK Before you look at this value determine that some form of network transfer ping telnet file transfer was attempted If a card isn t set up properly the number of sent packets shown here is either very small or zero If the card isn t displaying any sent packets the cause is probably a driver problem Check all the options you re passing to the driver one or more may be incorrect Bytes Transmitted OK February 1 2005 This is the number of bytes of data sent on the network This value increases with the number of packets transmitted on the network Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 341 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd To
375. ost data is held in the buffer cache and written after only a short delay critical filesystem data is written immediately Updates to directories inodes extent blocks and the bitmap are forced to disk to ensure that the filesystem structure on disk is never corrupt i e the data on disk should never be internally inconsistent Sometimes all of the above structures must be updated For example if you move a file to a directory and the last extent of that directory is full the directory must grow In such cases the order of operations has been carefully chosen such that if a catastrophic failure e g a power failure occurs when the operation is only partially completed the filesystem upon rebooting would still be intact At worst some blocks may have been allocated but not used You can recover these for later use by running the chkfsys utility For more information see the Backing Up and Recovering Data chapter DOS filesystem The DOS filesystem provides transparent access to DOS disks so you can treat DOS filesystems as though they were Neutrino POSIX 220 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CD ROM filesystem filesystems This transparency lets processes operate on DOS files without any special knowledge or work on their part The fs dos so shared object see the Utilities Reference lets you mount DOS filesystems FAT12 FAT16 and FAT32 under Neutrino
376. other for a network driver in this case devn e1900 so If you see npm ttcpip so instead of npm tcpip v4 so or npm tcpip v6 so in the above output you re using the tiny TCP IP stack Is the TCP IP protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed In order to ascertain the above use the following command ls dev io net Ideally you should see the following output eno ipo ip en ipv6_en The enO entry represents the first and only Ethernet driver ip en and ipv6_en represent the TCP IP protocol stack which was started by mounting npm tcpip so which is actually a shared object that io net loads What is the nameserver information Use the following command to get the nameserver information getconf _CS_RESOLVE If you aren t using the configuration string type cat etc resolv conf February 1 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 269 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd How do map hostnames to IP addresses The etc hosts file contains information regarding the known hosts on the network For each host a single line should be present with the following information internet_address official_host_name aliases Display this file by using the following command cat etc hosts How do get the network status If you re using the full TCP IP stack use the following netstat commands to get the network status netstat in List the interfaces including the MAC and IP addre
377. others For example suppose you set up these rules block in all pass in all When a packet comes in the filter looks at the first rule block in all This rule succeeds so does the filter look at the second rule The answer is yes unlike other packet filters IP Filtering uses a flag to track whether or not it s going to pass the packet on Unless the flow is interrupted the filter goes through the entire rule set and decides whether to pass or deny the packet based on the last matching rule Remember that the last matching rule takes precedence The above example isn t very useful in the real world If you don t want to go through all the rules but exit on the first match what do you do You use the quick keyword like this block in quick all pass in all So now the filter looks at the first line and if it finds a match exits It s as if the second line didn t exist You can also filter packets based on the IP address they came from block in quick from 10 7 0 0 16 pass in all These rules block all packets from IP Address 10 7 0 0 witha netmask of 16 IP Filter accepts both forms of netmask so you can also write this as 255 255 0 0 If the filter doesn t find a match for rule 1 it looks at rule 2 But if the filter finds a match for rule 1 it stops searching because you specified the quick keyword There s usually a machine called a router that bridges the outside world to the inside world
378. ou re applying IP filtering and NAT and you re tunneling traffic from your internal hosts through an IPSec tunnel on the the Neutrino gateway you ll likely need to enable the TCP IP npm t cpip v6 so stack option pfil_ipsec This option affects the processing order of IPSec and IP filtering in the TCP IP stack for outgoing packets This means that IP filtering and NAT are applied to the outgoing traffic before it s sent on the IPsec tunnel Starting IP Filter and NAT To configure IP Filter and NAT you need to login as root and set up the configuration files as described in the sections that follow Then use the following commands to start the utilities mount Ttcpip lsm ipfilter so ipf f filter_rule_file ipnat f nat_rule_file For more information see ipf ipnat lsm ipfilter so and mount in the Utilities Reference Configuring IP Filtering 438 Before you start the IP Filter you must set up a configuration file to specify the rules for allowing and restricting access to your systems In this configuration file e Specify only one rule per line e Use a character to mark the rest of a line as a comment You can have arule and a comment on the same line e Use extra whitespace to make your file easier to read Chapter 19 e Securing Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Setting up a firewall The filter processes the rules from top to bottom appending each one to the
379. ou need to quote see Quoting special characters How do I work with a file whose name starts with a hyphen Neutrino utilities use the hyphen to denote an option e g head n 10 some_file If you create a file whose name February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 65 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd starts with a hyphen and you pass that filename as an argument to a utility the utility parses the filename as one or more options Most utilities recognize a double hyphen to mean end of options Put this before your filename head my file For more information see the Utility Conventions chapter in the Utilities Reference Why do I get a Unrecognized TERM type message when I start programs such as vi Either your TERM environment variable isn t set correctly or there isn t an entry for your terminal type in usr 1ib terminfo or possibly etc termcap see Terminal support earlier in this chapter 66 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 Chapter 5 Using the Photon microGUI In this chapter Overview of Photon 69 Settings and preferences 72 Browsing files with the File Manager 78 Getting help with the Helpviewer 79 Surfing the web with Voyager 84 Connecting to other systems 90 Hotkeys and shortcuts 93 Photon environment variables 96 Troubleshooting 102 February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 67 2
380. ou need to use several utilities for troubleshooting These utilities query hosts servers and the gateways to fetch diagnostic information to locate faults Some of the typical queries are Are io net and the drivers running Is the TCP IP protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed What is the nameserver information How do I map hostnames to IP addresses How do I get the network status How do I make sure I m connected to other hosts How do I display information about an interface controller Are io net and the drivers running As mentioned before io net is the framework used to connect drivers and protocols In order to troubleshoot this use the pidin command pidin P io net mem Look for the TCP IP shared object in the output pid tid name prio STATE code data stack 77839 1 sbin io net 100 SIGWAITINFO 56K 384K 8192 516K 77839 2 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 68K 77839 3 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 68K 77839 4 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 68K 77839 5 sbin io net 100 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 68K 77839 6 sbin io net 200 RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 132K 77839 7 sbin io net 21r RECEIVE 56K 384K 4096 132K ldqnx so 2 b0300000 300K 16K npm tcpip v4 so b8200000 584K 140K devn e1900 so b82b5000 56K 8192 268 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting You should see the npm t cpip v4 so or npm tcpip v6 so shared object and an
381. ounts The passwd utility seems to hang after I change my password The passwd utility uses the etc pwlock file as a lock while updating the password database If the file already exists passwd won t run If the system crashes during the update and etc pwlock still exists passwd refuses to work until the system administrator removes the file If the password files are left in an inconsistent state as a result of the crash the system administrator should also copy the backup files etc oshadow and etc opasswd to etc shadow and etc passwd to prevent additional problems Why can t I log in in graphical mode If you enter your user name and password to the graphical login utility phlogin2 or phlogin and it silently returns you to the blank login form then e Your user name and password don t match an account in the system user names and passwords are both case sensitive or Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting e Your account has a login shell that isn t a standard POSIX shell In either case see your system administrator for help Why can t I log in in text mode If you enter your user name and password to the text mode login prompt login and it responds Login incorrect it s likely because your user name doesn t exist or you ve typed the wrong password Both user names and passwords are case sensitive make sure yo
382. our network servers every time they boot An automated check on the filesystem at boot time guarantees that chkfsys will attempt to fix any problems it finds during the scan To automate this process add chkfsys to the server s rc local file see Controlling How Neutrino Starts It s especially important to run chkfsys after a system crash power outage or unexpected system reboot so that you can identify whether any files have been damaged The chkfsys utility checks the clean flag on the disk to determine whether the system was in a consistent state at the time The clean flag is stored on disk and is maintained by the system The flag is turned off when the filesystem is mounted and is turned on Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Recovering disks and files when the filesystem is unmounted When the clean flag is set chkfsys assumes that the filesystem is intact If chkfsys finds the clean flag off it tries to fix the problem The chk fsys utility supports a u option which overrides a set clean flag and tells chkfsys to run unconditionally You might want to override the clean flag when e dcheck discovers bad blocks e you ve intentionally deleted or zapped some files e you want to force a general sanity check Using chkfsys ona live system The chkfsys utility normally requires exclusive use of the filesystem to provide a comprehensive verification of
383. our system is idle The usr directory is a secondary file hierarchy that contains shareable read only data and includes usr bin usr help usr include usr info usr 1ib usr libexec A directory that contains most user commands such as diff errno and we A directory that contains the documentation in the product directory and common images in the 1ib images directory For more information see Getting help with the Helpviewer in Using the Photon microGUI and helpviewer in the Utilities Reference The top of a directory structure that contains the C and C header files This directory includes sys platform specific and other directories Documentation for various utilities Object files libraries and internal binaries that you shouldn t execute directly or in scripts You ll link against these libraries if you write any programs A directory that could contain system daemons and system utilities in general these are run only by other programs 130 Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Where everything is stored var February 1 2005 usr local usr man usr photon usr qde usr sbin usr share usr sre A directory where the system administrator can install software locally It s initially empty Manual pages for various utilities The top of a directory structure that contains exec
384. ous sequence of blocks on a disk Glossary 503 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd fd File Descriptor a client must open a file descriptor to a resource manager via the open function call The file descriptor then serves as a handle for the client to use in subsequent messages FIFO First In First Out a scheduling algorithm whereby a thread is able to consume CPU at its priority level without bounds See also round robin and sporadic filename completion A shell feature that saves typing type enough of the file s name to identify it uniquely and then press Esc twice If possible the shell fills in the rest of the name filter A program that reads from standard input and writes to standard output such as grep sort and we You can use a pipe to combine filters flash memory A memory technology similar in characteristics to EEPROM memory with the exception that erasing is performed electrically and depending upon the organization of the flash memory device erasing may be accomplished in blocks typically 64k bytes at a time instead of the entire device Contrast EPROM and RAM FQNN Fully Qualified Node Name a unique name that identifies a Neutrino node on a network The FQNN consists of the nodename plus the node domain tacked together 504 Glossary February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd garbage collection group HA hard link hidden file image inode F
385. out something important or useful WARNING Warnings tell you about commands or procedures that could be dangerous to your files your hardware or even yourself IS CAUTION Cautions tell you about commands or procedures that may have unwanted or undesirable side effects xxiv About This Guide February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What you ll find in this guide What you ll find in this guide The QNX Neutrino User s Guide tells you how to Use the QNX Neutrino runtime environment regardless of the kind of computer it s running on embedded system or desktop Think of this guide as the companion how to doc for the Utilities Reference Assuming there s a Neutrino system prompt or Photon login waiting for input this guide is intended to help you learn how to interact with that prompt Perform such traditional system administration topics as setting up user accounts security starting up a Neutrino machine etc The Neutrino User s Guide is intended for programmers who develop Neutrino based applications as well as OEMs and other resellers of the OS who may want to pass this guide on to their end users as a way to provide documentation for the OS component of their product If you ve installed the QNX Momentics development suite see the Welcome to QNX Momentics guide for an overview of the system and the documentation Your system might not include all of the things th
386. ow does your local copy of the repository get created This is the opposite of checking in Checking out creates a copy of the repository complete with state information Normally you ll want to take a snapshot of the current state of the repository but there are times when you want more control over which revisions of files are checked out There are many options for this including using symbolic names and explicit dates Repositories To check files in and out you must first create a repository For brand new projects you create new files and add them to the repository as you go For existing projects that aren t under version control you can import the entire project with a single command 378 Chapter 17 e Using CVS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CVS basics All of the operations above need to know where the repository is There is no default The repository is simply a directory name you can specify it via a command line option or an environment variable Editors and CVS CVS frequently asks you for information by starting an editor with a template in it You can control which editor CVS invokes by setting the EDITOR environment variable For example to use the Photon editor ped put this in your profile export EDITOR ped For information about the available editors see Using Editors for more information about profile see Configuring Your Environment Creating a repository First you
387. own network For example you re isolated on your own network If you re on a network with a small and static over time number of gateways then you can use the route command to manually manipulate the TCP IP routing tables and leave them that way This is a very common configuration If a host has access to the Internet it likely added one static route called a default route This route directs all the TCP IP packets from your host that aren t destined for a host on your local network to a gateway that provides access to the Internet If you re on a network with more than one possible route to the same destination on your network you might need to use dynamic routing This relies on routing protocols to distribute information about the changing state of the network If you need to react to these changes run routed which implements the Routing Information Protocol RIP and RIPv2 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 255 Software components for TCP IP networking 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd There s often confusion between routing and routing protocols The TCP IP stack determines the routing by using routing tables routing protocols let those tables change Software components for TCP IP networking To use TCP IP you need the following software components Client processes npm tcpip so or npm ttcpip so io net N X O Network drivers devn so i al Hardware
388. parent Distributed Processing 249 Chapter 13 TCP IP Networking In this chapter Overview of TCP IP 253 Software components for TCP IP networking 256 Choosing the right stack configuration 257 Running the Internet daemons 260 Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack 262 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 263 Using the SRI SNMP suite for Neutrino 267 Troubleshooting 268 February 1 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 251 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Overview of TCP IP Overview of TCP IP The term TCP IP implies two distinct protocols TCP and IP Since these protocols have been used so commonly together TCP IP has become a standard terminology in today s Internet Essentially TCP IP refers to network communications where the TCP transport is used to deliver data across IP networks This chapter provides information on setting up TCP IP networking on a Neutrino network It also provides troubleshooting and other relevant details from a system administration point of view A Neutrino based TCP IP network can access resources located on any other system that supports TCP IP QNX Momentics includes the tiny TCP IP stack and the full TCP IP 4 stack Other components such as DHCP SNMP and TCP IP 6 are available only in the Extended Networking Technology Development Kit TDK Clients and servers There are two types of TCP IP hosts clients and servers A client requests TCP IP service a server
389. pe commands directly to the modem e g ATDT1 613 591 0934 Once connected log into Neutrino and then issue the command usr bin phrelay This command causes Phindows to drop out of text terminal mode and begin acting as a Photon graphical terminal A Photon login screen should appear at this point Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Hotkeys and shortcuts Additional options You can use Phindows s command line options to e set compression and data caching options e connect to a remote Photon session e use a nonstandard color palette e span a single Photon session across multiple screens e share a Photon session between more than one user e create a shortcut to a Photon application on a Windows desktop For more information see the Phindows User s Guide Hotkeys and shortcuts pterm February 1 2005 You can use many keyboard shortcuts and hotkeys to perform tasks quickly and easily The following tables show shortcuts for using pterm editing text fields in Photon applications managing windows working with the Photon workspace and others The Photon terminal emulator is called pterm It behaves like a character device driver see The keyboard at a glance in Using the Command Line If you re in type over mode and you press Enter you return to insert mode The pterm program also supports the following shortcuts Chapter 5 e Using t
390. ple if the directory entry is damaged or if two files occupy the same space on the disk an error 418 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Recovering disks and files Recovering a zapped file If you zapped a file in error it s sometimes possible to recover the zapped file using the zap utility with the u option immediately after the deletion You can recover a zapped file using zap under these conditions e the directory entry for that now deleted file must not be reused e the disk blocks previously used by the file must not be reassigned to another file spatch You may sometimes find that files or directories have been completely lost due to disk corruption If after running chkfsys you know that certain key files or directories weren t recovered then you might be able to use spatch to recover some or all of this data The spatch utility lets you browse the raw disk and patch minor problems You can sometimes cure transient disk problems by reading and writing the failing block with spatch Before using spatch make sure you understand the details of a QNX 4 filesystem see QNX 4 disk structure earlier in this chapter Recovering disks and files Using chkfsys The chkfsys utility is your principal tool for checking and restoring a potentially damaged filesystem It can identify and correct a host of minor problems as well as verify the integ
391. ple rlpt2 in the Select Printer dialog box e Remote printing from the command line Copy the print file to the directory that spooler uses cp root my_file ps dev printers rlpt2 spool For configuration files for printing with lpr SAMBA and NCFTP see the Examples appendix Troubleshooting Understanding lpr error messages The following error messages from the 1p print utilities may help you troubleshoot your printing problems lpr error messages lpr filename copyfile is too large The submitted file was larger than the printer s maximum file size as defined by the mx capability in its printcap entry lpr printer unknown printer The printer wasn t found in the etc printcap database perhaps because an entry is missing or incorrect lpr printer jobs queued but cannot start daemon The connection to 1pd on the local machine failed probably because the printer server has died or isn t responding The superuser can restart 1pd by typing usr bin lpd You can also check the state of the master printer daemon 300 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting lpr sin P lpd Another possibility is that the user ID for lpr isn t root and its group ID isn t daemon You can check by typing ls lg usr bin lpr printer printer queue is disabled This means the queue was turned off with the lpre disable command see 1pre printer con
392. plugins photon photon For each display create a DEVICE name number section These sections configure each display In this example each display has the same resolution 1024 x 768 color depth 16 bit color and refresh rate 60 Hz Notice that the second display Photon region is offset by 1024 the width of the first display DEVICE radeon 0 xres 1024 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 355 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh 60 DEVICE radeon 1 xres 1024 yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh 60 region_x 1024 4 For each plugin create a PLUGIN name section In this example we set the Photon plugin DLL PLUGIN photon dllpath gri photon so Save the configuration file in this case as usr photon config radeon conf Load the configuration file and start the graphics driver by using the c option of io graphics io graphics c usr photon config radeon conf Here s the complete example GLOBAL devices radeon DEVICE radeon dllpath devg radeon so pci_vendor_id 0x1002 pci_device_id 0x4e44 pci_index 0 displays 2 plugins photon photon 356 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Video cards DEVICE radeon 0 xres 1024 yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh 60 DEVICE radeon 1 xres 1024 yres 768 bitpp 16 refresh region_x 60 1024 PLUGIN p
393. ports context highlighting and you can customize it This can make your code more readable and reduces the likelihood of coding errors You can configure individual colors for dozens of cases but the interface can make customizations time consuming New users might find that the friendly interface hides some of the more powerful features although the basic features are intuitive Workspace supports various languages including English French Japanese Chinese and Russian To type international characters use the compose sequences described in Photon compose sequences in the Unicode Multilingual Support appendix of the Photon Programmer s Guide To start Workspace select Editors Workspace from the desktop s Launch menu or type ws filename amp on the command line The basic commands are the same as ped s 152 Chapter 7 e Using Editors February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Specifying the default editor For more information or to download the latest version of Workspace see http pages infinit net micbel Specifying the default editor Some system processes ask you to use an editor to provide some information For example if you check something into a version control system such as CVS you re asked to explain the changes you made Such processes use the VISUAL or EDITOR environment variable or both to determine which editor to use the default is vi Historically you
394. printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr A TCP IP enabled printer doesn t need an attached computer to provide print services the printer itself provides the services So you use the same basic steps described above with the following minor alterations e Enter the remote printer name and IP address in the etc hosts file on the node you want to print from For example 10 2 0 4 tcpip_printer e Add an entry to describe the printer in the etc printcap file on the same node rlpt2 rm tcpip_printer rp ps sd usr spool output lpd rlpt2 This example shows that the name of the remote machine in this case the actual printer is tepip_printer and the spool directory is usr spool output 1pd rlpt2 Note that the remote printer is specified as ps which is the name some network printers use for accepting PostScript files You need to find out the name your printer wants you to use it may require different names for different types of print file format e g PostScript and text files Make sure you ve created your spool directory that s about it Follow the usual steps described in Local and remote printers and you should be able to print to your remote printer using a command line like this lpr Prlpt2 root junk ps This sends a PostScript file named root junk ps to the remote printer named tcpip_printer located at the IP address 10 2 0 4 294 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Soft
395. provides it In planning your network you must decide which hosts will be servers and which will be clients For example if you want to telnet from a machine you need to set it up as a client if you want to telnet fo a machine it has to be a server Hosts and gateways February 1 2005 In TCP IP terminology we always refer to network accessible computers as hosts or gateways Host A node running TCP IP that doesn t forward IP packets to other to other TCP IP networks a host usually has a single interface network card and is the destination or source of TCP IP packets Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 253 Overview of TCP IP 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Gateway A node running TCP IP that forwards IP packets to other TCP IP networks as determined by its routing table These systems have two or more network interfaces If a TCP IP host has Internet access there must be a gateway located on its network In order to use TCP IP you need an IP address and you also need the IP address of the host you wish to communicate with You typically refer to the remote host by using a textual name that s resolved into an IP address by using a nameserver Nameservers 254 A nameserver is a database that contains the names and IP addresses of hosts You normally access a TCP IP or Internet host with a textual name e g www qnx com and use some mechanism to translate the name into an IP address e g 209 226 137 1
396. pter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystems be automatically extended piecemeal by the filesystem as it is written to This lets the filesystem see a single explicit request for allocation instead of many implicit incremental updates some filesystems may be able to exploit this and allocate the file in a more optimal contiguous fashion It also reduces the number of metadata updates needed during the write phase and so improves the data write performance by not disrupting sequential streaming The POSIX function to extend a file is ftruncate the standard requires this function to zero fill the new data space meaning that the file is effectively written twice so this technique is suitable when you can prepare the file during an initial phase where performance isn t critical There s also a non POSIX devctl to extend a file without zero filling it which provides the above benefits without the cost of erasing the contents see DCMD_FSYS_PREGROW FILE in lt sys dcmd_blk h gt Configuration February 1 2005 You can control the balance between performance and robustness on either a global or per file basis e Specifying the O_SYNC bit when opening a file causes all I O operations on that file both data and metadata to be performed synchronously The fsync and sync functions let you flush the filesystem write behind cache on demand otherwise any dirty data is flu
397. pts any characters that it sees in a filename it s read only so it s up to whatever prepares the CD image February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 221 Linux Ext2 filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd to impose appropriate restrictions Strict adherence to ISO 9660 allows only 0 9A 2_ but Joliet and Rockridge are far more lenient For information about burning CDs see Backing Up and Recovering Data Linux Ext2 filesystem 222 The Ext2 filesystem provided in Neutrino provides transparent access to Linux disk partitions Not all Ext2 features are supported including the following e file fragments subblock allocation e large files greater than 2 G e filetype extension e compression e B tree directories The fs ext2 so shared object provides filesystem support for Ext2 This shared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting an Ext2 filesystem CAUTION Although Ext2 is the main filesystem for Linux systems we don t recommend that you use fs ext2 so as a replacement for the QNX 4 filesystem Currently we don t support booting from Ext2 partitions Also the Ext2 filesystem relies heavily on its filesystem checker to maintain integrity this and other support utilities e g mke2fs aren t currently available for Neutrino If an Ext2 filesystem isn t unmounted properly a filesystem checker is usually responsible for cleaning up the next time the fi
398. r 8 Controlling How Neutrino Starts In this chapter What happens when you boot 157 Loading a Neutrino image 160 diskboot 161 diskroot 164 etc system sysinit 166 Device enumeration 168 etce re d re sysinit 171 rc local 173 tinit 174 Troubleshooting 174 February 1 2005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 155 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What happens when you boot What exactly happens when you start up your system depends on the hardware this chapter gives a general description You need to log in as root in order to change any of the files that the system runs when it starts up What happens when you boot When you boot your system the CPU is reset and it executes whatever is at its reset vector This is usually a BIOS on x86 boxes but on other platforms it might be a ROM monitor or it might be a direct jump into some IPL code for that board After a ROM monitor runs it generally jumps to the IPL and a BIOS might do this as well or it might jump directly to the start of the OS image February 1 2005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 157 What happens when you boot 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 158 Reset Ty ROM monitor BIOS NS IPL OS boot image procnto B Boot script Initialization scripts and programs Booting a Neutrino system The IPL copies the boot image into memory and jumps to the startup The startup code initializes the
399. r descriptions bootpd dhcpd lpd mrouted February 1 2005 Internet boot protocol server Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol daemon Line printer daemon see Printing Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP daemon Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 261 Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd named Internet domain name server ntpd Network Time Protocol daemon routed RIP and RIPv2 routing protocol daemon rwhod System status database slinger Tiny HTTP web server snmpd SNMP agent nfsd NFS server These daemons listen on their own TCP ports and manage their own transactions They usually start when the computer boots and then run continuously although to conserve system resources you can have inetd start bootpd only when a boot request arrives Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack In some situations you may need to run multiple instances of the TCP IP stack 1 Start the first instance of the TCP IP stack by invoking io net as follows io net del900 pci 0x0 ptcpip 2 Start the second instance of the TCP IP stack by invoking io net as follows io net il del1900 pci 0x1 ptcpip prefix sock2 You can get the PCI index of your NIC cards by using the pei vvv command If you re using different types of NIC cards you don t have to specify the PCI index The i option in the second instance of TCP IP tells io net to register itself as
400. r program for the printer must be running on nodename Remote printing over TCP IP If you want to set up spooler to print on a remote printer you can pipe the print job to lpr This takes advantage of the fact that the filter sends the print job to the printer you just name the remote printer in the filter command line of the configuration file used by spooler To try it first get your remote printer working using lpr see Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using 1pr then do the following 1 Copy the configuration file from the printer you want to use in this case a PostScript printer cp etc printers ps cfg etc printers test cfg 2 Find the filter command lines in test cfg they look like this Filter phs d phs to ps Filter raw d cat These filter command lines are in the form source destination filter The phs filter command line tells the filter to process phs files by sending them through a filter called phs to ps before sending them on to the destination passed by spooler The raw filter command is for utilities that already produce the correct output for the printer 298 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with spooler 3 Change the phs filter command line from this Filter phs d phs to ps to this Filter phs ps phs to ps 4 Add a line to tell the filter to send all PostScript files to the remote printer rlpt2 Filter ps d
401. r solution than storing a backup on a local system because a remote server is generally more reliable as the saying goes don t put all your eggs in one basket Depending on your situation it might make sense to buy a good system with lots of server grade hardware and then buy regular systems to develop on Make regular backups of your server Neutrino ships with a copy of the CVS Concurrent Versions System client utility In order to use CVS you need to have a CVS server preferably one that your company administers CVS lets you manage your source archives safely and remotely For more details see the Using CVS chapter in this guide Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX 4 disk structure Remote filesystems Storing a second backup on a remote system is often a simple yet effective way to prevent the loss of data For example if you have a basic archive of your code in a separate directory on your local system and then the hard disk breaks down for some unforeseen reason you ve lost your local backup as well Placing a copy on a remote filesystem effectively lowers the chance of losing data we highly recommend it If you place a file on a non Neutrino filesystem you might lose the file s permissions Files under Neutrino like other UNIX systems have special file permissions see Working with Files that are lost if you store individual files on
402. r the type and o ver3 as an option You must start fs nfs3 or fs nfs3 before creating mountpoints in this manner If you start fs nfs2 or fs nfs3 without any arguments it runs in the background so you can use mount To make the request the client uses the mount utility as in the following examples e Mount an NFS 2 client filesystem s nfs2 must be running first mount t nfs 10 1 0 22 home mnt home e Mount an NFS 3 client filesystem s nfs3 must be running first mount t nfs o ver3 server_node qnx_bin bin In the first example the client requests that the home directory on an IP host be mounted onto the local namespace as mnt home In the second example NFS protocol version 3 is used for the network filesystem Here s another example of a command line that starts and mounts the client fs nfs3 10 7 0 197 home bob homedir Although NFS 2 is older than POSIX it was designed to emulate UNIX filesystem semantics and happens to be relatively close to POSIX Package filesystem Neutrino s package filesystem is a virtual filesystem manager that presents a customized view of a set of files and directories to a client February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 227 Package filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The real files are present on some media the package filesystem presents a virtual view of selected files to the client Neutrino doesn t start the package files
403. rameter is a concatenation of all the single letter options that are set for the script For more information see Parameters in the entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference 198 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 Chapter 10 Writing Shell Scripts In this chapter What s a script 201 Available shells 201 Running a shell script 203 Example of a Korn shell script 203 Efficiency 207 Caveat scriptor 207 February 1 2005 Chapter 10 e Writing Shell Scripts 199 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What s a script What s a script Shell scripting at its most basic is taking a series of commands you might type at a command line and putting them into a file so you can reproduce them again at a later date or run them repeatedly without having to type them over again You can use scripts to automate repeated tasks handle complex tasks that might be difficult to do correctly without repeated tries redoing some of the coding or both Such scripts include e etc config sysinit which runs when you boot a Neutrino desktop system see Controlling How Neutrino Starts e usr bin ph which starts Photon see Using the Photon microGUI Available shells February 1 2005 The shell that you ll likely use for scripting under Neutrino is ksh a public domain implementation of the Korn shell The sh command is usually a symbolic link to ksh For more information about this shell see e th
404. rams on other nodes The Qnet protocol provides transparent networking across a Neutrino network Qnet implements a local area network that s optimized to provide a fast seamless interface between Neutrino workstations whatever the type of hardware For QNX 4 the protocol used for native networking is called FLEET it isn t compatible with Neutrino s Qnet In essence the Qnet protocol extends interprocess communication IPC transparently over a network of microkernels taking advantage of Neutrino s message passing paradigm to implement native networking When you run Qnet entries for all the nodes in your local subnetwork that are running Qnet appear in the net namespace Under QNX 4 you use a double slash followed by a node number to refer to another node For more details see the Native Networking Qnet chapter of the System Architecture guide For information about programming with Qnet see the Transparent Distributed Networking via Qnet chapter of the Programmer s Guide When should you use Qnet When should you use Qnet and when TCP IP or some other protocol It all depends on what machines you need to connect Qnet is intended for a network of trusted machines that are all running Neutrino and that all use the same endianness It lets these machines share all their resources with little overhead Using Qnet you can use February 1 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Proc
405. rce code QCC make QNX Momentics development system required cfg Configuration files various Various programs formats formats differ conf Configuration files various Various program formats formats differ css Cascading style sheet Used in the QNX Momentics PE development system for Eclipse documentation def C definition file QCC make QNX Momentics development system required dil MS Windows dynamic link Not used directly in Neutrino library necessary in support of some programs that run under MS Windows such as some of the QNX Momentics development tools See so shared objects for the Neutrino equivalent gif GIF graphical image pv Photon viewer gZ Compressed file gzip Backing Up and Recovering Data h C header file qcc make QNX Momentics development system required htm HyperText Markup Language voyager web browser HTML file for Web viewing 136 Chapter 6 e Working with Files continued February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filename extensions Extension Description Related programs utilities html HyperText Markup Language helpviewer voyager web HTML file for Web viewing browser ifs img A QNX Image filesystem mkifs see also Making an OS typically a bootable image Image in Building Embedded Systems QNX Momentics development system jar Java archive consisting of Java applications e g the QNX multiple java files class files Momentics PE IDE etc compress
406. rchivefile e You can remove them find user user_name_or_ID remove CAUTION If you remove a user s account in the account database but don t remove or change the ownership of their files it s possible that a future account may end up with the same numeric user ID which would make the new user the owner of any files left behind by the old one Defining groups A user s account entry in etc passwd solely determines which group the user is part of on logging in while the groups a user is named in within the etc group file solely determine the groups the user may switch to after logging in see the newgrp utility As with user names and IDs the numeric effective group ID of a running program determines its access to resources For example if you have a team of people that require access to home projects on the system but you don t want the other users to have access to it do the following 1 Add a group called projects to the etc group file adding all necessary users to that group for details see Creating a new group below 30 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Managing other accounts 2 If you want this group to be the default for these users change their account entries in etc passwd to reflect their new default group ID 3 Recursively change the group ownership and permissions on home projects chgrp R projects home projects
407. rd controller in the BIOS is set to CardBus 16bit not PCIC mode If the chipset is set up in PCIC compatible mode the chip works like an Intel 82365 compatible PCMCIA controller and isn t visible in the PCI space If the chipset is set to CardBus 16bit the chip is visible in the PCI space and operates as a PC Card adapter To display PC Card information use the pin utility The output that appears on your screen should look like this pin Sock Func Type Flags PID Base Size IRQ 1 Empty MF None 1 Empty 2 _ H n None 2 0 Network C I None 0x300 32 7 2 Empty MF None Each socket has two entries because the driver devp pecard supports combination cards that give room for two functions in each slot The categories displayed in the output example above are Sock The slot where the PC Card is attached In the example above the Network card appears in slot 2 Func Used when the card is a multifunction PC Card Type A label for the PC Card s function If the card is a Network card the Type column displays Network Flags Flags that aren t set are marked as The following table lists possible set flags 324 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd PCCARD and PCMCIA cards This flag Has a set value of c Card in B Battery low R Scheduled to be configured N Not enough resources to configure card IorM T O card or
408. re information see Setting the time zone below The version of the OS Setting the time zone If you re running Photon the easiest way to set the time zone is via phlocale You simply select the appropriate zone and phlocale does everything else If you re not running Photon you need to set the TZ environment variable or the CS TIMEZONE configuration string To set the time zone when you boot your machine you have to put the same information in the etc TIMEZONE file see the description of etc system sysinit in Controlling How Neutrino Starts 186 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Setting the time zone February 1 2005 If TZ isn t set the system uses the value of the CS TIMEZONE configuration string instead The POSIX standards include the TZ environment variable CS TIMEZONE is a Neutrino implementation The description below applies to both Various time functions use the time zone information to compute times relative to Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly known as Greenwich Mean Time GMT You usually set the time on your computer to UTC Use the date command if the time isn t automatically maintained by the computer hardware You can set the TZ environment variable by using the env utility or the export shell command You can use setconf to set CS_TIMEZONE For example env TZ PST8PDT export TZ PST8PDT setconf _CS_TIMEZ
409. re longer than 48 characters The first extent if any of a file is described in the directory inode entry Additional file extents require a linked list of extent blocks whose header is also in the directory inode entry Each extent block can hold location information for up to 60 extents Files with names greater than 16 characters and files that are links to other files are implemented with a special form of directory entry These entries have the QNX4FS FILE LINK bit 0x08 set in the i_status field For these files a portion of the directory entry is moved into the inodes file Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 413 QNX 4 disk structure 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Extent blocks 414 48 52 53 57 63 ao wn A O Directory entry l _ fname 48 l_inode blk 1_inode_ndx 1_1fn_block l _spare 6 l_ status longfilenames entry lfn_block lfn_index lfn_status lfn_name 505 inodes entry i_ fname 16 i_size i first xtnt i_xblk i_ftime i_mtime i_atime i_ctime i_num_xtnts i_mode i_uid i gid i_nlink i zero 4 i_type i status An inode entry If the filename is longer than 48 characters e the _fname field in the directory entry holds a 48 character truncated version of the name e the _lfn_block field point
410. region such as dev shmem Pg101e0001 Character special files c Entries that represent a character device For example dev ser1 represents a serial port FIFO special files p Persistent named pipes through which two programs communicate For example PipeA Block special files b Entries that represent a block device such as a disk For example dev hd0 represents the raw block data of your primary disk drive Some files are persistent across system reboots such as most files in a disk filesystem Other files may exist only as long as the program responsible for them is running Examples of these include shared memory objects objects in the proc filesystem and temporary files on disk that are still being accessed even though the links to the files their filenames have been removed Filenames and pathnames 110 To access any file or directory you must specify a pathname a symbolic name that tells a program where to find a file within the directory hierarchy based at root A typical Neutrino pathname looks like this home fred profile In this example profile is found in the fred directory which in turn resides in the home directory which is found in the root directory Chapter 6 e Working with Files February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filenames and pathnames B home I fred profile Like Linux and other UNIX like operating systems Neutrino pathname compon
411. rent from when adding a file This time it s the reason for that change or a quick synopsis of what the change is Again it s free from so you can add what you like We ll say Added comments for clarity Save and exit The status is now File foo c Status Up to date Working revision 1 2 Tue Jun 3 17 30 49 2003 Repository revision 1 2 home fred cvs myproj foo c v Sticky Tag none Sticky Date none Sticky Options none 384 Chapter 17 e Using CVS February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CVS basics More information on files what changed and why The revision number is 1 2 instead of 1 1 We now have two separate revisions of foo c so now we can see what changed between them and why the changes were made To find out why we need to look at the log messages that were entered every time a commit was performed cvs log foo c RCS file home fred cvs myproj foo c v Working file foo c head 1 2 branch locks strict access list keyword substitution kv total revisions 2 selected revisions 2 description revision 1 2 date 2003 06 03 17 35 43 author fred state Exp lines 2 0 Added comments for clarity revision 1 1 date 2003 06 03 17 19 34 author fred state Exp A file to test the basic functionality of CVS To see what changed between the two revisions use the diff command cvs diff r1 1 foo c Index foo c RCS file home fred cvs myproj foo c v retrieving
412. repository AbiWord is a free word processing editor that you can use to edit Microsoft Word documents It s supported on a variety of operating systems including Neutrino To start this editor choose Editors AbiWord from the desktop s Launch menu The interface looks like this 148 Chapter 7 e Using Editors February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Third party editors Edit View ei D gt Page 1 1 Importing Document INS default For more information see http www abisource com Emacs Emacs Editor macros is a powerful and extendable editor that s available on many systems Although it can be initially confusing Emacs offers a wide variety of useful builtin features to supplement its text editing capabilities including searching and mail You can also expand Emacs s core functionality by writing your own macros in Emacs Lisp To start Emacs type emacs filename Emacs commands are usually keychords or a series of keychords For example if you re told to press Ctrl X Ctrl C you should press Ctrl X release it and then press and release Ctrl C The Ctrl key is frequently abbreviated as simply C so the above command could be February 1 2005 Chapter 7 e Using Editors 149 Third party editors 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd written as C X C C If a command starts with Esc you press and release the Esc key and then press the next key in
413. requested mountpoint For example home The line must not start with a number sign or contain an equals sign The diskboot program ignores any leading and trailing whitespace a multiple line configuration file In this case it must contain a mountpoint specification and can contain additional specifications All specifications are of the form token value The diskboot program ignores any whitespace at the start and end of the line and on either side of the equals sign The recognized tokens are mount or mountpt Where to mount this partition For example mount home opt or options Mount options either specifically for this mountpoint or generic Use commas not spaces to separate the options For example options ro noexec Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 165 etc system sysinit 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd For more information see the documentation for mount and specific drivers in the Utilities Reference and mount and mount_parse_generic_args in the Neutrino Library Reference desc or description The diskboot program recognizes and parses these tokens but it currently ignores the information type The diskboot program recognizes the strings qnx4 ext2 and dos but currently ignores this token It determine the type based on partition numbers as described for diskboot above etc system sysinit The etc system sysinit file is a script that starts
414. reter variables 63 Troubleshooting 64 Using the Photon microGUI 67 Overview of Photon 69 Why is it called Photon 69 Why is it called a microGUI 69 Your workspace 69 Settings and preferences 72 Modifying the shelf 72 Browsing files with the File Manager 78 Getting help with the Helpviewer 79 Searching for a topic or keyword 80 Bookmarking a topic to view it again later 82 Navigating around help files 82 Viewing more than one topic at once 84 Surfing the web with Voyager 84 Setting preferences 86 Contents Vv 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd vi Contents Connecting to other systems 90 Phditto 90 Phindows 91 Hotkeys and shortcuts 93 pterm 93 Text field 94 Window 95 Workspace 95 Exiting Photon 96 Photon environment variables 96 Troubleshooting 102 Working with Files 107 Everything isa file 109 Types of files 109 Filenames and pathnames 110 Absolute and relative pathnames 111 Dot and dot dot directories 112 No drive letters 113 Pathnames that begin withadot 114 Extensions 114 Pathname space mapping 114 Filename rules 115 Where everything is stored 117 117 bin 118 boot 119 dev 119 ete 123 s 127 home 128 lib 128 proc 128 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd February 1 2005 root 129 sbin 129 tmp 130 usr 130 var 131 File ownership and permissions 132 Setuid and setgid 133 Sticky bit 134 Default file permissions 135 Filename extens
415. ries in net for nodes in the same domain as your machine don t include the domain name For example if your machine is in the qnx com domain the entry for karl is net karl if you re ina different domain the entry is net kar1l qnx com name resolution name resolver The process by which npm qnet so converts an FQONN to a list of destination addresses that the transport layer knows how to get to A piece of code that implements one method of converting an FQNN to a list of destination addresses Each network directory has a list of name resolvers that are applied in turn to attempt to resolve the FQNN The default is the Node Discovery Protocol NDP February 1 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 239 Software components for Qnet networking 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Software components for Qnet networking You need the following software entities along with the hardware for Qnet networking l tg Client processes Microkernel Symbolic link ese je te a ie nat Aa fat tN gt npm qnet so npm qnet compat so or npm gnet 14 lite so bonnet X 4 Network drivers devn so Hardware Components of Qnet io net Manager to provide support for dynamically loaded networking modules 240 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Starting Qnet
416. rify Policy 86 cacls DOS command 59 calculator 135 calib 321 calibration files touchscreen 321 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index call DOS command 59 callouts kernel 158 cam cdrom so 309 camera pointer 75 cancel UNIX command 3 Canon printers 296 canonical input mode 38 buffer size 463 Caps Lock 75 CardBUS 323 carrier 345 cascading style sheets 135 case 204 cat 58 ec file extension 135 ed 54 58 symbolic links 113 cD DOS variable 63 CD ROM drives 309 312 filesystem 127 221 466 mounting 119 164 edplayer so 74 cdrecord 403 404 CDs bootable 404 burning 403 playing 74 cfg file extension 135 CGI 365 scripts 367 372 channels limits 468 CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 490 chap secrets 49 February 1 2005 character devices drivers 331 command line interpreting 38 T O attributes 334 character special files 110 characters control disabling 464 counting 50 deleting 39 dropouts 195 international 59 147 152 filenames 116 fonts 194 input methods 196 special quoting 51 205 wildcard 48 205 chat 490 chdir DOS command 59 checking in and out of CVS 378 checkout CVS command 380 389 chgrp 132 Chinese input method 196 chkdosfs 3 chkdsk DOS command 59 chkfsys 3 117 220 418 overriding clean flag 420 read only mode 421 recovering damaged filesystem 419 using on live system 421 when to run 420 chmod 31 132 203 216 not supported b
417. rity of the disk system as a whole Normally chkfsys requires that the filesystem be idle and that no files be currently open on that device You ll have to shut down any processes that have opened files or that may need to open files while chkfsys is running February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 419 Recovering disks and files 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd To run chkfsys on a mountpoint type chkfsys mountpoint The utility scans the entire disk partition from the root down building an internal copy of the bitmap and verifying the consistency of all files and directories it finds in the process When it has finished processing all files chkf sys compares the internal bitmap to the bitmap on the disk If they match chkfsys is finished If any discrepancies are found chkfsys will upon your approval rewrite the bitmap with data consistent with the files it was able to find and verify In addition to verifying block allocation bitmap chkfsys attempts to fix any problems it finds during the scan For example chkfsys can e unbusy files that were being written when a crash occurred e fix the file size in a directory entry to match the real data When to run chkfsys 420 It s a good idea to run chkfsys as part of your regularly scheduled maintenance procedures this lets you verify that the data on your disk is intact For example you might consider running chkfsys on y
418. rivers even if they aren t listed It s often worth trying these chipsets to see if the driver will work with your hardware but note that the hardware might not behave as expected Neutrino doesn t currently support tapes You ll use the information in this chapter if the enumerator can t detect your system s devices or if you want to manually configure static devices in an embedded system Ey e You need to be logged in as root to start any drivers e Make sure that PnP aware OS is disabled in the BIOS before you run Neutrino February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 307 PCI AGP devices 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd PCI AGP devices If you don t know what type of controller you re using you can use the pei utility to identify it pei vvv less The output from this command looks something like this Class Vendor ID Device ID PCI index Class Codes Revision ID Bus number Device number Function num Status Reg Command Reg Header type BIST Mass Storage IDE 8086h Intel Corporation 7111h 82371AB EB PIIX4 IDE Controller Oh 010180h 1h 0 4 1 280h 5h I O space access enabled Memory space access disabled Bus Master enabled Special Cycle operations ignored Memory Write and Invalidate disabled Palette Snooping disabled Parity Checking disabled Data Address stepping disabled SERR driver disabled Fast back to back transactions
419. rking the shared objects are npm qnet so and networking drivers such as devn ppc800 ads so The shared objects are arranged in a hierarchy with the end user on the top and hardware on the bottom CAUTION The device enumerator starts io net automatically when you boot and loads the appropriate drivers for the detected devices For information about customizing how the enumerator starts io net see Device enumeration in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide It s possible to run more than one instance of io net but doing so requires a special setup If you want to start io net by hand you should slay the running io net first You can start the io net from the command line telling it which drivers and protocols to load io net del900 p npm qnet amp This causes io net to load the devn e1900 so Ethernet driver and the Qnet protocol stack Or you can use the mount and umount commands to start and stop modules dynamically like this io net amp mount Tio net devn el1900 so mount Tio net npm qnet so To unload the driver type umount dev io net en0O February 1 2005 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing 243 Checking out the neighborhood 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You can t unmount a protocol stack such as TCP IP or Qnet Checking out the neighborhood Once you ve started Qnet the net directory includes an ent
420. rking 256 Choosing the right stack configuration 257 Tiny stack npm ttcpip so 258 Full TCP IP stack npm tepip so 259 Running the Internet daemons 260 Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack 262 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 263 Using PPPoE 264 Using DHCP 266 Using AutoIP 266 Using the SRI SNMP suite for Neutrino 267 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 14 15 February 1 2005 Troubleshooting 268 Are io net and the drivers running 268 Is the TCP IP protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed 269 What is the nameserver information 269 How do I map hostnames to IP addresses 270 How do I get the network status 270 How do I make sure I m connected to other hosts 271 How do I display information about an interface controller 271 Printing 273 Overview of printing 275 Printing with lpr 276 User interface 277 Spooling directories 281 Access control 281 Network manager 282 Printer capabilities etc printcap 283 Some etc printcapexamples 288 Remote printing to a printer on another network 293 Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr 294 Printing with spooler 295 Setting up spooler 295 Remote printing over Qnet 298 Remote printing over TCP IP 298 Troubleshooting 300 Understanding lpr error messages 300 Troubleshooting remote printing problems 303 Connecting Hardware 305 Introduction 307 PCI AGP devices 308 CD ROMs 309 Contents xi 2005 QNX
421. ronment by modifying the configuration files in your home directory see Configuring Your Environment Changing your password 24 To change your password use the passwd utility if you re using Photon you can use phuser Either utility prompts you for your current password and then for a new one You have to repeat the new password to guard against typographical errors In phuser you can also choose an icon to represent yourself when you log in Depending on the password rules that the system administrator has set passwd may require that you enter a password of a certain length or one that contains certain elements such as a combination of letters numbers and punctuation If the password you select doesn t meet the criteria passwd asks you to choose another If other users can access your system e g it s connected to the Internet has a dial in modem or is physically accessible by others be sure to choose a password that will secure your account from unauthorized use You should choose passwords that e are more than 5 characters long e consist of multiple words or numbers and include punctuation or white space e you haven t used on other systems many systems and websites in particular don t store and communicate passwords in encrypted form this lets people who gain access to those systems see your password in plain text e incorporate both uppercase and lowercase letters e don t contain words phrase
422. rors try switching to a full duplex network or if the network is TCP IP based try introducing a few switches instead of hubs Deferred Transmits Commonly found on half duplex networks this value doesn t mean that there are problems It means that the card tried to send data on the network cable but the network was busy with other data on the cable So it simply waited for a random amount of time This number can get high if the network is very busy February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 343 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Late Collision on Transmit errors 344 Late collision errors that occur when a card has transmitted enough of a frame that the rest of the network should be aware that the network is currently in use yet another system on the network still started to transfer a frame onto the line They re the same as regular collision errors but were just detected too late Depending on the protocol these types of errors can be detrimental to the protocol s overall throughput For example a 1 packet loss on the NFS protocol using the default retransmission timers is enough to slow the speed down by approximately 90 If you experience low throughput with your networking check to make sure that you aren t getting these types of errors Typically Ethernet adapters don t retransmit frames that have been lost to a late collision These errors are a sign that the time to propagate
423. rowser Disable Exception Dialog Disable alerts from the JavaScript alert function Enable WML net front server only Enable Wireless Markup Language WML support February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 89 Connecting to other systems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Print tab Use the Print tab to configure the way Voyager prints pages Select one of the four corners of the page icon to view the current header or footer format You can e Enter a new format as listed under Formatting Codes in the dialog e Click Disable to disable that header or footer e Click Default to set the header or footer to the default setting Applications tab Use the Applications tab to configure helper applications for MIME content on web pages You can e Click New Type to enter information about a new MIME type e Click Edit to edit the currently selected MIME type e Click Remove to delete the currently selected MIME type from the list Connecting to other systems Photon supports the following methods for connecting between computers running Photon e Phditto a self hosted utility that lets you view and interact with another Photon workspace in a network e Phindows a connectivity tool that lets you connect a Microsoft Windows platform to Photon and Photon applications on a remote Neutrino computer Phditto The phditto utility lets you connect to a Photon session that s running on another comp
424. rs to blue text 1 ona light gray background 7 You can also define the exact RGB values for all the 16 colors that pterm uses by creating a palette file For more information see pterm in the Utilities Reference 104 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting When I change the language setting under Localization nothing changes Why This setting sets the ABLANG environment variable which some applications use to determine what language they should use Some applications may not support the language you ve selected Changing the setting typically doesn t affect applications that are running just new ones How can I disable the she1f If you just want to close the shelf in your current Photon session you can slay it using slay fs9 shelf A more permanent approach is to set the PHSHELF_DISABLE environment variable to 1 You can do this in your profile file with export PHSHELF _DISABLE 1 February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 105 Chapter 6 Working with Files In this chapter Everything isa file 109 Filenames and pathnames 110 Where everything is stored 117 File ownership and permissions 132 Filename extensions 135 Troubleshooting 139 February 1 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 107 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Everything is a file This chapter concentrates on working with files in the QNX 4 filesyste
425. rupt data This corruption could be caused by a faulty hub cable or network card The best way to try to solve Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC errors is to do a binary division of the systems on the network to determine which system is sending bad data Once you ve done that you can start replacing the hardware piece by piece Because this error is on the receiving end it s difficult to determine if the CRC is bad on a sent packet 346 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Modems Packets Dropped on receive This usually means you got an overrun while receiving a packet This has to do with DMA and the FIFO like a Transmit Underrun except in this case the DMA engine can t copy the packet into memory as fast as the data is coming from the network and the packet gets dropped Like the Transmit Underrun this is generally due to poor hardware Ethernet Headers out of range This entry indicates the number of packets whose Ethernet type length field isn t valid Oversized Packets received An oversized packet is simply a received packet that was too big to fit in the driver s Receive buffer Frames with Dribble Bits Dribble bits are extra bits of data that were received after the Ethernet CRC They re commonly caused by faulty hardware or by Ethernet cabling that doesn t conform to the 802 3 specifications Total Frames experiencing Collision s This is the tot
426. ry for all other nodes on your local subnetwork that are running Qnet You can access files and processes on other machines as if they were on your own computer at least as far as the permissions allow For example to display the contents of a file on another machine you can use less specifying the path through net less net alonzo etc TIMEZONE To get system information about all of the remote nodes that are listed in net use pidin with the net argument pidin net You can use pidin with the n option to get information about the processes on another machine pidin n alonzo less You can even run a process on another machine using your console for input and output by using the option to the on command on f alonzo date Troubleshooting 244 All the software components for the Qnet network should work in unison with the hardware to build a native network If your Qnet network isn t working you can use various Qnet utilities to fetch diagnostic information to troubleshoot your hardware as well as the network Some of the typical questions are Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting e Is Qnet running e Are io net and the drivers running e Is the Qnet protocol stack or Ethernet driver installed e Is the network card functional e How do I get diagnostic information e Is the Qnet version correct e Is the
427. rypting it using secret key cryptography algorithms IPsec has these modes of operation Transport Protects peer to peer communication between end nodes Tunnel Supports IP in IP encapsulation operation and is designed for security gateways such as VPN configurations The IPsec support is subject to change as the IPsec protocols develop For more information see IPSec in the Neutrino Library Reference To find out how to enable IPSec see Device enumeration in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide Setting up a firewall February 1 2005 Just as a building or vehicle uses specially constructed walls to prevent the spread of fire so computer systems use firewalls to prevent or limit access to certain applications or systems and to protect systems from malicious attacks To create a firewall under Neutrino you can use a combination of e IP Filtering to control access to your machine e Network Address Translation NAT known to Linux users as IP masquerading to connect several computers through a common external interface Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 437 Setting up a firewall 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You ll find both of these in the Extended Networking Technology Development Kit TDK Sample IP filtering and NAT configuration files are supplied as etc ipf conf and etc ipnat conf If you re using a Neutrino machine as a gateway to an internal network y
428. s launching 76 disabling 127 172 stat 448 static routing 255 statistics system 445 447 status or stat CVS command 383 status system 445 statvfs 448 452 stderr 49 stdin 49 stdio h 451 stdout 49 sticky bit 134 sticky tags CVS 387 390 strain reducing 77 stream editor sed 202 strftime 192 stty 332 334 351 su 29 SuperDisk drives 318 superuser See root support technical 473 supported hardware 307 symbolic links 218 cd command and 113 removing 220 SYMLOOP MAX 220 Symmetric Multiprocessing TDK 8 Index 555 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd sync 453 sys 130 sysconf 462 sysinit 163 164 166 168 242 SYSNAME 181 system administrator See root initialization local 171 chkfsys 420 limits 468 logger 120 122 163 166 page initializing 158 rebooting 14 recovering data after crash 420 shutting down 14 size reducing 458 starting 157 troubleshooting 174 statistics 445 447 status 445 rwhod daemon 262 troubleshooting boot failure 422 System Builder perspective IDE 458 SYSTEMDRIVE DOS variable 63 SYSTEMROOT DOS variable 63 T Tab key 44 tags 377 takeover attacks 433 talk UNIX command 3 tapes 307 556 Index tar 395 399 401 taskbar 71 75 taskbar so 75 taskkill DOS command 59 tasklist DOS command 59 TCP 253 TCP IP 3 253 335 clients 253 configuration files 123 customizing 170 full stack 257 259 network status 270 limits 469 Phindows configuring for
429. s or numbers that other people can guess e g avoid the names of family members and pets license plate numbers and birthdays Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Managing other accounts For more information on system security see Securing Your System Forgot your password If you forget your password ask the system administrator root user to assign a new password to your account Only root can do this In general no one can retrieve your old password from the etc shadow file If your password is short or a single word your system administrator or a hacker can easily figure it out but you re better off with a new password If you re the system administrator and you ve forgotten the password for root you need to find an alternate way to access the etc passwd and etc shadow files in order to reset the root password Some possible ways to do this are e Boot the system from another disk or device where you can log in as root such as from a QNX Momentics PE installation CD ROM and from there manually reset the password e Access the necessary files from the root account of another Neutrino machine using Qnet For more information see Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing e Remove the media on which the etc passwd and etc shadow are stored and install it on another Neutrino machine from which you can modify the files e Inthe cas
430. s 378 Repositories 378 Editors and CVS 379 Contents Xiii 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Xiv 18 Contents Creating a repository 379 Getting files in and out of the repository 380 Putting changes back into the repository 382 Importing an existing source tree 382 Getting information on files 383 Changing files 384 More information on files what changed and why 385 CVS and directory trees 386 Concurrent development branching and merging 387 Branching 387 Merging 388 Removing and restoring files 389 Setting up a CVS server 390 Backing Up and Recovering Data 393 Introduction 395 Backup strategies 396 Choosing backup storage media and location 396 Choosing a backup format 398 Controlling your backup 398 Archiving your data 398 Creating an archive 399 Extracting from an archive 401 Compressing an archive 401 Decompressing the archive 402 Storage choices 403 CDs 403 Bootable CDs 404 Removable media 405 Backing up physical hard disks 405 Ghost Images 406 Remote backups 406 CVS 406 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 19 February 1 2005 Remote filesystems 407 Other remote backups 407 QNX 4 disk structure 407 Partition components 408 Directories 411 Links 413 Extent blocks 414 Files 416 File maintenance utilities 416 fdisk 417 dinit 417 chkfsys 418 dcheck 418 zap 418 spatch 419 Recovering disks and files 419 Using chkfsys 419 Recovering from a bad block in the middle of a file
431. s Ctrl D Shutting down and rebooting You rarely need to reboot a Neutrino system If a driver or other system process crashes you can usually restart that one process Don t simply turn off a running Neutrino system because processes might not shut down properly and any data that s in a filesystem s cache might not get written to the disk For information about reducing this effect see Filesystems in the Fine Tuning Your System chapter To shut down or reboot the system in text mode use the shutdown command You can do this only if you re logged in as root This utility has several options that let you e name the node to shut down default is the current node e specify the type of shutdown default is to reboot e shut down quickly e list the actions taken while shutting down i e be verbose In Photon you can run phshutdown from the command line or choose Shutdown from the Launch or Desktop menu By default you don t have to be root to do this Before shutdown and phshutdown shut down the system they send a SIGTERM signal to any running processes to give them the opportunity to terminate cleanly For more information on these utilities see in the Utilities Reference 14 Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down February 1 2005 Chapter 3 Managing User Accounts In this chapter What does a user account do 17 Account database 20 Managing your own account 24 Managin
432. s Ltd Although the RAM filesystem itself doesn t support hard or soft links or directories you can create a link to it by using process manager links For example you could create a link to a RAM based tmp directory ln sP dev shmem tmp This tells proento to create a process manager link to dev shmem known as tmp Most application programs can then open files under tmp as if it were a normal filesystem In order to minimize the size of the RAM filesystem code inside the process manager this filesystem specifically doesn t include big filesystem features such as file locking and directory creation QNX 4 filesystem 214 The QNX 4 filesystem the default for Neutrino uses the same on disk structure as in the QNX 4 operating system This filesystem is implemented by the s qnx4 so shared object and is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting a QNX 4 filesystem You can create a QNX disk partition by using the fdisk and dinit utilities This filesystem implements a robust design using an extent based bitmap allocation scheme with fingerprint control structures to safeguard against data loss and to provide easy recovery Features include e extent based POSIX filesystem e robustness all sensitive filesystem info is written through to disk e on disk signatures and special key information to allow fast data recovery in the event of disk damage e 505 character filenam
433. s a network and by the fact that the facilities are often shared restricting your access for storing or retrieving your backups Here s a summary of some of the backup media you might consider and their availability for local or remote backups Media Local Neutrino Remote Floppy Yes Yes LS 120 Yes Yes Tape No Yes CD Yes Yes DVD No Yes Hard disk Yes Yes Flash device Yes Yes USB mass storage device Yes Yes February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 397 Archiving your data 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Choosing a backup format When backing up your data you need to decide whether to back up each file and directory separately or in an archive with a collection of other files You also need to decide whether or not to compress your data to reduce the storage requirements for your backups The time lost to compression and decompression may be offset to a degree by the reduced time it takes to write or read the compressed data to media or to transfer it through a network To reduce the expense of compression you may choose to compress the backup copies of your data as a background task after the data has been copied possibly days or weeks after to reduce the storage requirements of older backups while keeping newer backups as accessible as possible Controlling your backup You should back up often enough so that you can recover data that s still current or can be made current with minimal w
434. s an entry for node2 in the etc hosts 1pd file on nodel1 The etc printcap file on node2 might be as follows rlpt1 xrm nodel rp lpt1 1lp This file specifies the remote host with the printer named 1pt1 to be nodel The local printer name rlpt1 is used by local clients and could be the same as the remote name 1pt1 Make sure there s an entry for nodel in etc hosts Multiple printers Now let s add another printer to node1 this time connected to dev par2 i J S amp dev parl dev par2 TCP IP nodel node2 February 1 2005 Chapter 14 e Printing 289 Printing with lpr 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You should define multiple printers carefully because the default capabilities aren t suitable for all printers For example use the sd field to specify a unique spool directory for each printer The etc printcap file on nodel now looks like this lpt1 lp dev par1 sd usr spool output l1pt1 lpt2 lp dev par2 sd usr spool output l1pt2 This specifies the following these printers e lpt1 connected to dev par1 and using usr spool output 1pt1 for spooling e lpt2 connected to dev par2 and using usr spool output 1pt2 for spooling Make sure there s an entry for node2 in the etc hosts 1pd file on nodel To refer to these two printers remotely from node2 create
435. s case use the fdisk to identify which drive is which The new drive shouldn t have any partitions set up on it and should be blank CAUTION Be absolutely positive about the drives before continuing because if you don t identify the drives correctly you could copy the contents of the blank hard drive onto your original drive and you ll lose all your data There s no way to recover from this Once you ve identified the drives type Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 405 Remote backups 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd cp V dev hd0 dev hd1 where hdO is the original hard disk and hd1 is the new drive that you re copying to This command copies everything from the first drive including partition tables boot loaders and so on onto the second drive To test that the copy was successful remove the original drive and put the backup drive in its place then boot the system from the backup drive The system should boot into Neutrino and look the same as your original drive Keep the backup in a safe location Ghost Images Some Neutrino users have used ghost images for backups but we don t recommend them Partition information might not be restored properly causing filesystems to not boot correctly If you run fdisk again on the drive the drive reports incorrect information and fdisk writes incorrect data to the drive Remote backups CVS 406 Remote backups are generally a much safe
436. s given You might want to add other features as well Here s the buildfile used to set up a machine to allow telnet connections to log in for shell access and tftp access for file transfer over PPP virtual x86 bios compress bootstrap startup bios K8250 2 8 0 57600 1843200 16 v PATH proc boot procnto vvv script startup script seedres pci bios amp waitfor dev pci Start 1 keyboard console devc con n8 amp Start serial A driver waitfor dev conl reopen dev conl devc ser8250 e b38400 waitfor dev serl pipe touch tmp syslog syslogd devc pty io net ppppmgr pttcpip waitfor dev io net ip ppp inetd amp display_msg She11 session PATH bin proc boot bin sh amp Make tmp point to the shared memory area type link tmp dev shmem Programs require the runtime linker ldqnx so to be at a fixed location type link usr lib ldqnx so 2 proc boot libc so type link bin sh bin ksh We use the c shared lib which also contains the February 1 2005 Appendix Ae Examples 491 PPP with CHAP authentication between two Neutrino boxes Systems Ltd 2005 QNX Software 492 runtime linker libc so libsocket so npm ttcpip so npm pppmgr so The files above this line can be shared by multiple processes data c devc con devc ser8250 devc pty pci bios seedres pipe io net bin echo echo bin stty stty tail pci chat
437. s settings for Photon When you run phgrafx you can select from a list of available graphic modes for each video driver supported by your graphic card The list is generated by a hardware scan Photon performs during installation Localization phlocale Localization or Time amp Date in the shelf or Launch Configure Localization Set your machine s time zone language keyboard see International keyboards in Using the Command Line time and date Mouse input cfg Mouse in the shelf or Launch gt Configure Mouse Set the speed and acceleration of the mouse pointer You can also swap the buttons to reduce the strain of using the mouse with your left hand and enable the wheel if the mouse has one Network phlip Network in the shelf or Launch gt Configure Network Manage your network and modem settings Print manager prjobs View start or cancel jobs in the print queue Remote access phrelaycfg Create or delete the etc system config noditto file which prevents anyone from using phditto to access your Photon workspace from a remote machine Screen saver savercfg Screen Saver in the shelf or Launch Configure Screen Saver Configure the Photon screen saver You can select from a list of screen savers and set the activation time a password and any command line options that the selected screen saver might have February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 77 Browsing files with th
438. s the job to be printed locally or if printing remotely attempts to forward the job to the appropriate machine If the printer can t be opened or the destination machine can t be reached the job remains queued until the work can be completed Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr lprq show printer queue The lprq program works recursively backwards displaying the queue of the machine with the printer and then the queue s of the machine s that lead to it This utility has these forms of output e short format the default gives a single line of output per queued job e long format if you specify the 1 option shows the list and sizes of files that comprise a job lprrm remove jobs from a queue The lprrm command deletes jobs from a spooling queue If necessary lprrm first kills a running daemon that s servicing the queue and restarts it after the required files are removed When removing jobs destined for a remote printer lprrm acts like lprq except it first checks locally for jobs to remove and then tries to remove files in queues off machine You can remove only your own print jobs from the queue lprc printer control program The 1pre program is used to control the operation of the line printer system For each printer configured in etc printcap lpre may be used to e disable or enable a printer e disable or enable a printer
439. s to an entry in longfilenames Extent blocks are used for any file that has more than a single extent The i_xblk field in the directory entry points to one of these extent blocks which in turn defines where the second and subsequent extents are to be found Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd QNX 4 disk structure An extent block is exactly one 512 byte disk block with the following form xblk_ next_xblk xblk_ prev_xblk xblk_num_xtnts xblk_spare 3 xblk_num blocks xblk xtnts 0 xblk xtnts 1 xblk xtnts 59 xblk signature IamXblk first xb1k only xblk_ first _xtnt An extent block Each extent block contains e forward backward pointers e acount of extents e acount of all the blocks in all the extents defined by this extent block e pointers and block counts for each extent e a signature IamXb1k The first extent block also contains a redundant pointer to the first file extent also described within the directory inode entry This lets you recover all data in the file by locating this block alone February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 415 File maintenance utilities 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Files Files or file extents are groupings of blocks described by directory inode entries they have no structure imposed on them by the QNX 4 filesyste
440. se this method to exit Photon specify the b option on the input driver for your system For more information see Input drivers devi in the Utilities Summary in the Utilities Reference Photon environment variables Environment variables set options and determine the behavior of your system You can easily set environment variables that configure Photon using the terminal The command for setting an environment 96 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Photon environment variables variable depends on the shell that you re using For ksh and esh you can use the export command Here s a list of environment variable specific to Photon For a general list of environment variables see Commonly Used Environment Variables in the Utilities Reference ABLANG ABLPATH AB_RESOVRD A language code e g en_CA for Canadian English that a multilingual Photon application uses to determine what language to display For more information see International Language Support in the Photon Programmer s Guide for the currently supported codes see usr photon appbuilder languages def A list of directories in which you want a multilingual Photon application to search for translation files For more information see International Language Support in the Photon Programmer s Guide and ph in the Utilities Reference A path variable that lists directories to search f
441. see PfAttach in the Photon Library Reference PHFONTOPTS Options to pass to the Photon font server For more information see phfont PHGFX The full command that you want the ph script to use instead of the default commands to start the graphics driver PHINPUT The full command that you want the ph script to use instead of the default commands to start the input driver PHINSTANCE The number of times that Photon has been instantiated For more information see phlogin2 and phlogin in the Utilities Reference PHOTON The name of the Photon device usually dev photon For more information see ph in the Utilities Reference PHOTONOPTS Windows hosted version only Additional options you want to pass to the Photon server when it starts PHOTON PATH The name of the root directory containing Photon files usually usr photon For more information see ph in the Utilities Reference PHWM The name of the Window Manager to start when you start Photon For more information see ph in the Utilities Reference PHWMEXIT If you set this environment variable Photon disables the confirmation dialog when you exit Photon For more information see pwm in the Utilities Reference Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 101 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd PHWMOPTS Options you want to pass to the window manager when it starts For more information see pwm in the Utilities Reference PTERMPAL The pa
442. shed from cache under the control of the global blk delwri option the default is two seconds see io b1k so in the Utilities Reference e You control the global configuration with the commit option either to io b1k so as an option to apply to all filesystems or via the mount command as an option to apply to a single instance of a mounted filesystem The levels are none low medium and high which differ in the degree in which metadata is written synchronously versus asynchronously or even time delayed Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System 453 Filesystems 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd At any level less robust than the default i e medium the filesystem doesn t guarantee the same level of integrity following an unexpected power loss because multiple block updates might not be ordered correctly The sections that follow illustrate the effects of different configurations on performance Block I O commit level Record size This table illustrates how the commit affects the time it takes to create and delete a file on an x86 PII 450 machine with a UDMA 2 EIDE disk running a QNX 4 filesystem The table shows how many OK files could be created and deleted per second commit level Numbercreated Number deleted high 866 1221 medium 1030 2703 low 1211 2710 none 1407 2718 Note that at the commit high level all disk writes are synchronous so there s a noticeable cost in updating the directory en
443. sk command to specify the mask for setting the permissions on new files The default mask is 002 so any new files give read and write permission to the user i e the owner of the file and the rest of the user s group and read permission to other users If you want to remove read and write permissions from the other users add this command to your profile umask 006 If you re the system administrator and you want this change to apply to everyone change the umask setting in etc profile For more information about profiles see Configuring Your Environment Filename extensions This table lists some common filename extensions used in a Neutrino system Extension Description Related programs utilities 1 Troff style text e g from man and troff in the UNIX man manual pages third party repository a Library archive ar awk Awk script awk b Bench calculator library or be program bat MS DOS batch file For use on DOS systems won t run under Neutrino See Writing Shell Scripts and ksh for information on writing shell scripts for Neutrino bmp Bitmap graphical image pv Photon viewer February 1 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files continued 135 Filename extensions 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Extension Description Related programs utilities build OS image buildfile mkifs c C program source code qcec make QNX Momentics development system required C cc cpp C program sou
444. ss space as the kernel Of course the potential weakness is outweighed by the demonstrated strength of this model since embedded systems generally aren t overly concerned with local attacks For more information about the microkernel design and message passing see the chapter on the QNX Neutrino microkernel in the System Architecture guide Our remote debug agent pdebug runs on a target system and communicates with the gdb debugger on the host The pdebug agent can run as a dedicated server on a port be spawned from inetd with incoming connections or be spawned by qconn The pdebug agent is generally run as root so anyone can upload download or execute any arbitrary code at root s privilege level This agent was designed to be run on development systems not production machines There s no means of authentication or security and none is planned for the future See the section on qconn below Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 435 Neutrino specific security issues 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd qconn Qnet IPSec The qconn daemon is a server that runs on a target system and handles all incoming requests from our IDE The qconn server spawns pdebug for debugging requests profiles applications gathers system information and so on Like pdebug qconn is inherently insecure and is meant for development systems Unlike for pdebug we plan to give it a security model with some form of authentication This will le
445. sses that they ve been configured with netstat rn Display the network routing tables that determine how the stack can reach another host If there s no route to another host you get a no route to host error netstat an List information about TCP IP connections to or from your system This includes the state of the connections or the amount of data pending on the connections It also provides the IP addresses and ports of the local and remote ends of the connections For the tiny TCP IP stack you have to use the following command as it doesn t support netstat cat proc ipstats For more information about netstat see the Utilities Reference 270 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting How do I make sure I m connected to other hosts Use the ping utility to determine if you re connected to other hosts For example ping isp com On success ping displays something like this PING isp com 10 0 0 1 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 0 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 1 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 2 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 3 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 4 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 5 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 6 tt1 255 time 0 ms This report continues until you terminate ping for example
446. stem into debug shell mode press Space during booting up then press F5 to start the debug shell Once you re in the debug shell fesh enter the exit command then wait for the second shell prompt Type this command export PATH bin usr bin sbin usr sbin You can then correct your re local or move it out of the way so that you can boot without it cd etc re d cp rce local rc local bad rm rc local February 1 2005 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts 175 February 1 2005 Chapter 9 Configuring Your Environment In this chapter What happens when you log in Customizing your home 180 Configuring your shell 180 Environment variables 183 Configuration strings 184 Setting the time zone 186 Customizing Photon 193 Terminal types 196 Troubleshooting 196 179 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 177 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What happens when you log in The Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter describes what happens when you boot your system and what you can do to customize the system This chapter describes how you can customize the environment that you get when you log in and then describes some of the setup you might need to do What happens when you log in Before you start customizing your login environment you should understand just what happens when you log in because the nature of the customization determines where you should make it You should consider these qu
447. ster appears as dev hdO e The ORB drive set up as a primary slave appears as dev hd1 To mount an ORB drive mount dev hdl fs orb_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks 318 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Hard disks Zip and Jaz disks Zip and Jaz disks are large capacity removable storage disks used for backing up hard disks and for transporting large files These disks attach to the EIDE ATA chain Before you attempt to use them ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly These drives are simple to set up and they appear in the dev directory as a hard disk For example e The hard disk set up as a primary master appears as dev hdO e The Zip disk set up as a primary slave appears as dev hd1 To mount the drive type mount dev hdl fs zip_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks Magnetic optical drives Magnetic optical MO drives are usually attached to a SCSI or EIDE ATA bus Before you attempt to use the drive ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly The driver that you need depends on whether the drive is attached to a SCSI or EIDE interface If it s SCSI you ll need to determine the proper driver for your SCSI interface If it s EIDE simply use the devb eide driver For more informati
448. system operation and sends a response back to the client Card Information Structure February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd command completion A shell feature that saves typing type enough of the command s name to identify it uniquely and then press Esc twice If possible the shell fills in the rest of the name command interpreter A process that parses what you type on the command line also known as a Shell compound command A command that includes a shell s reserved words grouping constructs and function definitions e g ls al less Contrast simple command configurable limit A special variable that stores system information Some e g _PC_NAME_MAX depend on the filesystem and are associated with a path others e g SC_ARG_MAX are independent of paths configuration string A system variable that s like an environment variable but is more dynamic When you set an environment variable the new value affects only the current instance of the shell and any of its children that you create after setting the variable when you set a configuration string its new value is immediately available to the entire system connection A kernel object used with message passing Connections are created by client threads to connect to the channels made available by servers Once connections are established clients can MsgSend messages over them February 1 2005 Glossary 501 200
449. system that the package filesystem presents to the user looks like this ma aa of IBA B ls true passwd Virtual filesystem using the package filesystem 2 cat ec When an open style request comes to the virtual filesystem a lookup is performed The lookup determines if the file is indeed managed by February 1 2005 Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems 229 Package filesystem 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd the package filesystem If it is then the system redirects the request to the real location of the file inside the appropriate package The real location could be on any filesystem QNX 4 Linux DOS across the network via NFS CIFS or even cached locally a shadow filesystem You should use the package filesystem manager fs pkg to control which packages your node sees This style of redirection is similar to symbolic link Once the file is opened all I O requests go directly to the file s filesystem manager bypassing the package filesystem This way the package filesystem doesn t interfere with read write performance Your node creates a configuration file typically called etc system package or etc host_cfg HOSTNAME etc system packages where the HOSTNAME environment variable specifies the name of the client node This file tells the package filesystem which packages are to be presented to the client node and where they should be placed To get information about a pack
450. t pax rw backup_directory To back up only certain files matching some criteria use the find utility or other means of identifying the files to be backed up and pipe the output to pax rw like this find my_directory name ch pax rw backup_directory To combine individual files into a single archive use tar or pax These utilities take all the files that you give them and place them into one big contiguous file You can use the same utilities to extract discrete files from the archives February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 399 Archiving your data 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 400 The filesystem can t support archives or any other files that are larger than 2G When you use pax as an archiver pax w mode it writes tar format archives Your choice of which to use is based on the command line syntax that works better for you not the format of the archives because the formats are identical The pax utility was created as part of the POSIX standard to provide a consistent mechanism for archive exchange pax stands for Portable Archive eXchange thus avoiding conflict between variants of the tar utility that behave differently You can create archives of e Single files although there isn t much point in doing so with tar and pax For example pax wf my_archive tar code c This command takes code c and creates an archive sometimes referred to as a tarball
451. t which it does by partition type It recognizes e CD ROMs e types 1 4 6 11 12 14 DOS e type 131 Ext2 if the e option is passed to diskboot e type 77 78 79 QNX 4 These are mounted as s cdx for CD ROMs and s hdx type y where x is a disk number e g s cd0 s hd1 and y is added for uniqueness as it counts upwards For example the second DOS partition on hard drive 1 would be fs hd1 dos 2 By default one QNX 4 partition is mounted as instead This is controlled by looking for a diskroot file on each QNX 4 partition If only one such partition has a diskroot file specifying a mountpoint of that partition is unmounted as s hdx type y and is then mounted as if more than one is found then diskboot prompts you to select one The diskroot file is usually empty but it can contain some commands For more information see below Optionally diskboot runs the fat embedded shell fesh Next diskboot starts the console driver devc con Finally diskboot runs the main system initialization script etc system sysinit diskroot The diskboot program uses the diskroot file to determine which QNX 4 partition to mount as The diskroot file can be one of 164 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd diskroot February 1 2005 e a0 length file This is the default which requests a mountpoint of e a one line file that specifies the
452. t parts of an HTML file are transmitted For Slinger to process SSI tokens the HTML file must have shtm1 as its file extension You can use SSI tags to interact with a data server Syntax for SSI Commands February 1 2005 Here are some examples of SSI commands that you can use in your scripts lt echo var DATE_LOCAL gt Display the time and date lt echo var DATE_GMT gt Display the time and date using Greenwich Mean Time lt echo var REMOTE_ADDR gt Display the visitor s IP address lt echo var HTTP_USER_AGENT gt Display the visitor s browser information Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 369 Security precautions 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd lt config timefmt A B d y gt This file last modified lt echo vars LAST_MODIFIED gt Display the date the page was last modified lt include virtual myfile shtml gt Include the file myfile shtm1 as inline HTML in the web page lt exec cgi counter pl gt Execute the CGI script counter p1 and put the output on the web page lt config cmdecho on gt lt exec cmd cd tmp 1s gt Display the contents of the tmp directory on the web page Data server method You can also handle dynamic HTML by using a data server process ds A data server lets multiple threads share data without regard for process boun
453. t you leave qconn on production machines in the field to provide services such as remote upgrades and fault correction Qnet is Neutrino s transparent networking protocol It s described in the Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing chapter in this guide and in Native Networking Qnet in the System Architecture guide Qnet displays other Neutrino machines on the network in the filesystem and lets you treat remote systems as extensions of the local machine It does no authentication beyond getting a user ID from the incoming connection so be careful when running it on a machine that s accessible to public networks To make Qnet more secure you can use the maproot and mapany options which map incoming connections root or anyone respectively to a specific user ID For more information see npm qnet so in the Utilities Reference IPsec is a security protocol for the Internet Protocol layer that you can use for example to set up a secure tunnel between machines or networks It consists of these subprotocols 436 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Setting up a firewall AH Authentication Header Guarantees the integrity of the IP packet and protects it from intermediate alteration or impersonation by attaching a cryptographic checksum computed by one way hash functions ESP Encapsulated Security Payload Protects the IP payload from wire tapping by enc
454. tably native messaging synchronous client server relationship POSIX message queues and pipes asynchronous as well as signals IPL Initial Program Loader the software component that either takes control at the processor s reset vector e g location 0OxFFFFFFFO0 on the x86 or is a BIOS extension This component is responsible for setting up the machine into a usable state such that the startup program can then perform further initializations The IPL is written in assembler and C See also BIOS ROM Monitor extension signature and startup code IRQ Interrupt Request a hardware request line asserted by a peripheral to indicate that it requires servicing by software The IRQ is handled by the PIC which then interrupts the processor usually causing the processor to execute an Interrupt Service Routine ISR ISR Interrupt Service Routine a routine responsible for servicing hardware e g reading and or writing some device ports for updating some data structures shared between the ISR and the thread s running in the application and for signalling the thread that some kind of event has occurred 506 Glossary February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd kernel See microkernel level sensitive link message metadata microkernel February 1 2005 One of two ways in which a PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller can be programmed to respond to interrupts If the PIC is operating in
455. tal Packets Transmitted Bad Broadcast Multicast You can use this statistic to determine if you have faulty hardware If all the sent packets are reported as bad there s likely a hardware problem but you might be using the wrong driver Check the hardware for compatibility If it looks as if it s hardware related try switching the hardware to see if the problem disappears Packets Transmitted OK This is the number of broadcast packets transmitted from the NIC Packets Transmitted OK This is the number of multicast packets transmitted from the NIC Memory Allocation Failures on Transmit Before transmitting data the driver reserves system memory for a buffer to hold the data to be transmitted Once the card is ready the buffer is sent to it When a memory allocation error occurs the system is likely very low on memory Make sure that there s sufficient memory on the system if you continuously get this error consider adding more memory Another thing to check for is memory leaks on the system which may be slowly consuming system memory Packets Received OK This value states how many packets were successfully received from the network card If a card is having problems receiving data check the cables and the hub connection Problems receiving data might be related to the driver It s possible the driver can be properly set up and able to send data but may not be able to receive Usually when data is received but d
456. td command because the entire string is interpreted as the filename to be executed 34 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts February 1 2005 Chapter 4 Using the Command Line In this chapter Command line or GUI 37 Processing a command 37 Character device drivers 38 Shell 42 Utilities 54 Basic commands 58 International keyboards 59 Neutrino for MS DOS users 59 Troubleshooting 64 February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 35 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Command line or GUI Command line or GUI Like QNX 4 UNIX and DOS Neutrino is based on a command line interface Although Neutrino includes an easy to use graphical interface see the Using the Photon microGUI chapter you ll likely have to type a command sometime especially if you re the system administrator For information about choosing Photon or text mode see the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide For developing software you don t always have to use the command line the QNX Momentics Professional Edition includes an Integrated Development Environment IDE that provides a graphical way to write build and test code The IDE frequently uses Neutrino utilities but hides the command line from you For more information see the IDE User s Guide If you want to use command lines from Photon you can start a pterm terminal by clicking on the Terminal icon Jal Terminal on the Photon shelf located at
457. ted by whitespace or by the special characters that the shell processes As it forms words the shell builds commands e simple commands usually programs that you want to run e g less my_file e compound commands including reserved words grouping constructs and function definitions You can also specify multiple commands on the command line The shell processes aliases recursively The shell does any required substitutions including parameters commands and filenames The shell does any redirection The shell matches the remaining commands in this order special builtins functions regular builtins executables To override the order in which the shell processes the command line you use quoting to change the meaning of the special characters The sections that follow give the briefest descriptions of these steps ksh is a very powerful command interpreter For more details see its entry in the Utilities Reference Editing the command line The Korn shell supports emacs style commands that let you edit the command line February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 43 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd If you want to Press Move to the beginning of the line Ctrl A Move to the end of the line Ctrl E Move to the end of the current word Esc F Move to the beginning of the current word Esc B Delete the character at the cursor Ctrl D Delete the character before the cursor Ctrl H
458. ted links text and background click on an option s color swatch to view a selector to set the color for that option e the font for text headings and fixed width text e the default text size for a web page e whether you want the toolbar to include just icons just text or both If the browser is using the net front server these options are also available e the scrollbar size in pixels e whether you want the browser to disable pop up windows generated by JavaScript Connection tab In this part of Voyager s configuration dialog you can specify the following Use Proxy Server Enable this item if you use a proxy server s for HTTP FTP or Gopher or if you use a SOCKS host to connect to the Internet February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 87 Surfing the web with Voyager 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Max Connections HTTP Proxy FTP Proxy Gopher Proxy SOCKS Host Proxy Overrides The maximum number of connections to the Internet allowed at any one time The IP address of the HTTP proxy server and the port number in the adjacent field The IP address of the FTP proxy server and the port number in the adjacent field The IP address of the Gopher proxy server and the port number in the adjacent field The IP address of the SOCKS host and the port number in the adjacent field The IP addresses of host computers that shouldn t go through the proxy server s Sep
459. tem is an open source tool used for managing versions of files You can put any types of files under CVS control but this chapter concentrates on source and other text files Version control is the ability to track changes in a file over time Each time a file is changed the date the name of the user who changed the file and a description are all recorded This lets you track when the file changed who changed it and why CVS can also help coordinate changes made to a single file by many users Using CVS for controlling versions of source files lets you mark which changes should be part of a software release and which shouldn t This means you can release a project while continuing to work on future features It is this concurrency that makes using CVS for software version control so popular We ll start off with the basics of using CVS from the initial setup to manipulating your source files We ll also cover more advanced CVS concepts such as concurrent development and remote access For more information about CVS including the full CVS User s Guide see http www cvshome org CVS basics Revisions February 1 2005 CVS stores your files in a central place called a repository The repository is stored on disk either on your local machine or on a remote server This section describes the locally stored version Every time you make changes to a file that s stored in CVS a new revision is created Each revision in
460. tem will no longer boot e someone has either changed overwritten the boot file or changed the system initialization file these are the two most common scenarios The following steps can help you identify the problem Where possible corrective actions are suggested 1 February 1 2005 Try booting from CD or across the network e Ifyou have a network to boot over try booting your machine over the network Once the machine is booted you ll need to log in as root e Ifyou don t have a network boot from your installation CD The filesystem will already be running in this case and you ll be logged in as root Start the hard disk driver For example to start a driver for an Adaptec series 4 SCSI adapter type devb aha4 options amp If you re using another type of driver enter its name instead For example devb eide options qnx4 options amp This should create a block special file called dev hdo that represents the entire hard disk Run fdisk Running the fdisk utility will immediately give you useful information about the state of your hard disk The fdisk utility might report one of several types of problems Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 423 What to do if your system will no longer boot 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Problem Probable cause Remedy Error reading block 1 Wrong disk parameters Bad partition information Either the disk controller or
461. ter or shell parses the command line and uses the space character to break the command into tokens If your filename includes a space you need to quote the space so that the shell knows you want a literal space For more information including other special characters that you need to watch for see Quoting special characters in Using the Command Line February 1 2005 Chapter 6 e Working with Files 139 Chapter 7 Using Editors In this chapter Choosing aneditor 143 Supported editors 144 Third party editors 148 Specifying the default editor 153 February 1 2005 Chapter 7 e Using Editors 141 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Choosing an editor Choosing an editor February 1 2005 An editor is a utility designed to view and modify files Editors don t apply any persistent formatting to viewed text although many use colors or styles to provide additional contextual information such as type information in source code files For example if you re editing C code some editors use different colors to indicate keywords strings numbers and so on Which editor you use is largely a question of personal taste e Do you want to use a mouse or other pointer or do you want to use just the keyboard e Do you need to type international characters accents and diacritical marks or just ASCII e How do you like to invoke commands In some editors you type a single character in others you press a keychord
462. that uses the UCHI controller type io usb d uchi devb umass cam pnp Troubleshooting No device is created in dev The device might not conform to the Mass Storage Class Specification Check the output from usb vv No fdn device was created in dev for a floppy drive The default name is dev hdn You can use the name command line option to cam disk so to override the prefix Character devices General serial adapters By default a serial port driver automatically detects the I O port and IRQ A standard PC system uses the deve ser8250 driver the BSP documentation indicates the drivers specific to your target hardware If the driver doesn t detect all the serial ports ensure that the ports are enabled in the BIOS If the ports are enabled try specifying the I O port and IRQ of the ports when you start the driver Use a comma to February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 331 Character devices 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 332 separate the I O port and the IRQ use a space to separate each port IRQ pair in the command For example devc ser8250 3 8 4 2 8 3 If you start a serial driver for a UART or modem when another serial driver is already running you need to use the u option to give the new driver a number to append to the device name so that it doesn t conflict with any existing dev ser entry The standard devc ser8250 driver supports only the RS 232 protocol The Character Driv
463. the BIOS Comm2 is disabled Modem is configured to Comm2 s ioport and IRQ In the dev directory you ll see e serl Comml e ser2 Modem If you have an ISA PnP modem that can be manually assigned an IRQ and I O port via jumpers we recommend that you use the manual method rather than Plug and Play 348 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Modems The devc ser8250 driver should automatically detect the modem which should appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer There may be more than one entry in dev under the name ser Assume that the first two represent the comm ports of the system Any additional entry is likely the modem However if in doubt try all ser entries with qtalk For more information see Testing Modems below If the modem isn t detected seek out the isapnp utility to configure the modem s I O port and IRQ and then specify them when you start devc ser8250 If you start a serial driver for a UART or modem when another serial driver is already running you need to use the u option to give the new driver a number to append to the device name so that it doesn t conflict with any existing dev ser entry PCl based modems The devc ser8250 driver should automatically detect the modem which should appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer If no entry is created check the output from pe
464. the Securing Your System chapter in this guide e Autodiscovery vs static in the Transparent Distributed Processing Using Qnet chapter of the Neutrino Programmer s Guide Creating useqnet To start Qnet automatically when you boot your system log in as root and create an empty useqnet file like this touch etc system config useqnet If this file exists your etc system sysinit script starts Qnet when you boot your machine If you need to specify any options to Qnet edit sysinit and change these lines Enable qnet if user has enabled it if test r etc system config useqnet a d dev io net then mount Tio net npm qnet so fi For example if the hardware is unreliable you might want to enable Cyclic Redundancy Checking on the packets Change the above lines to Enable qnet if user has enabled it if test r etc system config useqnet a d dev io net then mount Tio net npm qnet so do _crce 1 fi For more information about what happens when you boot your system see Controlling How Neutrino Starts 242 Chapter 12 e Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Starting Qnet Starting the network manager protocols and drivers The io net manager is a process that assumes the central role to load a number of shared objects It provides the framework for the entire protocol stack and lets data pass between modules In the case of native netwo
465. the filename may have any value except the following all values are in hexadecimal e 0x00 through 0x1F all control characters e 0x2F e 0x7F rubout e OxFF If you re using UTF 8 representations of Unicode characters to represent international characters the limit on the filename length will be lower depending on your use of characters in the extended range For more information on UTF 8 and Unicode see the Unicode Multilingual Support appendix in the Photon Programmer s Guide You can use international characters in filenames by using the UTF 8 encoding of Unicode characters If you re using the Photon microGUI this is done transparently you can enter the necessary characters directly from your keyboard and the display shows them correctly within the Photon file manager Filenames containing UTF 8 characters are generally illegible when viewed from the command line You can also use the ISO Latin1 supplemental and PC character sets for international characters however the appearance of these 8 bit characters depends on the display settings of your terminal and might not appear as you expect from within Photon or in other operating systems that access the files via a network Most other operating systems including Microsoft Windows support UTF 8 Unicode characters and their filenames appear correctly in the Photon microGUI environment Filenames from older versions of Microsoft Windows may be encoded using 8 bit
466. the hard disk itself has failed Your hardware has probably lost its information about this hard drive likely because the battery for the CMOS memory is running low If the disk size is reported correctly by fdisk but the partition information is wrong then the data in block 1 of the physical disk has somehow been damaged If the disk is good replacing the controller card might let you continue using the disk Otherwise you ll have to replace the hard drive reinstall Neutrino and restore your files from backup Rerunning the hardware setup procedure or the programmable option select procedure on a PS 2 will normally clear this up Of course replacing the battery will make this a more permanent fix Use fdisk to recreate the correct partition information It s a good idea to write down or print out a hard copy of the correct partition information in case you ever have to do this step 4 Mount the partition and the filesystem At this point you have verified that the hardware is working at least for block 1 and that a valid partition is defined for Neutrino You now need to create a block special file for the QNX 4 partition itself and to mount the block special file as a QNX 4 filesystem mount e dev hd0O mount dev hd0t79 hd 424 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd What to do if your system will no longer boot
467. the right click shortcut menu on the desktop You can also start the helpviewer by typing helpviewer amp on the command line February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 79 Getting help with the Helpviewer 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 5 O File Edit View Bookmarks Help lel gt 2 Pta E Bo E Home Print Back Forward Up Find Where Mark Contents Bookmarks History Options QNX Neutrino RTOS 6 3 Section QNX Neutrino RTOS 6 3 Topics Getting Started e High Availability QNX Neutrino RTOS Integrated Devel Phindows for QN Photon Multilingt T ae iii ii ini iit vy Version 6 3 Photon microGU Power Managem System Architecture QNX 4 to QNX Nel User s Guide Programmer s Guide System Analysis Building Embedded Systems v v v v v memi mimi mgm X Find C lie Utilities Reference E Match Whole Words Library Reference Diicasacensiive Audio Developer s Guide CI Search Topic Text Addon Interfaces Library Reference Search All Topics QNX Neutrino Operating System The Photon helpviewer In the Topics list click on the arrow next to a topic to view the subtopics it contains or double click on a topic to make it the top topic in the list Clicking on a topic displays its content in the topic pane You can also browse to topics by clicking on hypertext links within topic text Links are indicated by color and underline
468. the signal across the network is longer than the time it takes for a network card to place an entire packet on the network Thus the offending system doesn t know that the network is currently in use and it proceeds to place a new frame on the network The nodes that are trying to use the network at the same time detect the error after the first slot time of 64 bytes This means that the NIC detects late collisions only when transmitting frames that are longer than 64 bytes The problem with this is that with frames smaller than 64 bytes the NIC can t detect the error Generally if you experience late collisions with large frames on your network you re very likely also experiencing late collisions with small frames These types of errors are generally caused by Ethernet cables that are longer than that allowed by the IEEE 802 3 specification or are the maximum size permitted by the particular type of cable or by an excessive amount of repeaters on the network between the two nodes Another thing to note is that these errors may actually be caused by a node on the network that has faulty hardware and is sending damaged frames that look like collision fragments These damaged frames can sometimes appear to a network card to be a late collision Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Network adapters Transmits aborted excessive collisions This error occurs if there are excessive c
469. them Any group of actions clauses found after any single or set of device entries is used for those devices Place these device entries at the end of your overrides configuration file e If you want to change the way the enumerator starts TCP IP you have to override the definition of the basic io net command that s defined in etc systems enum include net By default the command is Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd etc re d re sysinit io net ptcpip If you want to enable IPSec add this code to your overrides file all set IONET_CMD io net ptcpip ipsec Host specific enumerators To further customize the enumerators for your system configuration you can create a etc host _cfg HOSTNAME system enum directory If this directory structure exists the re devices script tells the enumerators to read configuration files from it instead of from etc system enum Even if you have a etc host _cfg HOSTNAME system enum directory the enumerator looks for an oem directory and overrides file under etc system enum An easy way to set up the directory is to copy the etc system enum directory including all its subdirectories to your etc host _cfg S HOSTNAME system directory and then start customizing etc re d re sysinit The etc system sysinit script runs etc re d re sysinit to do local initialization of your system February 1 2
470. then io hid loading the devh usb so driver Then start devi microtouch io hid dusb devi microtouch microtouch touchusb Ethernet adapters For Ethernet adapters start the USB stack then io net loading the appropriate driver For example to start the driver for a Kawasaki based USB Ethernet adapter do the following io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb io net dklsi options Mass storage devices The devb umass driver supports devices that follow the Mass Storage Class Specification You can determine that the device is suitable by looking for the following information in the output from usb vv Mass Storage Class 08h SubClass Code Command Block Specification Olh Reduced Block Command RBC 02h SFF 8020i MMC 2 ATAPI 04h UFI 05h SFF 8070i 06h SCSI transparent Protocol Code Protocol Implementation 00h Control Bulk Interrupt 330 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Character devices with command completion interrupt Olh Control Bulk Interrupt with no command completion interrupt 50h Bulk Only Transport To use a USB mass storage device on a Neutrino system start io usb as described above then the devb umass driver By default this driver creates an entry for disk based devices in dev in the form dev hdn where n is the drive number Once you ve started the driver you can treat the device like a disk For example for a mass storage device
471. thname of the palette file for pterm PTERMRC The name of a local configuration file for pterm PWMOPTS Windows hosted version only Options you want to pass to the window manager when it starts For more information see pwm in the Utilities Reference PWM_PRINTSCRN_APP The application to start when the Print Scrn key is pressed The default is snapshot Troubleshooting Here are some problems or questions that you might have concerning Photon How do I change the color scheme in Photon You can change the color of the title bars within Photon for any given state To do this choose Launch Configure Appearance then select the Window tab In this tab you can choose one of the predefined schemes from the list or you can set each window state active and inactive and the title color independently Ive set an alias in my profile but it isn t set in my Photon terminals The shell doesn t export aliases In Photon the default pterm isn t started as a login shell and therefore doesn t read your etc profile and profile configuration files If you want an alias to be defined in all of your shells inside or outside a Photon terminal set the alias in your shell s startup 102 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting file For more information see ksh s startup file in Configuring Your Environment Alternatively you can use
472. tml Once you ve decided on a directory structure you need to export these environment variables before starting Slinger export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html For information on setting environment variables when you login to your machine see Configuring Your Environment Running Slinger To run Slinger simply type slinger amp 366 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Dynamic HTML The Slinger web server communicates over TCP sockets so you need to have socket runtime support This means you need to have a TCP IP stack running For more information see the TCP IP Networking chapter in this guide The Slinger server listens on the TCP port 80 Since this port number is less than 1024 Slinger needs to run as root As soon as it has attached to the HTTP port it changes itself to run as user ID 2 by calling setuid 2 Many embedded servers force the user to relink the server in order to add pages which compromises reliability because vendor and user code compete in a shared memory space Despite its size Slinger provides enough functionality to support accessing generated dynamic HTML via CGI or SSI Dynamic HTML The embedded web server lets you use create dynamic HTML in various ways e CGI e SSI e Data server CGI method The embedded web server supports the Common Gateway Interface CGD 1 1
473. to different agents disabled Latency Timer Cache Line Size PCI IO Address Max Lat Min Gnt PCI Int Pin Interrupt line Device Dependent 0x40 0x50 0x60 0x70 0x80 0x90 OxA0 OxBO 308 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 c0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Oh Single function Oh Build in self test not supported 20h Oh d800h length 16 enabled Ons Ons NC 0 Registers 00 00 00 00 05 00 02 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd CD ROMs OxC0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxDO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxEO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxFO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 Of 00 00 00 00 00 00 Find the entry for the device you want to locate and it ll give you the details on the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID You may need to search for keywords e g Audio in order to identify your device You can search the manufacturer s website for information or use the vendor and device IDs to cross reference with usr include hw pci_devices h You can also search ht
474. tory inodes file longfilenames file Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 417 File maintenance utilities 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd chkfsys dcheck zap If something destroys the first few blocks of your filesystem you can try to recover them by using the r option to dinit and then running chkfsys For more information see dinit in the Utilities Reference The chkfsys utility is your principal filesystem maintenance tool This utility e checks the directory structure of an entire disk partition reports any inconsistencies and fixes them if possible e verifies overall disk block allocation e writes anew bitmap upon your approval The chkfsys utility assumes that the root block is valid If the root block isn t valid chk sys complains and gives up you ll need to try restoring the root block with the dinit utility The dcheck utility checks for bad blocks on a disk by attempting to read every block on the drive When you specify the m option dcheck removes any bad blocks from the disk allocation bitmap bitmap If it finds the file bad_b1lks dcheck updates the bitmap and recreates the bad_blks file You can run dcheck a few times to increase your chances of recognizing bad blocks and adding them to the bad_blks file The zap utility lets root remove files or directories from the filesystem without returning the used blocks to the free list You might do this for exam
475. tp www pcidatabase com CD ROMs You usually attach CD drives to a SCSI or EIDE ATA bus which driver you use depends on the bus Ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly If you attached the CD drive to an EIDE bus simply use the devb eide driver If the drive is on a SCSI bus you need to determine the proper driver for your SCSI interface see Hard disks below The cam cdrom so shared object provides a common access method for CD ROM devices The drivers load the cam cdrom so and fs cd so shared objects by default CD ROM devices support the ISO 9660 filesystem and appear in the dev directory as dev cdx where x is the number of the drive starting at 0 Simply mount the drive using the mount utility specifying ed as the type of filesystem mount tcd dev cd1 fs cdrom You don t need to remount the drive when you change CDs For information about specific options e g disabling audio extensions disabling multisession support see cam cdrom so and fs cd so in the Utilities Reference February 1 2005 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 309 DVDs 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd DVDs Neutrino supports DVD ROMs and RAMs DVD ROM You can treat DVD drives like CD ROM drives However Neutrino currently doesn t support UDF format DVD disks You can use DVD drives to read CDs and the setup for a DVD ROM is the same as for a CD ROM For more deta
476. tributes Max Packet Size Endpoint Attributes Max Packet Size Interval Interface Class Subclass Protocol Endpoints Endpoint Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 1 0x05c7 QTRONIX 0x2011 USB Keyboard and Mouse r1 12 v1 00 N A 0x00 Independent per interface 8 0x0409 English 511 1024 bytes 1 1 Oxa0 Bus powered Remote wakeup 50 mA 2 0 0 0x03 HID 0x01 Boot interface 0x01 Keyboard Control 1 0 Control 8 1 Interrupt IN 8 20 ms 1 0 0x03 HID 0x01 Boot interface 0x02 Mouse Control 1 0 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd USB devices February 1 2005 Attributes Control Max Packet Size 8 The vendor and product fields indicate the type of device and possibly what chipset it uses The common types of USB controllers are UHCI Universal Host Controller Interface EHCI Enhanced Host Controller Interface OHCI Open Host Controller Interface made by others The EHCI controller supports high speed signalling only Either a OHCI or UHCI controller s should be present to support low or full speed devices If your system doesn t have an EHCI controller the device will work at the slower speed The operating system needs to run the stack in order to know how to interact with USB devices and controllers You need to 1 Identify your controller The documentation for the hardware should describe the type of control
477. tries and the POSIX mt ime on the parent directory At the commit none level all disk writes are time delayed in the write behind cache and so multiple files can be created deleted in the in memory block without requiring any physical disk access at all so of course any power failure here would mean that those files wouldn t exist when the system is restarted This example illustrates how the record size affects sequential file access on an x86 PIII 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using 454 Chapter 20 e Fine Tuning Your System February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Filesystems the QNX 4 filesystem The table lists the rates in megabytes per second of writing and reading a 256M file Record size Writing Reading 1K 14 16 2K 16 19 4K 17 24 8K 18 30 16K 18 35 32K 19 36 64K 18 36 128K 17 37 Note that the sequential read rate doubles based on use of a suitable record size This is because the overheads of context switching and message passing are reduced consider that reading the 256M file 1K at a time requires 262 144 IO READ messages whereas with 16K records it requires only 16 384 such messages 1 16th of the non negligible overheads Write performance doesn t show the same dramatic change because the user data is by default placed in the write behind buffer cache and written in large contiguous runs under timer control using O_SYNC would illustrate a difference The limiting factor here
478. trol program to prevent lpr from putting files in the queue This is usually done when a printer is going to be down for a long time The superuser can turn the printer back on using lpre lprq error messages waiting for printer to become ready offline The daemon couldn t open the printer device This can happen for several reasons e g the printer is offline or out of paper or the paper is jammed The actual reason depends on the meaning of error codes returned by the system device driver some printers can t supply enough information to distinguish when a printer is offline or having trouble especially if connected through a serial line Another possible cause of this message is that some other process such as an output filter has an exclusive open on the device all you can do in this case is kill off the offending program s and restart the printer with lpre printer is ready and printing The lprq program checks to see if a daemon process exists for the printer and prints the file status located in the spooling directory If the daemon isn t responding the root user can use 1prc to abort the current daemon and start a new one waiting for host to come up February 1 2005 This implies that there s a daemon trying to connect to the remote machine named host to send the files in the local Chapter 14 Printing 301 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd queue If the remote machine is up
479. ts Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2G 1 32 bit filesystem limit Directory size filesystem size and disk size Depends on the server 32 bit filesystem limit CIFS filesystem The limits for CIFS filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2G 1 32 bit filesystem limit Directory size filesystem size and disk size 32 bit filesystem limit The CIFS filesystem doesn t support chmod or chown Embedded flash filesystem The limits for embedded flash filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size filesystem size and disk size 2G 1 Directory size Limited by the available space February 1 2005 Chapter 21 e Understanding System Limits 467 Other system limits 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd File entries directory entries and file extents are connected by linked lists The longer these lists get the longer it takes to seek for a position in append to and get statistics about files Other system limits These limits apply to the entire system Processes A maximum of 4095 active at any time on ARM platforms the limit is 63 processes Prefix space resource manager attaches etc Limited by memory Sessions and process groups 4095 since you need at least one process per session or group Physical address space No limits except those imposed by the hardware see the document
480. ts equiv or etc hosts 1pd and the request message must come from a reserved port number Other utilities such as rlogin also use etc hosts equiv to determine which hosts are equivalent The etc hosts 1pd file is used only to control which hosts have access to the printers To allow access only to those remote users with accounts on the local host use the rs field in the printer s entry in etc printcap rs Network manager If you want to print on a remote printer you need to run the Neutrino network manager io net This manager loads shared objects DLLs to provide the protocols and device drivers needed For example to load the full TCP IP stack npm tcpip so anda device driver suitable for Ethernet adapters compatible with NE 2000 devn ne2000 so start io net like this io net dne2000 ptcpip 282 Chapter 14 e Printing February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Printing with lpr If you re using a TCP IP stack like this you might want to configure your network interface to specify the type and number of your NIC and the IP address and netmask for your TCP IP interface For more information see TCP IP Networking Printer capabilities etc printcap Before you can print anything the nodes must know something about the specific printer being used as a minimum where the printer is located A description of the printer is kept in a file named etc printcap on each node The etc pri
481. ttings on the card and try changing them if possible The device enumerator should configure and start ISA PnP cards If it doesn t you might need to obtain a copy of isapnp which is used to initialize ISA PnP cards Neutrino doesn t supply this utility but it s freely available on the Internet and has been ported to Neutrino The device enumerator should start PCI cards correctly If your PCI card doesn t work swap PCI slots Sometimes the IRQ that s assigned to the particular slot doesn t work well with the card For additional information about the card use the pei utility For a list of supported hardware see our website as described in the introduction to this chapter PCCARD and PCMCIA cards February 1 2005 Neutrino supports PCMCIA 1 0 2 0 and CardBUS type cards By default the driver detects the ISA PCI based controller If an adapter isn t detected check the supported hardware page to ensure that your PC Card adapter s chipset is supported Currently the driver doesn t let you specify the adapter s I O port and IRQ but you can specify the card s I O port and IRQ If the driver fails to start e Ensure that the devp pecard server has a free memory window at OxD4000 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 323 PCCARD and PCMCIA cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd e Check the BIOS on the PC or Laptop to see that this memory isn t cached or used by another device e Check that the PC Ca
482. ty doesn t preserve environment variables except for a few special ones such as PATH and TERM The PATH environment variable specifies the search paths for commands while LD_LIBRARY_PATH specifies the search paths for shared libraries for the linker The initial default values of PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH are specified in the buildfile before procento is started Two February 1 2005 Chapter 9 e Configuring Your Environment 183 Configuration strings 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd configuration strings see Configuration strings below CS PATH and _CS_LIBPATH take the default values of PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH The login utility uses _CS_PATH to set the value of PATH and passes this environment variable and both configuration strings to its child processes If you type set or env in a shell that was started from login you ll see the PATH variable but not LD_LIBRARY_PATH _CS_LIBPATH works in the same manner as LD_LIBRARY_PATH You can use the etc default login file to indicate which environment variables you want login to preserve You can edit this file to add new variables such as LD LIBRARY PATH but you can t change existing variables such as PATH and TERM If you use ksh as your login shell you can edit etc profile and HOME profile to override existing variables and add new ones Any environment variables set in etc profile override previous settings in etc default login and HOME profile overrid
483. u don t have Caps Lock on To avoid giving clues to unauthorized users Login doesn t tell you whether it s the user name or the password that s wrong If you can t resolve the problem yourself your system administrator root user can set a new password on your account This symptom can also occur if one or more password related files are missing If the system administrator is in the middle of updating the files it s possible that its absence will be temporary Try again in a minute or two if this might be the case Otherwise see your system administrator for help If you are the system administrator and can t access the system try accessing it from another Neutrino machine using Qnet from a development machine using the qconn interface or boot and run from the installation CD ROM to gain shell access to examine and repair the necessary files My text mode login fails with a message command No such file or directory The system couldn t find the command specified as your login shell This might happen because e The command wasn t found in login s PATH usually bin usr bin Specify the full pathname to the program e g usr local bin myprogram in the user s etc passwd account entry e The account entry specifies options or arguments for your login shell You can t pass arguments to the initial February 1 2005 Chapter 3 e Managing User Accounts 33 Troubleshooting 2005 QNX Software Systems L
484. u must quote the following characters to avoid their special interpretation I amp 7 Tab Newline Space You might need to quote the following characters depending on their context within a shell command _ In order to quote You can A single character Precede the character with a single backslash character All special characters within a Enclose the whole string in string of characters single quotes All special characters within a Enclose the whole string in string except for and double quotes For example these commands search for all occurrences of the string QNX Neutrino in the chapter1 html file grep QNX Neutrino chapterl html grep QNX Neutrino chapterl html grep QNX Neutrino chapterl html However note that grep QNX Neutrino chapterl html doesn t do what you might expect as it attempts to find the string QNX in the files named Neutrino and chapter1 html February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 51 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd 52 Depending on the complexity of a command you might have to nest the quoting For example find name html xargs grep 1 QNX Neutrino less This command lists all the HTML files that contain a string consisting of QNX followed by any characters followed by Neutrino The command line uses find to locate all of the files with an extension of html and passes the list of fi
485. up the main system services In order to edit this file you must log in as root Before you change the sysinit script make a backup copy of the latest working version If you need to create the script remember to make it executable before you use it see chmod in the Utilities Reference The sysinit script does the following 1 It starts slogger if it isn t yet running 2 The script starts the pipe manager pipe This manager lets you pass the output from one command as input to another for more information see Redirecting input and output in Using the Command Line 3 Next sysinit starts mqueue which manages message queues and named semaphores 4 If this is the first time you ve rebooted after installing the OS sysinit runs etc re d rc setup once which creates various directories and swap files 166 Chapter 8 e Controlling How Neutrino Starts February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd etc system sysinit February 1 2005 Next sysinit sets the CS_TIMEZONE configuration string to the value stored in etc TIMEZONE If this file doesn t exist sysinit sets the time zone to be UTC or Coordinated Universal Time formerly Greenwich Mean Time For more information see Setting the time zone in Configuring Your Environment If etce re d re rtc exists and is executable sysinit runs it to set up the realtime clock We recommend that you set the hardware clock to UTC time and use the _
486. ur profile so that it s always in effect see ksh s startup file in Configuring Your Environment Substitutions The shell lets you use a shorthand notation to include the values of certain things in the command line The shell does the following substitutions in this order e directories tilde expansion e parameters e commands e arithmetical expressions e braces e filename generation Directories tilde expansion The shell interprets the tilde character as a reference to a user s home directory The characters between the tilde and the next slash if any are interpreted as the name of a user For example mary some_file refers to some_file in the home directory of the user named mary 46 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Shell Parameters Commands February 1 2005 If you don t specify a user name it s assumed to be yours so some_file refers to some_file in your home directory Your home directory is defined in your entry in the password database see the description of etc passwd in Managing User Accounts To include the value of a parameter on the command line put a dollar sign before the parameter s name For example to display the value of your PATH environment variable type echo SPATH Sometimes you might want to execute a command and use the results of the command in another command You can do it
487. ur system The superuser has what Windows calls administrator s rights A special file that usually has a pathname as its data Symbolic links are a flexible means of pathname indirection and are often used to provide multiple paths to a single file Unlike hard links symbolic links can cross filesystems and can also create links to directories system page area thread timer timeslice February 1 2005 An area in the kernel that is filled by the startup code and contains information about the system number of bytes of memory location of serial ports etc This is also called the SYSPAGE area The schedulable entity under Neutrino A thread is a flow of execution it exists within the context of a process A kernel object used in conjunction with time based functions A timer is created via timer _create and armed via timer_settime A timer can then deliver an event either periodically or on a one shot basis A period of time assigned to a round robin scheduled thread This period of time is small usually four milliseconds the actual value shouldn t be relied upon by any program it s considered bad design Glossary 517 1 48 51 51 205 48 end of options 56 66 current directory 54 112 218 413 not supported by dev shmem 213 flash filesystems 223 parent directory 112 218 413 not supported by dev shmem 213 flash filesystems 223 incommand syntax 56 altboot 117 160 409
488. urce manager and the client programs that use the associated resource is done through a flexible mechanism called pathname space mapping In pathname space mapping an association is made between a pathname and a resource manager The resource manager sets up this mapping by informing the Neutrino process manager that it s responsible for handling requests at or below in the case of filesystems a certain mountpoint This allows the process manager to associate services i e functions provided by resource managers with pathnames Once the resource manager has established its pathname prefix it receives messages whenever any client program tries to do an open read write etc on that pathname For more detailed information on the resource manager concept see Resource Managers in System Architecture Chapter 1 e Getting to Know the OS February 1 2005 February 1 2005 Chapter 2 Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down In this chapter root or non root 11 Logging in 12 Logging out 13 Shutting down and rebooting 14 Chapter 2 e Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 9 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd root or non root Neutrino is a multiuser operating system it lets multiple users log in and use the system simultaneously and it protects them from each other through a system of resource ownership and permissions Depending on the configuration your system boots into either Photon i e graphic
489. ut guarantees that the characters won t remain buffered too long For example imagine that the device receives This sentence is coming across the serial port By default the system has to service 47 interrupts to receive this sentence If you set the receive trigger level to 14 the number of interrupts is reduced to four This helps the overall system performance but you re trading off reliability the higher the receive trigger t the higher the possibility of losing data Multiport serial adapters February 1 2005 For multiple serial adapters you may need to specify the I O port and IRQs manually in the driver for each port see General serial adapters for examples By default the driver should detect the ports and IRQs but with some multiport adapters the enumerators don t detect the ports correctly You can edit the enumerators to detect your multiport card and have it set up each port for you You need to edit the etc system enum devices overrides file see the Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 333 Network adapters 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide and enum devices in the Utilities Reference Parallel ports Terminals On a standard PC and some x86 systems parallel ports use the devc par driver see the BSP documentation for the driver for your target hardware By default the driver detects the parallel port If you need to you can
490. utables data files and so on associated with Photon The top of a directory structure that contains executables data files plugins etc associated with the Integrated Development Environment IDE which is shipped as part of the QNX Momentics Professional Edition Nonessential system binaries such as cron dumper and nicinfo Data that s independent of the architecture such as icons backdrops and various awk programs A directory for source code The var directory contains variable data files including cache files lock files log files and the following var dumps The directory where dumper saves any dumps that result when a program terminates abnormally var pkg spill The default spill directory for the package filesystem if you re using it it isn t used by default For more information see Spill directory in Working with Filesystems Chapter 6 e Working with Files 131 File ownership and permissions 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd File ownership and permissions Each file and directory belongs to a specific user ID and group ID and has a set of permissions also referred to as modes associated with it You can use these utilities to control ownership and permissions To Use Specify the permissions for a file or directory chmod Change the owner and optionally the group fora file or chown directory Change the group for a file or directory chgrp For details see the
491. uter You can connect to an existing Photon session or start a new one This utility lets you interact with the remote Photon session as though you were working directly on that 90 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Connecting to other systems Phindows node In order to access the remote node using phditto you must run phrelay on the remote machine You can end the phditto session by selecting Close from Phditto s window menu To view this menu right click the phditto label in the Taskbar Phindows Photon in Windows is a connectivity tool that lets you use Windows platforms to connect to and interact with graphical Photon applications running on a remote QNX computer Configuring the Neutrino machine for TCP IP use If you re using TCP IP make sure the configuration is correct before you use Phindows e The remote Neutrino host must have TCP IP installed and running e The remote host must also be running inetd with the following items added to the TCP IP configuration files In etc inetd conf add the line phrelay stream tcp nowait root usr bin phrelay phrelay In etc services add the line phrelay 4868 tcp February 1 2005 These lines are already present in the configuration files but they re commented out Just remove the number sign to add these entries These two entries cause inetd to listen for incoming requests to establis
492. vice m PnP manufacture model id n Printer name s Spooldir name A real 2 soa senna esas ees e FileVersion xx xx is the IP address of the printer prt0 is the port used Filter Filter Supported Resolution Supported PaperSize Supported Orientation Supported Intensity Supported InkType Resolution PaperSize Orientation Intensity InkType NonPrintable February 1 2005 on the printer in this case port zero ps d ncftpput V E xx xx prtd phs ps phs to ps 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 0 Portrait 1 Landscape 0 Min 100 Max 1 B amp W 3 Color CMY 4 Color CMYK 600 600 8500 11000 Letter 0 Portrait 50 4 Color CMYK 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom Appendix Ae Examples 487 Configuration files for spooler 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _850DDE PNPSTR MEFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP Supported PaperSize 8500 8500 7250 11000 8262 5846 7000 11692 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT 11000 14000 10500 17000 11692 8262 9875 16524 FF FF OH OF Letter Legal Exec B A4 A5 B5 A3 if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP _25A854 PNPSTR MEFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP Supported PaperSize 8500 8500 7250 11000 8262 5846 7000 11692 Using SAMBA PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT
493. ware Systems Ltd A directory entry 412 An inode entry 414 An extent block 415 QNX 4 file structure 416 XX List of Figures February 1 2005 About This Guide February 1 2005 About This Guide XX 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Typographical conventions February 1 2005 Typographical conventions Throughout this manual we use certain typographical conventions to distinguish technical terms In general the conventions we use conform to those found in IEEE POSIX publications The following table summarizes our conventions Reference Example Code examples if stream NULL Command options 1R Commands make Environment variables PATH File and pathnames dev null Function names exit Keyboard chords Keyboard input Keyboard keys Program output Programming constants Programming data types Programming literals Variable names User interface components Ctrl Alt Delete something you type Enter login NULL unsigned short OxFF message string stdin Cancel We format single step instructions like this To reload the current page press Ctrl R We use an arrow in directions for accessing menu items like this About This Guide XxXiii Typographical conventions 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd You ll find the Other menu item under Perspective Show View We use notes cautions and warnings to highlight important messages Notes point
494. ware Systems Ltd buildfile A text file containing instructions for mkifs specifying the contents and other details of an image or for mkefs specifying the contents and other details of an embedded filesystem image canonical mode channel CIFS CIS 500 Glossary Also called edited mode or cooked mode In this mode the character device library performs line editing operations on each received character Only when a line is completely entered typically when a carriage return CR is received will the line of data be made available to application processes Contrast raw mode A kernel object used with message passing In Neutrino message passing is directed towards a connection made to a channel threads can receive messages from channels A thread that wishes to receive messages creates a channel using ChannelCreate and then receives messages from that channel using MsgReceive Another thread that wishes to send a message to the first thread must make a connection to that channel by attaching to the channel using ConnectAttach and then sending data using MsgSend Common Internet File System aka SMB a protocol that allows a client workstation to perform transparent file access over a network to a Windows server Client file access calls are converted to CIFS protocol requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual file
495. ware Systems Ltd Printing with spooler Printing Setting up February 1 2005 To keep it simple we ve taken the easy way out in this example by sending a PostScript file to a PostScript printer It s easy because the formatting is embedded in the PostScript text You might have to filter the print file to get your printer to work using lpr you can specify the filter to use in the etc printcap entry for the printer for more information on this see Filters with spooler Neutrino provides the spooler utility as an alternative printing mechanism to the standard UNIX like 1p family Photon applications use spooler for printing and use a filter to convert Photon draw stream phs output into the form that the printer understands spooler The spooler utility is usually started by an enumerator when you start Neutrino see Controlling How Neutrino Starts The utility manages one printer but you can run more than one instance of spooler When you start spooler or the system starts it e It sets up an entry for the printer in the dev pathname space dev printers printer_name spool e Next spooler queries the printer to determine its type constructs a properties file for the specific printer from the system s general printer configuration files see below and stores the file in the printer s directory under dev e Then spooler creates a spooling directory var spool printers printer_name
496. window Resize the window use the mouse or cursor keys to choose the new size Minimize the window Maximize the window Workspace double click the window menu button Alt F5 or double click the title bar Alt F7 Alt F8 Alt F9 Alt F10 or double click the title bar The window manager pwm provides the following shortcuts If you want to Press Move the backmost window to the front of the Alt Esc window stack Cycle through the windows Alt Shift Esc Cycle through the consoles Ctrl Alt 1 9 continued Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGU 95 Photon environment variables 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd If you want to Press Display the Desktop Menu Alt Enter Photon skips any empty virtual consoles when you cycle through them The wmswitch process which Photon starts automatically provides these shortcuts If you want to Press Cycle through the applications Alt Tab Cycle in reverse order though the applications Alt Shift Tab Exiting Photon If you want to exit Photon you can press Ctrl Alt Shift Backspace applications or utilities are running on your computer If there are files may be left open Moreover if you reboot when a critical update is in progress the filesystem might need maintenance AN CAUTION Before entering this command make sure that no If you don t want anyone to be able to u
497. work activity A pointer cam that magnifies the image directly under the pointer You can specify the horizontal and vertical radius in pixels The taskbar that lets you switch between applications simply by selecting their icons You can change the font font size active and inactive colors and decide whether or not to display balloons when you hover over an entry with the pointer A slider that controls the volume coming from the sound card To mute and unmute the volume select the small speaker icon in this plugin A miniature version of your nine virtual consoles You can decide when to display window frames always never or depending on the size of the world view The Desktop menu is the one that pops up when you right click on the Photon desktop You can run phmenu from the command line by typing phmenu amp This utility lets you drag and drop the menu items to the trash or to a new location When the item is selected you can modify the label shown in the menu the hot key and the command to run You can add new items by selecting the item you would like and dropping it into the location desired in the tree For more information see phmenu and pwm in the Utilities Reference February 1 2005 Chapter 5 e Using the Photon microGUI 75 Settings and preferences 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Starting applications automatically You can tell Photon to launch applications on startup To do this add
498. y launched on each console The terminal initialization utility tinit reads etc config ttys to determine what to launch on the consoles By default tinit launches a login command on the first console only but tinit is armed to launch a login on any other console on which you press a key This means that while console 1 is always available the other consoles aren t used unless you specifically switch to one of them and press a key If you increase the number of consoles on your machine make sure you edit etc config ttys so that tinit will know what to start on the additional consoles Each virtual console can be running a different foreground application that uses the entire screen The keyboard is attached to the virtual console that s currently visible You can switch from one virtual console to another and thus from one application to another by entering these keychords February 1 2005 Chapter 4 e Using the Command Line 41 Shell 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Shell If you want to go tothe Press Next active console Ctrl Alt Enter or Ctrl Alt Previous active console Ctrl Alt Use the plus and minus keys in the numeric keypad for these keychords You can also jump to a specific console by typing Ctrl Alt n where n is a digit that represents the console number of the virtual console For instance to go to dev con2 if available press
499. y 1 2005 Chapter 13 e TCP IP Networking 257 Choosing the right stack configuration 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd The device enumerator starts io net automatically when you boot loads the full TCP IP stack and starts the appropriate drivers for the detected devices If you want to use the tiny stack or specify any options e g to enable IPSec when you boot you need to edit the device enumeration files For more information and an example see Device enumeration in the Controlling How Neutrino Starts chapter in this guide Tiny stack npm ttcpip so 258 Use the tiny stack when you need to conserve resources It supports many but not all of the functions found in the full TCP IP stack see npm ttcpip so in the Utilities Reference for a list of its limitations When you start the tiny stack use the command line options to set the configuration parameters For example io net dne2000 pttcpip if en0 10 100 default 10 1 To see how you ve configured your system or to view the current network connections when using the tiny stack read the proc ipstats file like this cat proc ipstats You ll see something like this Ttcpip Jun 15 2000 22 36 01 verbosity level 0 ip checksum errors 0 udp checksum errors 0 tcp checksum errors 0 packets sent 0 packets received 0 en0 addr 10 0 0 100 netmask 255 0 0 0 down 100 addr 127 0 0 1 netmask 255 0 0 0 up DST 10 0 0 0 NETMASK 255 0 0 0 GATEW
500. y 135 infocmp 38 196 information nodes See inodes init CVS command 379 391 Initial Program Loader See IPL initialization system 157 inodes 118 410 413 450 entries 216 413 pregrowing 449 input drivers 320 methods 196 modes 38 redirecting standard 49 trap file 320 input drivers starting 101 input cfg 77 321 329 input hostname 320 inputtrap 320 Ins key 39 insert mode 39 Integrated Development Environment See IDE integrity ensuring on entire disk system 419 interactive mode 485 interface controllers information displaying 271 internal modems 348 international characters 59 147 152 filenames 116 538 Index fonts 194 input methods 196 Internet boot protocol daemon 261 daemons 260 domain names daemon 262 super server 124 260 surfing 84 Interrupt Request line See IRQ io audio 322 io blk so 453 cache size 311 io graphics 352 354 io hid 329 330 io net 120 240 257 262 265 268 330 335 CIFS 224 NFS 226 printing with 282 Qnet 245 starting 168 243 io net directory 246 269 io usb 328 IOREAD 457 IP 253 addresses mapping hostnames to 270 filtering 437 sample configuration file 493 masquerading See NAT Network Address Translation nameservers 254 security 436 ipf 438 February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Index IPL Initial Program Loader 157 code 119 ipl diskpcl 160 ipnat 438 IPSec 436 enabling 171 ipstats 258 270 IRQ Interrupt Request l
501. y CIFS filesystem 467 chown 132 216 Index 523 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd not supported by CIFS filesystem 467 chown restricting use of 463 ci CVS command 382 CIFS filesystem 223 467 starting 173 clean flag chkfsys 420 clients PPPoE 264 TCP IP 253 clock realtime setting up 167 clock so 74 els DOS command 59 emd DOS command 59 CMD _INT 368 coaxial cables 339 collisions excessive 345 frames 347 late 344 multiple 343 single 343 colors background 76 pterm 104 windows 76 COLUMNS 183 command DOS command 59 command interpreters See shells command line 37 default prompt 11 editing 43 interpreting 37 commands basic 58 built into shells 55 524 Index completing 44 DOS equivalents for 59 finding 54 multiple ona command line 45 recalling 39 53 remote execution 57 substituting 47 troubleshooting 64 usage messages 56 commit CVS command 382 commit filesystem level 454 Common Gateway Interface See CGI Common Internet File System See CIFS comp DOS command 59 compressed archive files 135 compressing 401 COMPUTERNAME DOS variable 63 COMSPEC DOS variable 63 Concurrent Versions System See CVS condvars limits 469 conf file extension 135 config 123 configurable limits 461 PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED 463 PCLINK MAX 463 PC_MAX_CANON 463 PC_MAX_ INPUT 463 PC_NAME_MAX 461 463 PC_NO_TRUNC 464 PC_PATH_MAX 463 PC_PIPE_BUF 463 PC_VDISABLE 464 _SC_LOPEN_MAX 462 configurati
502. y selected image on a web page The same script is presented here in C and per1 so that you can see how to implement scripts in either language You should put the executable C program rand images cgi and the per1 script rand_images p1 in usr www cgi bin Use chmod to make sure that both files have 755 permissions The images that they access are actually located in usr local httpd images The web pages access the images in their local directory the CGI script just figures out which one it wants to load To run these scripts from a web page use the following HTML with SSI commands 372 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Examples lt H2 gt Here is a random image lt H2 gt lt P gt Perl Script lt exec cgi rand_images pl gt lt BR gt C Program lt exec cgi rand_images cgi gt lt BR gt rand_images c February 1 2005 To compile this application run cc o rand_images cgi rand_images c Listing This program selects a random number and then chooses an image based on that number This allows the image to change each time the webpage is loaded include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt time h gt set variables char dir images char files filel jpg file2 jpg file3 jpg file4 jpg file5 jpg int num int size int main size sizeof fil
503. you edited the enumerator correctly there should be an entry in etc system config graphics traplist with the driver you hope to run 4 Run crttrap clear crttrap trap 5 The driver you want should now have been used and detected Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware 361 Video cards 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Sometimes this procedure works other times it doesn t If it doesn t work use one of the generic drivers or contact us about adding support for your graphics chipset Even if this procedure works we can t guarantee the driver will work as expected If the device ID wasn t in the graphics enumerator we haven t tried that hardware and therefore can t guarantee it will work properly 362 Chapter 15 e Connecting Hardware February 1 2005 Chapter 16 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server In this chapter Where should you put the files 365 Running Slinger 366 Dynamic HTML 367 Security precautions 370 Examples 371 February 1 2005 Chapter 16 e Setting Up an Embedded Web Server 363 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Where should you put the files Neutrino ships with Slinger a very small web server optimized for embedded applications Since it supports Common Gateway Interface CGI 1 1 HTTP 1 1 and dynamic HTML via SSI commands it lets you easily add embedded HTTP services and dynamic content to your embedded applications For example you can write an application that mo
504. ypassing 173 changing 24 27 characteristics of 24 database 20 forgotten 25 groups not supported 22 protecting encrypted 21 removing 29 pasting command line 43 patches 232 PATH 54 63 65 181 183 368 DOS version 63 security 54 path DOS command 59 pathconf 462 PATHEXT DOS variable 63 PATHINFO 368 pathnames about 110 absolute 111 indirection 218 mapping 8 114 Index 545 Index 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd maximum length 463 relative 111 truncating 464 pattern matching awk 202 grep 47 205 perl 202 pax 395 399 401 PC Cards 323 information displaying 324 PC character set 116 PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED 463 pei 262 308 PCI BIOS 163 cards 323 indexes 262 modems 349 server 120 pei bios 163 340 pel cfg 296 PC_LINK_MAX 463 PC _MAX CANON 463 PC_MAX_INPUT 463 PCMCIA 323 PC_NAME MAX 216 461 463 PC_NO_TRUNC 464 PC_PATH MAX 463 PC_PIPE_BUF 463 PC_VDISABLE 464 pdebug security and 435 ped 146 performance improving 134 445 perl 202 scripts 372 permissions 132 407 etc pwlock 20 546 Index etc group 20 etc passwd 20 etc shadow 20 account database 20 default setting 135 181 groups 18 30 31 root 18 setting 31 203 216 pfm 78 file associations 103 pfr file extension 135 194 pg UNIX command 3 ph directory 180 ph script 20 173 352 phapps 76 193 Phditto 90 disabling 77 PHEXIT_DISABLE 100 phf file extension 135 194 phfont 135 PHFONT 100 PHFO
505. ype fonts ASCII text file TrueType font file Usage message source for programs that don t embed usage in the program source code QNX recursive make 138 Chapter 6 e Working with Files Recovering Data gzip tar Backing Up and Recovering Data helpviewer phfont Many text based editors applications and individual users phfont make QNX Momentics development suite continued February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Troubleshooting Extension Description Related programs utilities wav Audio wave file phplay xml Extensible Markup Language file multiple uses including IDE documentation in a QNX Momentics PE development system zip Compressed archive file gzip If you aren t sure about the format of a file use the file utility file filename Troubleshooting Here are a few problems that you might have with files I m trying to write a file but I get a permission denied message You don t have write permission for the file If you re the owner or root you can change the permissions see File ownership and permissions above I m trying to list a directory that I have write permission for but I get a permission denied message You need to have read or execute permission for a directory in order to list it See File ownership and permissions above I m having trouble with a file that has a space in its name The command interpre
506. ystem by default but you can use it if you wish The package filesystem is implemented as s pkg see the Utilities Reference For an overview of the package filesystem see Virtual filesystems in the Filesystems chapter of the System Architecture guide Packages in their repositories 228 The purpose of the package filesystem is to manage packages in their repositories It ensures that various nodes can pick and choose a custom set of files and directories they want to use In essence the package filesystem creates a virtual filesystem that redirects access requests to a real filesystem based on a set of user selected packages The contents of the various packages determine what the virtual filesystem looks like For example consider a system that includes two packages Core and Util where the Core Package contains e pkgs base qnx os corel1 0 e pkgs base qnx os corel 0 etc passwd e pkgs base qnx os corel 0 bin true e pkgs base qnx os corel 0 x86 bin cat e pkgs base qnx os corel 0 x86 bin echo and the Util package contains e pkgs base qnx utill 0 x86 bin 1s The actual filesystem looks like this Chapter 11 e Working with Filesystems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Package filesystem a E a Go O ears ipsa cals of on ia bin nop Saad passwd true bin ls cat echo Actual filesystem using the package filesystem but the virtual file
507. ystem may register a single mountpoint of cdrom Mutual exclusion lock a simple synchronization service used to ensure exclusive access to data shared between threads It is typically acquired pthread _mutex_lock and released pthread_mutex_unlock around the code that accesses the shared data usually a critical section See also critical section name resolution In a Neutrino network the process by which the Qnet network manager converts an FQNN to a list of destination addresses that the transport layer knows how to get to name resolver NDP Program code that attempts to convert an FQNN to a destination address Node Discovery Protocol proprietary QNX Software Systems protocol for broadcasting name resolution requests on a Neutrino LAN network directory Neutrino 508 Glossary A directory in the pathname space that s implemented by the Qnet network manager Product name of the RTOS developed by QNX Software Systems February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd NFS Network FileSystem a TCP IP application that lets you graft remote filesystems or portions of them onto your local namespace Directories on the remote systems appear as part of your local filesystem and all the utilities you use for listing and managing files e g 1s cp mv operate on the remote files exactly as they do on your local files Node Discovery Protocol node domain nodename package See NDP
508. ystem will no longer boot If the filesystem is intact If your filesystem is intact yet the machine still refuses to boot from hard disk then either of the following is probably damaged e the partition loader program in physical block 1 e the Neutrino loader in the first block of the QNX 4 partition To rewrite a partition loader use fdisk fdisk dev hd0 loader To rewrite the QNX loader use dinit dinit b dev hd0t79 You should now be able to boot your system February 1 2005 Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data 427 Chapter 19 Securing Your System In this chapter General OS security 431 Neutrino specific security issues 435 Setting up a firewall 437 February 1 2005 Chapter 19 e Securing Your System 429 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd General OS security General Now that more and more computers and other devices are hooked up to insecure networks security has become a very important issue The word security can have many meanings but in a computer context it generally means preventing unauthorized people from making your computer do things that you don t want it to do There are vast tracts of security information in books and on the Internet This chapter provides a very brief introduction to the subject of security points you toward outside information and resources and discusses security issues that are unique to Neutrino OS security It should be fairly obvious that security
509. zip my_archive tar gz or gunzip my_archive tgz These commands decompress the file resulting in my _archive tar You can also use tar with the z option to extract from the archive without decompressing it first tar xzf my_archive tgz Chapter 18 e Backing Up and Recovering Data February 1 2005 2005 QNX Software Systems Ltd Storage choices Storage choices CDs February 1 2005 You can back up to a CD by using a CD burner on the Neutrino system or by creating an ISO image and copying it to a system with a CD burner that can burn ISO images You can use cdrecord to burn CDs on a Neutrino system To get this software go to our website http www qnx com log into your myQNX account and look in the 3rd Party Software section of the Download Center In either case you have to create an ISO image of the data that you want to burn to a CD You can do this with mkisofs a utility that s included with cdrecord Before you can create an ISO image you need to arrange the files into the directory structure that you want to have on the CD Then use mkisofs like this mkisofs 1 f r joliet quiet V My Label o my_iso_image iso This command creates an ISO image named my_iso_image iso with the label My Label using the Joliet file format allowing full 31 character filenames 1 following all symbolic links when generating the filesystem f and generating SUSP and RR records using the Rock Ridge prot

USER'S GUIDE - QNX Software Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents